JP2020175286A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine having improved operation relationship between a large winning hole and a distribution part.SOLUTION: In the case of an operation mode in which a state of a flow-down prevention plate 1015 is a projecting state advantageous to a player after an opening/closing plate 650b performs predetermined operation, a player easily understand the state of the flow-down prevention plate 1015 since the player may confirm whether the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 650b is predetermined operation. However, when changing the state of the flow-down prevention plate 1015 according to the number of times of a state change in the opening/closing plate 650b, an influence to the flow-down prevention plate 1015 totally differs depending on how many times the state change in the opening/closing plate 650b occurs within the number of reference times even if a mode (operation mode) of the state change is totally identical. Therefore, amusement in which the flow-down prevention plate 1015 becomes a projecting state advantageous to a player can be realized without any preliminary announcement.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 39

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, in the second profit state determination part where the game ball that has won the big winning opening arrives, by operating the distribution part in the left-right direction, the player can obtain two different streams of profit. There is a gaming machine that distributes gaming balls on the road (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-155538

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the operation relationship between the large winning opening and the distribution unit.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a good operation relationship between a large winning opening and a distribution unit.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a winning opening arranged in a gaming area where the gaming ball flows down, a state in which the gaming ball can win a prize in the winning opening, and a state in which the game ball cannot win a prize. A profit acquisition means that gives a predetermined profit to a player by flowing down a first switching means that switches between, a first driving means that drives the first switching means, and a game ball that has won a prize in the winning opening. In the game machine provided with, the game ball that has won the winning opening is configured to be able to be stopped, and the stopped game ball is configured to be able to flow down to the profit acquisition means, and the stopping means has been reached. A second switching means for switching between a stopped state in which the game ball can be stopped at the stopping means and a non-stop state in which the game ball reaching the stopping means is not stopped at the stopping means is provided. The 2 switching means changes the state of the second switching means between the stationary state and the non-stationary state at least once each time the first switching means changes its state between the possible state and the impossible state by a predetermined reference number of times. A means for transmitting the number of times to be made is provided.

The game machine according to claim 2 is the game machine according to claim 1, wherein the first switching means continuously changes its state by the trigger of 1, and the game ball cannot win a prize in the state change. It is composed of a combination of a short-term state change performed by the length and a long-term state change performed by a length that allows the game ball to win, and is performed at the same number of times as an integral multiple of the predetermined reference number of times.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first switching means continuously changes its state by the trigger of 1, and the number-of-times transmitting means is the reference number of times. It is formed from a device that circulates in a mode of returning to the initial position each time, and includes a return means for returning the number transmission means to the initial position regardless of the posture of the number transmission means.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the operation relationship between the large winning opening and the distribution unit can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, the length of the state change of the large winning opening is extremely different, so that the large winning opening and the distribution unit are separated from each other. The operation relationship can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the degree of freedom in the number of continuous operations triggered by 1 can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a partial front view of the portion of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board on the upstream side of the storage device. It is a partial front view of the portion of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board on the downstream side of the second entrance. (A) and (b) are front views of the first variable winning device, the second variable winning device, and the storage device. (A) is a front perspective view of the storage device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the storage device. (A) is a front view of the storage device, and (b) is a top view of the storage device. (A) is a rear view of the storage device, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device in line Xb-Xb of FIG. 9 (a). (A) is a partial side view of the storage device in the direction of arrow XIa of FIG. 10 (a), and (b) is a partial side view of the storage device in the direction of arrow XIb of FIG. 10 (a). (A) and (b) are partial front views of the second variable winning apparatus. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the storage device. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the storage device. (A) and (b) are partial front perspective views of the first variable winning apparatus. (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the second specific winning opening in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and (b) shows the time change of the second specific winning opening in the 12th round of the jackpot B. It is a figure shown. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a front view of the annular groove in the second embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the annular groove in the line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. 18 (a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the annular groove in the XVIIIc-XVIIIc line of a). (A) to (d) are side views schematically showing the ball stop device. (A) to (d) are side views schematically showing the ball stop device. (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the second specific winning opening in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and (b) shows the time change of the second specific winning opening in the 12th round of the jackpot B. It is a figure shown. (A) and (b) are rear perspective views of the storage device according to the third embodiment. (A) is a front view of the storage device, and (b) is a top view of the storage device. It is a rear view of a storage device. (A) is a rear view of the ball stop device, and (b) is a side view of the ball stop device in the direction of arrow XXVb of FIG. 25 (a). (A) is a rear view of the ball stop device, and (b) is a side view of the ball stop device in the direction of arrow XXVIb of FIG. 26 (a). (A) is a rear view of the ball stop device, and (b) is a side view of the ball stop device in the direction of arrow XXVIIb of FIG. 27 (a). (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the second specific winning opening in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and (b) shows the time change of the second specific winning opening in the 12th round of the jackpot B. It is a figure shown. It is a rear perspective view of the storage device in 4th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a ball stop device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a ball stop device. (A) and (b) are the rear view of the ball stop device. (A) to (c) are schematic views of a drive motor, a friction rotating member, a rotating disk, and a flow prevention plate in the direction of arrow XXXIIIa in FIG. 32 (a). (A) to (c) are schematic views of a drive motor, a friction rotating member, a rotating disk, and a flow prevention plate in the direction of arrow XXXIIIa in FIG. 32 (a). (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the second specific winning opening in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and (b) shows the time change of the second specific winning opening in the 12th round of the jackpot B. It is a figure shown. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the 2nd specific winning opening in the 12th round of jackpot B (the 2). (A) is a front view of the storage device according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a top view of the storage device in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a). (A) is a front view of the rotating member, (b) is a top view of the rotating member in the direction of arrow XXXVIIIb of FIG. 38 (a), and (c) is a top view of the rotating member of FIG. 38 (a). It is a partial cross-sectional view of the rotating member in line XXXVIIIc. (A) is a front view of the storage device, and (b) is a top view of the storage device in the direction of arrow XXXIXb of FIG. 39 (a). (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the second specific winning opening in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and (b) shows the time change of the second specific winning opening in the 12th round of the jackpot B. It is a figure shown. (A) is a diagram showing the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening in the 12th round of the jackpot A (No. 2), and (b) and ( c) is a diagram showing the time-dependent change (whether it is in a protruding state or a buried state) of the flow-down prevention plate. (A) is a front view of the storage device according to the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the storage device in the direction of arrow XLIIb of FIG. 42 (a). It is a rear view of the storage device 6000. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device in the XLIV-XLIV line of FIG. 42 (a). (A) is a front view of the storage device, and (b) is a side view of the storage device in the direction of arrow XLVb of FIG. 45 (a). (A) is a front view of the storage device, and (b) is a side view of the storage device in the direction of arrow XLVIb of FIG. 46 (a). (A) is a front view of the storage device according to the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device in the XLVIIb-XLVIIb line of FIG. 47 (a). (A) is a front view of the storage device, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device in line XLVIIIb-XLVIIIb of FIG. 48 (a). (A) is a front view of the storage device, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device in the XLIXb-XLIXb line of FIG. 49 (a). (A) is a front view of the storage device according to the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a partial side view of the storage device in the direction of arrow Lb of FIG. 50 (a). (A) is a front view of the storage device, and (b) is a partial side view of the storage device in the direction of arrow LIb of FIG. 51 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the storage device according to the ninth embodiment, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device in the LIIb-LIIB line of FIG. 52 (a), and (c) is a storage device. It is a partial front view of the apparatus, (d) is a partial sectional view of the storage apparatus in the LIId-LIID line of FIG. 52 (c). (A) is a partial front view of the storage device, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device in line LIIIb-LIIIb of FIG. 53 (a), and (c) is a partial front view of the storage device. (D) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device on the LIIId-LIIId line of FIG. 53 (c).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 17, one embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 as a first embodiment will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a game ball) flowing down in front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in the front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. Port 63, 1st ball entrance 64, 2nd ball opening 640, 1st variable winning device 65, 2nd variable winning device 650, normal ball opening (through gate) 67, variable display device unit 80, storage device 1000 Etc. are assembled together, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the variable display device unit 80, and the storage device 1000 are base plates 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the through hole formed in the above, and is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) formed in front of the game board 13 by being partitioned by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn by taking the opportunity of winning a prize in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and the ball normally enters the ball 67. When it passes, a lottery of ordinary symbols (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery of special symbols performed for the balls entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. In the pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also referred to as the probability variation state of the special symbol). For example, it is determined as a jackpot of a special symbol with a probability of 1/60. For convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed for the entry into the first entrance 64 is referred to as the "lottery of the special symbol 1", and the lottery is performed for the entry into the second entry 640. The lottery of the special symbol is called "lottery of special symbol 2".

When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, which are normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse). Alternatively, the opening operation is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) (until 10 balls are won). More specifically, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won), and 12 In the round, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

In addition, inside the storage device 1000 arranged downstream of the second variable winning device 650, there are two types of ball entrances (probability change) for determining the added value after the end of the jackpot given after the end of the special game state. The ball entry port 1031 and the normal ball entry port 1033) are provided. Although the details will be described later, when a ball enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031 in the special game state, a “high probability state of a special symbol” is given as an added value after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, if the ball never enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031 during the special game state, the "normal symbol time saving state" is given as an added value after the jackpot ends. There are two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B" (see FIG. 17). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a is configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the ease of entering the ball into the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031 is different.

When the lottery of the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and the lottery result is obtained after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed. The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry times is for each type of entry opening. Each is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1) or the number of reserved balls for the second entry port 640 (special). If the number of reserved balls of symbol 2) remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed, and the variable display according to the lottery is started. If both the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

In the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol), whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is determined. When the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entry port 640. It will be easy. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second entry port 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. Along with being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. To be started.

In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds is 15 rounds in a special gaming state (15R big hit). Further, in the special game state, when the ball enters the probability variation entrance 1031 (see FIG. 2), as an added value after the end of the big hit, the pachinko machine 10 from the end of the big hit to the next big hit. Shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol). On the other hand, if the ball never enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031 in the special game state, as an added value after the jackpot ends, from the end of the jackpot until the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times. During that time, it shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol. In addition, when shifting to the time saving state of the normal symbol after the end of the big hit, it also shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol. This low-probability state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit. Although the details will be described later, in the "big hit B", the ball is more likely to enter the probability variation entrance 1031 during the special game state (during the big hit state) than in the "big hit A". That is, since the "big hit B" is more likely to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit, it is more likely to be the big hit again at short intervals after the end of the big hit. Therefore, the "big hit B" is a more advantageous jackpot for the player than the "big hit A".

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, to the special gaming state. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift. The high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) in the present embodiment includes the state of the game in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640. .. On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the probability of the special symbol is not changing, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of the jackpot is lower than that during the probability change of the special symbol.

In addition, the time saving state of the normal symbol (during the time saving) means a state of the game in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased and the ball is easily won in the second entrance 640. Further, the normal state refers to a state of the game in which neither the probability of the special symbol is changed nor the time is shortened of the normal symbol (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) are not increased).

During the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, not only the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state A longer time is set compared to. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640. That is, a lottery for special symbols is likely to be performed.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol. , The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened when the normal symbol is hit may be increased as compared with the normal state. In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) does not change during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed. Further, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed, and the normal symbol (normal symbol) Only the hit probability of the second symbol) may be configured to be increased as compared with the normal state.

In the present embodiment, when the probabilistic state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special game state, the probabilistic state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may limit the number of times. Specifically, for example, the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given from the end of the special game state to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 120 times, and after the lottery of the special symbol is completed 120 times. May be configured to be set to the normal state. Further, the number of times that the special symbol is in the probable change state is not limited to 120 times, and may be arbitrarily determined. Similarly, in the present embodiment, when the ball does not enter the probability variation entry ball opening 1031 in the special game state, the time saving state of the normal symbol is set until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times. However, the time saving period of a normal symbol is not limited to 100 times, and may be arbitrarily determined.

A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by the lighting state whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with the entry (starting winning) into the first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 640 is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or a ball entered in the first entrance 64. Of these, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry is made. The number of balls is held up to 4 times for each type of entry slot, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of times of holding is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, it corresponds to the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 to display the third symbol. The third symbol display device 81, which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and the second symbol, which is triggered by the passage of a ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67, is variablely displayed. A second symbol display device 83 composed of the LED is provided. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display device 37 displays the first symbol. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the device 37. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols having numbers from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned. It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, in the case of "big hit B", one of all the numbers "0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9" including odd numbers is added. A variable display is performed in which the symbols are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned.

Next, a display (right-handed navigation) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 that prompts the player to launch the ball aiming at the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 will be described.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special symbol is in a probabilistic state or the normal symbol is in a time-saving state, the electric accessory 640a is easily released, so that the ball is moved to the right side of the game board 13. By launching (striking to the right), it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 640. Further, as will be described in detail later, if a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the first entrance 64 It is more likely to be a "big hit B" than when a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 1) performed based on the ball entering the ball. Therefore, in the probabilistic state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot and the time saving state of the normal symbol, right-handed hitting is advantageous for the player. In other words, even if the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state or the normal symbol is set to the time saving state, the ball cannot be entered into the second entrance 640 unless the player hits right. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the probability change state of the symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, by displaying a specific image (right-handed navigation), the player can perform the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol. It is structured so that the benefits of becoming can be surely obtained.

In the right-handed navigation system, the character "Aim to the right !!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three right-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the character. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the player obtains the benefits of being in the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. This warning image is determined to be performing a right-handed hit even though the player is not in a period in which the ball should be hit (right-handed) into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. This is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this case. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is hitting right in the normal state (neither the probabilistic state of the special symbol nor the time saving state of the normal symbol).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to be difficult to open in a normal state (even if a right-handed hit is made, it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640). For this reason, when a right-handed hit is made in a normal state, the chance of receiving a special symbol lottery is reduced as compared with a case where a ball is hit at the first entrance 64 by a left-handed hit. That is, if a right-handed hit is made in a normal state, it is difficult to make a big hit, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image and prompting left-handed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing money.

When it is determined that the player is hitting right in the normal state, the characters "warning" and "play left-handed !!" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Characters and are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that he should not hit right (should hit left). In addition, by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning screen, the clerk in the hall can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method of performing right-handed in a normal state.

As a method of determining whether or not a player is hitting right, for example, a ball enters the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) where the ball can flow in when hitting right. Judge by whether or not the ball is hit.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state, a right-handed warning image is displayed. It is not limited to this. For example, when it is detected that a ball has won (winned) into the second specific winning opening 650a in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), it is determined that an illegal game is being performed, and the right It may be configured to display a hit warning image. As a result, the clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning image. In addition, when it is detected that a ball has entered the second specific winning opening 650a in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), a signal indicating that fraud is being performed is sent to the hall computer. It may be configured to output. As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where fraudulent activity is being performed.

Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 1000 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the storage device 1000 is, for example, a case where a ball entering the probability variation entry port 1031 or the normal entry opening 1033 is detected even though the storage device 1000 is not in the special gaming state (big hit state).

When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 1000, the character "warning" is displayed in large size in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. At the bottom, the words "Call a gate error clerk" are displayed. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, so that the clerk in the hall or the like can promptly request repairs or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 includes a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. Is to be displayed in a variable manner by alternately lighting the above for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time (variation time) required for the variation display of the second symbol is set so that the game state is shorter during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol than during the normal state. As a result, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) can be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, since the chances of hitting the normal symbol increase, it is possible to give the player many chances that the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second entrance 640.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability is increased, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a are increased, and the like, the second entrance 640 is reached by other methods. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than in the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the game state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for one hit of the normal symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal entry port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, the balls that flow down to the right side of the game board. A part of is configured to be passable. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is held up to a total of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and on the second symbol holding lamp 84. Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of a ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of assembled normal ball entrances (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main cause is that the first entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front entrance 64 of the first entrance 64, a second entrance 640 in which the ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and this is mainly due to the on of the second entrance switch. A big hit lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

In addition, each of the first entry opening 64 and the second entry opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640 are different, for example, the first entry. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the ball opening 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second ball opening 640 may be set to five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the electric combination The object 640a is in the open state (expanded state), and the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that in the normal state, and the time required for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is short, so that the fluctuation of the normal symbol is short. The "○" symbol is easily displayed on the display. Therefore, the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Further, during the probabilistic change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is longer than that in the normal state. Therefore, during the probabilistic change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second entry port 640 than in the normal state. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have an electric accessory as provided in the second ball entry port 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first entry port 64 and when the ball wins in the second entry opening 640. is there. However, as a type of jackpot that is selected when a jackpot is hit, the probability of becoming a jackpot (big hit B) that makes it easy for the ball to enter the probability variation entry ball opening 1031 during the special game state is the second entry slot 640. The case where the ball wins the ball is set higher than the case where the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (see FIG. 17).

During normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entry port 640. Therefore, go to the first entry port 64 without an electric accessory. A ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning a prize in the first entrance 64, a lot of chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming.

On the other hand, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. Since it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640, a ball is fired toward the second entrance 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"). ), It is better for the player to aim to become a big hit B by passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 to open the electric accessory 640a and winning the second entrance 640. It will be advantageous.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64 (lower left side of the second ball opening 640), and a horizontally long rectangular first specific winning opening is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. (Large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, if a big hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery performed due to winning a prize in the first ball slot 64 or the second ball slot 640, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a jackpot stop symbol. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is notified. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the first specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The first specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 14 times (14 rounds), for example. More specifically, the opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a is executed in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds in the special gaming state. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 is in a closed state that covers the first specific winning opening 65a and prevents the ball from entering the first variable winning device 65 by protruding toward the front side of the front view. An opening / closing plate 65b forming the above and a solenoid (not shown) for operating the opening / closing plate 65b are provided. The first specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the solenoid is driven to pull the opening / closing plate 65b to the back side of the front view to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normally closed state are temporarily formed. It operates so as to alternate between states.

A second variable winning device 650 is provided on the upper right side of the first variable winning device 65. Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 includes an opening / closing plate 650b that forms a closed state that prevents the ball from entering the second variable winning device 650 by protruding toward the front side of the front view, and an opening / closing plate thereof. It is equipped with a solenoid 650c (see FIG. 8) that operates the plate 650b. The second specific winning opening 650a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win (see FIG. 7B). On the other hand, a big hit was made by a lottery of special symbols, and in the 12th round, the opening / closing plate 650b covering the second specific winning opening 650a was pulled toward the back side of the front view, and the ball could be opened into the second variable winning device 650. The state is formed in a predetermined pattern (see FIG. 16) (see FIG. 7A).

As described above, based on the fact that the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a in the special gaming state (during the jackpot) enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031 provided inside the storage device 1000, the jackpot is hit. After the end, it shifts to the probable state of the special symbol. On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the special game state, or even if the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, all the balls enter the normal entry opening 1033. If this happens, the game will shift to the normal symbol time reduction state after the jackpot ends.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. In addition to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, other winning openings may be provided as the winning openings opened in the special gaming state. On the contrary, the winning opening may be only the first specific winning opening 65a. Further, the arrangement position is not limited to the arrangement of the present embodiment, and may be arranged at any position.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 66 below the first ball entry port 64. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the entry ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 66. To. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To do.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the first specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor for driving a movable accessory that operates during the game.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6, a route when the player ejects the ball to the right side of the game board 13 (when the ball is hit to the right) will be described. First, FIG. 5 is a partial front view of a portion of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 on the upstream side of the storage device 1000. As shown in FIG. 5, the flow path (path) on the right side of the game board 13 is provided with a normal ball entry port 67 above the flow path.

As described above, when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, a lottery for the normal symbol is executed. Then, when the normal symbol is hit, the second symbol display device 83 displays the “◯” symbol indicating the hit of the normal symbol after the variable effect for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol is executed. Then, based on the fact that the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 provided downstream of the normal entry port 67 It is released for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds x 1 time or 1 second x 2 times).

While the electric accessory 640 is open, the right-handed ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes shorter, and the opening period of the electric accessory becomes longer. 2 It becomes easy for the ball to enter the ball entry port 640. Therefore, by executing right-handed hitting, it is possible to receive a lottery of special symbols without reducing the number of balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a portion of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 on the downstream side of the second entrance 640 will be described. FIG. 6 is a partial front view of a portion of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 on the downstream side of the second entrance 640. As shown in FIG. 6, a second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, and a second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the second variable winning device 650. A first variable winning device 65 is provided.

That is, when the player hits the ball to the right, the ball that has flowed down to the downstream of the path (flow path) on the right side has flowed down to the downstream without flowing into (entering) the second entry port 640. The ball flows down in the direction of the second variable winning device 650. The ball that flows down in the direction of the second variable winning device 650 and enters the second specific winning opening 650a is guided to the inside of the storage device 1000 through the guide flow path 1020. Further, the ball that flows down in the direction of the second variable winning device 650 and does not enter the second specific winning opening 650a flows down in the direction of the first variable winning device 65. Then, the ball that has flowed down to the first variable winning device 65 and has not entered the first specific winning opening 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 66 (see FIG. 2). Will be done.

In this way, the ball can flow down in the direction of the storage device 1000, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 simply by the player hitting the right side. Therefore, in the special gaming state (big hit state), the player can put the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a simply by hitting the right, and a large amount of balls can be inserted. You can win a prize ball.

In addition, a part of the balls launched aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a enters the storage device 1000. Then, as will be described in detail later, in the special gaming state (big hit state), the tilting member 1040 can be tilted by the plurality of balls entering the storage device 1000 (from the initial state to the tilted state). This allows the ball to flow down to the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031. Since the game machine 13 in the present embodiment is set to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot based on entering the ball into the probable change ball opening 1031, the player is asked. It is possible to make the game more enjoyable to be a big hit, and to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, the operations of the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the storage device 1000 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. 7 (a) and 7 (b) are front views of the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the storage device 1000. Note that FIG. 7A shows a closed state of the first variable winning device 65, an open state of the second variable winning device 650, and a protruding state of the flow prevention plate 1015. FIG. 7B shows the first state. The open state of the variable winning device 65, the closed state of the second variable winning device 650, and the buried state of the flow prevention plate 1015 are shown.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is buried inside the game board 13 by the opening / closing plate 650b sliding toward the back side of the front view. , The second specific winning opening 650a can be opened. By opening the second specific winning opening 650a, a game ball flowing down a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 can enter the second specific winning opening 650a. As described above, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won) in the 12th round of the special gaming state (big hit state). .. Then, when a ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, 15 prize balls are paid out for each ball entered. Therefore, the player can win a large number of prize balls.

The ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a is guided to the inside of the storage device 1000 via the guide flow path 1020. Then, the sphere reaches the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 and flows down according to the inclination created by the upper surface of the tilting member 1040. In the initial state of the tilting member 1040 shown in FIG. 7A, the ball that has reached the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 flows down to the lower left side where the flow prevention plate 1015 is arranged. Therefore, as long as the flow prevention plate 1015 maintains the protruding state, the ball stays on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 moves into the inside of the game board 13 by the opening / closing plate 65b sliding toward the back side of the front view. It is configured so that it can be buried. As a result, the upper part of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, and the game ball flowing down the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 can be entered. As described above, in the first specific winning opening 65a, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds of the special gaming state (big hit state), a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or the ball is It will be open (until 10 prizes are won). Then, when a ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a, 15 prize balls are paid out for each ball entered. Therefore, the player can win a large number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 7B, the flow prevention plate 1015 changes to the buried state in conjunction with the closing state of the second specific winning device 650. Therefore, if the tilting member 1040 maintains the initial state when the second specific winning device 650 is closed, the ball anchored on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 flows down to the lower left side and normally enters. It is discharged to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the ball mouth 1033.

Next, an outline of the configuration of the storage device 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10. FIG. 8A is a front perspective view of the storage device 1000, and FIG. 8B is a rear perspective view of the storage device 1000. 9 (a) is a front view of the storage device 1000, FIG. 9 (b) is a top view of the storage device 1000, and FIG. 10 (a) is a rear view of the storage device 1000. 10 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device 1000 in the Xb-Xb line of FIG. 9 (a).

It should be noted that in FIGS. 8 to 10, the base plate 60 is partially broken and shown. Further, in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the back side of the base plate 60 is visible, and the side wall on the front side of the branch flow path 1030 arranged on the downstream side of the guidance flow path 1020 is transparent. Will be done.

As shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b), the storage device 1000 has a plate-shaped main body plate portion 1001 fastened and fixed to the base plate 60, and a sphere fixed to the back surface of the main body plate portion 1001. The ball that has flowed down on the front side of the main body plate portion 1001 and the stop device 1010 and has entered the second specific winning opening 650a is made to flow down to the back side of the main body plate portion 1001 and then directed toward the front side of the main body plate portion 1001 again. A guide flow path 1020, which is a flow path formed in a manner of flowing down, and a bifurcated branch flow path 1030, which is a flow path to which a ball discharged from the guide flow path 1020 reaches and branches the ball to the left and right. It is mainly provided with a tilting member 1040 that is rotatably supported by the base plate 60 inside the branch flow path 1030 and is arranged below the discharge port of the induction flow path 1020.

The ball stop device 1010 switches between preventing the ball from flowing down on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 in the protruding state of the flow-down prevention plate 1015, or making the flow-down prevention plate 1015 buried and letting the ball flow down downstream. It is a device to perform. The details will be described later.

The guide flow path 1020 has a ball receiving recess 1021 which is a U-shaped recess in front view for receiving a ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a, and a main body plate portion 1001 from the ball receiving recess 1021 toward the rear side. A passage port 1022 formed through the passage port 1022, an inclined flow path 1023 formed to be inclined to the lower left in the front view on the rear side of the passing port 1022, and a main body plate portion on the left side of the inclined flow path 1023 toward the front side. It mainly includes a discharge port 1024 formed through 1001 (see FIG. 10B).

The ball receiving recess 1021 is formed in such a manner that the bottom portion is inclined downward toward the rear side. As a result, the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a can be smoothly flowed down toward the passing opening 1022.

The passage port 1022 is one of the detection ports for detecting the passage of the ball, and when the ball passes, the winning of the ball to the second variable winning device 650 is detected and the prize ball is paid out.

The inclined flow path 1023 is a flow path extending downward to the left, and is formed so that the bottom portion is gently inclined downward toward the front side (the inclination in the front-rear direction is gently formed as compared with the inclination in the left-right direction). The left end portion is provided with an inclined surface portion 1023a. The inclined surface portion 1023a is formed as an inclined surface that inclines toward the left toward the front side.

Due to such a configuration, the sphere that has passed through the passage port 1022 rarely flows down to the front side in the middle of the inclined flow path 1023, and most of them collide with the inclined surface portion 1023a after flowing down to the lower left in the front view. By doing so, the direction is changed to the front side, and the water flows down from the discharge port 1024 in a downward manner. As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball is easily discharged from the left end of the discharge port 1024.

The discharge port 1024 is a through hole for discharging the ball flowing down the inclined flow path 1023 to the front side. In the present embodiment, a plurality of spheres (up to 3) can be ejected side by side in a left-right width. As a result, for example, the discharge mode of the sphere can be different depending on whether the sphere flows down one inclined flow path 1023 or the sphere flows down a plurality of inclined flow paths 1023 together. It is possible to prevent the player who visually recognizes the storage device 1000 from getting bored due to the same flow mode each time, and it is possible to entertain the player.

The branch flow path 1030 is a flow path partitioned by a plate extending on the front side of the main body plate portion 1001, and is a bifurcated flow path through which balls discharged from the discharge port 1024 can flow down, as described above. The probabilistic entry port 1031, the probabilistic side flow path 1032 that guides the ball to the probabilistic entry port 1031 and is formed on the right side of the tilting member 1040, and the above-mentioned normal entry port 1033. A normal side flow path 1034, which is a flow path for guiding the ball to the normal entry port 1033 and is formed on the left side of the tilting member 1040 in the front view, is mainly provided.

The tilting member 1040 is a rod-shaped portion that protrudes from the front surface of the main body plate portion 1001 toward the front side of the rectangular weight portion 1041 having a rectangular shape in front view, and eccentricizes the rectangular weight portion 1041 (eccentric to the right side). It mainly includes a shaft rod portion 1042 that supports the shaft, and a plate-shaped extension plate portion 1043 that extends toward the right side in the front view so that the upper surface is in a surface position with the upper surface of the rectangular weight portion 1041.

The tilting member 1040 is tilted toward its own center of gravity position side (the side where the rectangular weight portion 1041 is located (left side when viewed from the front)) when the ball is not on the upper surface (initial state, see FIG. 9A). Become. In this initial state, the ball landing on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 flows down to the left and flows down toward the normal side flow path 1034.

On the other hand, as will be described later in FIG. 14, when a plurality of balls (three or more in the present embodiment) are anchored on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040, the position of the center of gravity (extended plate) in which the tilting member 1040 and the balls are combined. The extension plate portion 1043 is tilted (tilted state) according to the side where the portion 1043 is located (right side when viewed from the front). In this tilted state, the ball landing on the upper surface of the tilted member 1040 flows down to the right and flows down toward the probabilistic change side flow path 1032. In this way, the tilting member 1040 changes its state depending on the relationship with the sphere that has landed on the upper surface, and acts as a member that assists the branching of the sphere.

Next, the operation of the ball stop device 1010 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10 as appropriate. 11 (a) is a partial side view of the storage device 1000 in the direction of arrow XIa of FIG. 10 (a), and FIG. 11 (b) is a view of the storage device 1000 in the direction of arrow XIb of FIG. 10 (a). It is a partial side view.

As shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, the ball stopper 1010 includes a base plate portion 1011 extending in a plate shape from the body holding plate portion 1001 toward the back surface side, and the base plate portion thereof. An annular groove 1012 formed as a groove in 1011 and an L rotary gear 1013 rotatably supported by the base plate portion 1011 inside the ring of the annular groove 1012, and the L rotary gear are meshed with the base plate. A reversing gear 1014 that is rotatably supported by the portion 1011 and a flow prevention plate 1015 that is connected to the reversing gear 1014 and is formed so as to project to the front side of the main body plate portion 1001 based on the rotation of the reversing gear 1014. A transmission rod 1016, which is a small-diameter metal rod fixed to the opening / closing plate 650b of the second variable winning device 650 and whose tip is pressed against the annular groove 1012, is mainly provided.

The annular groove 1012 is a groove formed along an elliptical shape that is long in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 11A), and a step is formed between the bottom portions of the upper groove 1012a and the lower groove 1012b. It is a groove that limits the traveling direction of the transmission rod 1016 that moves in contact with the bottom portion in one direction.

That is, at the rear end of the annular groove 1012 (left end in FIG. 11A), the lower groove 1012b has a groove depth (length in the depth direction of the paper surface in FIG. 11A) as compared with the upper groove 1012a. The upper groove 1012a and the lower groove 1012b change in the opposite inclination directions at the intermediate position in the front-rear direction, and the upper groove at the front end portion (right end portion in FIG. 11A) of the annular groove 1012. The groove depth (the length in the depth direction of the paper surface in FIG. 11 (a)) is larger in the 1012a than in the lower groove 1012b. With this configuration, the movement path of the transmission rod 1016 can be limited to one direction (counterclockwise direction) in FIG. 11A. Therefore, the transmission rod 1016 can be operated in one direction based on the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 650b.

The L rotary gear 1013 has a mode in which a rotary shaft is inserted through the base plate portion 1011 and is rotatably supported by the base plate portion 1011 and is fixed to the rotary shaft of the gear 1013a to form a gear 1013a. It mainly includes a cross member 1013b that rotates at the same angle.

The cross member 1013b is arranged to face the side surface of the base plate portion 1011 on which the annular groove 1012 is formed, and the gear 1013a is arranged on the opposite side of the base plate portion 1011 from the cross member 1013b.

As shown in FIG. 11A, the cross member 1013b is extended to a position where it interferes with the annular groove 1012 at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 11A) of the annular groove 1012. Therefore, a portion where the transmission rod 1016 pushes the cross member 1013b and interferes with the annular groove 1012 based on the transmission rod 1016 moving the upper groove 1012a to the left and the lower groove 1012b to the right. (A portion whose longitudinal direction is directed up and down) rotates 90 degrees at a time in a posture in which the longitudinal direction is oriented in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 11A).

That is, when the transmission rod 1016 moves around the annular groove 1012 halfway, the cross member 1013b rotates 90 degrees, and when the transmission rod 1016 moves around the annular groove 1012, the cross member 1013b rotates 180 degrees.

The reversing gear 1014 includes a gear 1014a meshed with the gear 1013a of the L rotary gear 1013, a disc-shaped disc portion 1014b integrally formed on one side of the gear 1014a in the axial direction, and the disc portion 1014b. It mainly includes a projecting pin 1014c that is eccentrically projected from the center.

The gear 1014a is formed in such a manner that the gear ratio is doubled with respect to the gear 1013a. That is, the gear 1014a is designed as a gear that rotates at an angle twice the rotation angle of the gear 1013a. That is, when the gear 1013a (cross member 1013b) rotates 90 degrees, the gear 1014a rotates 180 degrees, and when the gear 1013a (cross member 1013b) rotates 180 degrees, the gear 1014a rotates 360 degrees. Therefore, every time the transmission rod 1016 moves half a circle around the annular groove 1012, the positions of the protrusion pins 1014c are switched back and forth.

The flow-down prevention plate 1015 is a plate member that reciprocates back and forth based on the rotation of the reversing gear 1014, and has a connecting elongated hole 1015a extending in the vertical direction through which the projecting pin 1014c is inserted, and hits the ball in a protruding state. It is provided with a contact side surface 1015b, which is a contact side surface. In addition, in FIG. 11A, the protruding state of the flow-down prevention plate 1015 is shown. Further, the contact side surface 1015b is formed so that the angle formed with the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 in the initial state is 90 degrees.

From the state shown in FIG. 11A, when the reversing gear 1014 rotates 180 degrees and the projecting pin 1014c is arranged on the rear side, the flow prevention plate 1015 is pulled backward and a buried state is formed (FIG. 11). 7 (b)). Therefore, every time the transmission rod 1016 moves half a circle around the annular groove 1012, the state of the flow prevention plate 1015 changes. As a result, the state change of the second variable winning device 650 and the state change of the flow prevention plate 1015 can be synchronized.

In the present embodiment, since the L rotary gear 1013 is formed so as to rotate only every 90 degrees, the reverse gear 1014 meshed with the L rotary gear 1013 rotates only every 180 degrees. The flow prevention plate 1015 is formed in such a manner that it can only take a protruding state or a buried state. Therefore, by stopping the reversing gear 1014 at a halfway angle, it is possible to prevent the flow prevention plate 1015 from stopping at a halfway position.

The flow direction of the flow prevention plate 1015 (front-back direction) and the direction of receiving a load from the sphere (left-right direction, see FIG. 13) intersect at right angles. Therefore, when a plurality of balls apply a load to the flow-down prevention plate 1015, it is possible to prevent the flow-down prevention plate 1015 from moving in the moving direction. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the load due to the weight of the ball to be applied to the reversing gear 1014 connected to the flow prevention plate 1015, and it is possible to improve the durability of the reversing gear 1014.

The transmission rod 1016 is arranged in such a manner that the extending tip thereof is constantly pressed against the bottom of the annular groove 1012 in the groove depth direction by an elastic force. Further, since the diameter is small, some elastic deformation in the radial direction or the like is possible. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 650b is opened / closed, even if the path through which the transmission rod 1016 is guided between the outward path and the return path is displaced between the upper groove 1012a and the lower groove 1012b, the deviation is caused. , Can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the transmission rod 1016 itself.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the operation of the ball that has flowed down the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 by right-handed strike and has reached the second specific winning opening 650a will be described. 12 (a) and 12 (b) are partial front views of the second variable winning device 650. Note that FIG. 12A shows a case where the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a in a state where the second specific winning opening 650a is closed, and FIG. 12B shows the case where the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a. The case where the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a in the state where the 650a is open is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 12A, when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a with the second specific winning opening 650a closed, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. Since it is not possible to do so, it flows down to the left of the second specific winning opening 650a (see FIG. 12A). Then, the ball that has flowed down to the left of the second specific winning opening 650a flows down the flow path to the left of the second specific winning opening 650a. Since the left flow path of the second specific winning opening 650a is inclined in the direction of the first specific winning opening 65a, the ball flows down in the direction of the first specific winning opening 65a.

On the other hand, when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a with the second specific winning opening 650a open, as shown in FIG. 12B, the ball is on the extension line of the flow path into which the ball has flowed down. 2 The opening portion of the specific winning opening 650a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. As shown in FIG. 12B, a passage port 1022 for discharging the ball to the storage device 1000 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650. By entering the passage port 1022, the winning of the ball is detected and the winning ball is paid out, and the ball entering the inside of the second variable winning device 650 from the second specific winning opening 650a is inserted. It can be discharged to the storage device 1000.

A mode in which the game ball flows into the storage device 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. 13 (a) to 13 (c) and 14 (a) to 14 (c) are partial front views of the storage device 1000. It should be noted that the balls entered in the second variable winning device 650 are shown with numbers added in the order of entry.

As shown in FIG. 13A, when the first ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, the ball inclines until it reaches the inclined surface portion 1023a arranged at the left end of the inclined flow path 1023. It flows down to the lower left of the flow path 1023.

As shown in FIG. 13B, when the ball collides with the inclined surface portion 1023a, the flow direction of the ball changes to the front side, the ball is discharged from the discharge port 1024 to the front side, and lands on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040. When there is one ball on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040, the tilting member 1040 maintains the initial state, so that the ball flows down to the left and the flow prevention plate 1015 is in the protruding state (in the present embodiment, the first ball). 2 As long as the specific winning opening 650a is open), it is maintained on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040.

In the state of FIG. 13B, when the flow prevention plate 1015 is in the buried state (in the present embodiment, when the second specific winning opening 650a is in the closed state), the ball on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 is released. It flows down from the tilting member 1040 to the left and enters the normal ball entry port 1033 (see FIG. 9). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from accidentally entering the probability variation entry port 1031 (see FIG. 9) in the jackpot A (see FIGS. 16A and 17) described later.

That is, in the jackpot A, the second specific winning opening 650a opens in a short period (0.2 seconds) so that the ball cannot enter. However, if the ball accidentally enters the ball in this short period of time, it may occur even if the ball is being played without fraud. On the other hand, even if you mistakenly enter a ball, it is about one ball at most, and three balls do not enter.

Therefore, in the jackpot A, even if the ball accidentally enters the second specific winning opening 650a, the ball does not tilt the tilting member 1040, and after the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. Since the flow prevention plate 1015 is in the buried state, the ball is flowed to the left from the tilting member 1040. Therefore, in the jackpot A, it is possible to prevent the ball from accidentally entering the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031 (see FIG. 9).

As shown in FIGS. 13 (c) and 14 (a), when the second and third balls flow down the inclined flow path 1023, collide with the inclined surface portion 1023a and are discharged to the front side, the balls are discharged. Lands on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 at a position avoiding the first ball. That is, the second ball is arranged side by side to the right of the first ball (see FIG. 13C), and the third ball is the first ball and the second ball. (See FIG. 14 (a)). That is, when the sphere that comes later falls from above, it abuts on the sphere that is arranged earlier by its own weight and moves to the most stable arrangement.

In this way, even if the balls are discharged from the discharge port 1024 at different timings, a plurality of balls can be smoothly arranged side by side on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 by the action of the weight of each ball. .. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period until the position of the center of gravity of the tilting member 1040 is shifted in the left-right direction.

When three balls enter the second specific winning opening 650a at the same time, the second ball is while the first ball collides with the inclined surface portion 1023a and turns to the front side. When the third ball collides with the first ball, the ball turns to the front side, and the ball may be discharged from the discharge port 1024 to the front side at a position in the middle of the inclined flow path 1023. Even in this case, although the number added to the sphere is different from the state shown in FIG. 14 (a) (in FIG. 14 (a), the numbers "1, 3, 2" from the left are "1, 3, 2" from the left. It becomes 1, 2, 3 "), and the arrangement of three spheres side by side does not change. Therefore, the game can proceed without delay.

As shown in FIG. 14A, when three spheres are arranged side by side on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040, the position of the center of gravity when the tilting member 1040 and the sphere are integrated moves to the right side of the rotation axis, and the tilting member The 1040 is in a tilted state (see FIG. 14B).

As shown in FIG. 14B, in the tilted state, the ball on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 flows down to the right and flows down to the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031 (see FIG. 9). In the tilted state of the tilting member 1040, even if the fourth and subsequent balls flow down the tilted flow path 1023 and are discharged from the discharge port 1024 to the front side, if the ball is still on the tilting member 1040. The fourth and subsequent balls move with each other in a manner in which the balls that were previously on the tilting member 1040 are pushed to the right, and the tilting member 1040 can be maintained in the tilted state (FIG. 14 (b)). (See), if the balls have already disappeared from the tilting member 1040, there is no problem because some balls have already passed through the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031. Therefore, depending on how the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a (frequency), the tilting member 1040 malfunctions (the tilted state returns unexpectedly, the ball bites and the tilting member 1040 stops, etc.). It is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the probabilistic entry ball port 1031.

While a ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, a plurality of balls reach the upper surface of the tilting member 1040, and the tilting member 1040 may be in a tilted state or an initial state depending on the number of balls on the upper surface. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 14 (c), less than three balls (one in FIG. 14 (c)) may remain on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040.

As described above, the remaining ball flows down from the tilting member 1040 to the lower left due to the flow-down prevention plate 1015 being buried based on the second specific winning opening 650a being closed, and normally enters. It is discharged from the ball mouth 1033 to a ball discharge path (not shown).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of balls remaining on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 can be set to 0 after the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. As a result, a series of flows (operation effect) in which a plurality of balls are stored in the tilting member 1040 in order from 0, the tilting member 1040 is tilted, and the balls are flown toward the probability variation side flow path 1032 (see FIG. 9). Can be executed at each jackpot B (see FIG. 16B). As a result, the effect of the tilting member 1040 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the operation of the ball that has flowed down the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 by right-handed strike and has reached the first specific winning opening 65a will be described. In addition, in FIG. 15A, the case where the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a in a state where the first specific winning opening 65a is closed is illustrated, and in FIG. 15B, the first specific winning opening 65a is shown. The case where the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a in a state where the 65a is open is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 15A, when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a with the first specific winning opening 65a closed, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, it flows down the upper part of the first specific winning opening 65a and falls to the left side of the first variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 15A). Then, the ball that has fallen to the left side of the first specific winning opening 65a flows down to the out opening 66 (see FIG. 2) provided on the left side of the first specific winning opening 65a.

On the other hand, when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a with the first specific winning opening 65a open, as shown in FIG. 15B, the ball is on the extension line of the flow path into which the ball has flowed down. 1 The opening portion of the specific winning opening 65a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a. As shown in FIG. 15B, a ball discharge port 65d for discharging the ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided inside the first variable winning device 65. By entering the ball outlet 65d, the winning of the ball is detected and the winning ball is paid out, and the ball entering the inside of the first variable winning device 65 from the first specific winning opening 65a. Can be discharged. Since the bottom surface of the first variable winning device 65 is inclined in the direction of the ball ejection port 65d, all the balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 65a are entered into the ball ejection port 65d. Can be made to. Therefore, all the balls can be reliably discharged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 16A is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and FIG. 16B is a diagram showing the second specific winning in the 12th round of the jackpot B. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the mouth 650a.

First, FIG. 16A will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 16A shows the time-dependent change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a, and FIG. 16A shows. The lower graph shows the timed change (whether it is in the protruding state or the buried state) of the flow prevention plate 1015.

As shown in FIG. 16A, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time When (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. Then, the closed state is maintained until 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 12th round, and the 12th round ends based on the elapse of 7 seconds. In addition, this closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the flow prevention plate 1015 becomes a protruding state when the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, and becomes a buried state when the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. .. Here, since the time for opening the second specific winning opening 650a is extremely short, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a plurality of balls enter the storage device 1001, and in addition, the time for the flow prevention plate 1015 to be in a protruding state. Since it is extremely short, a plurality of balls are stored in the tilting member 1040, and it is possible to prevent the tilting member 1040 from tilting. As a result, in the jackpot A, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation entry ball opening 1031.

In this way, in the 12th round of jackpot A, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is so that the period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is open becomes extremely short. An opening pattern of 650a is set. Therefore, in most cases where the jackpot A is reached, the ball does not enter the probability variation entry ball opening 1031 during the special game state (during the jackpot), so that it is difficult to set the probability variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

The reason why the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the 12th round is to make it difficult to understand that it is a big hit A immediately after the start of the 12th round. Is. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 16B, but in the jackpot B where it is easy to enter the ball into the probability variation entry opening 1031, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) immediately after the start of the 12th round. ) 650a is opened. Therefore, by sharing the operation of the second specific winning opening (second big opening) 650a immediately after the start of the 12th round between the jackpot A and the jackpot B, it is expected that the jackpot this time will be the jackpot B. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16B, the time change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot B will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 16 (b) shows the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 16 (b). The lower graph shows the timed change (whether it is in the protruding state or the buried state) of the flow prevention plate 1015.

As shown in FIG. 16B, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is set to the open state. Then, the open state is maintained until 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 12th round, and the closed state is set based on the elapse of 5 seconds. Even if 10 balls enter the 2nd specified winning opening (2nd large opening) 650a before 5 seconds have elapsed, the 2nd specified winning opening (2nd large opening) 650a will still be used. It will be closed. This closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the flow prevention plate 1015 operates differently from the 12th round of the jackpot A. That is, the flow prevention plate 1015 is in a protruding state when the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, and is in a buried state when the second specific winning opening 650a is closed, which is the same as the jackpot A. However, in conjunction with the change of state of the second specific winning opening 650a, the protruding state is maintained from the start of the 12th round, and the state changes to the buried state based on the elapse of 5 seconds. Even if 10 balls enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a before the lapse of 5 seconds, the flow prevention plate 1015 changes to the buried state.

Therefore, for 5 seconds from the start of the 12th round of the jackpot B, the state in which the ball easily enters the second specified winning opening 650a is maintained, and the state in which the ball is easily stored in the tilting member 1040 is maintained. Will be done. As a result, the tilting member 1040 can be easily tilted by the weight of the ball, and at the jackpot B, the ball can easily pass through the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031. Therefore, the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state after the jackpot ends. It will be easier.

The opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to this, and the pattern is such that the ball can easily enter the probability changing ball opening 1031 and the probability changing ball opening 1031. If it is possible to set a pattern in which the ball is difficult to enter, it may be arbitrarily determined. For example, in the jackpot A, the second specific winning opening 650a operates in a manner of switching the state every 2 seconds, and in the jackpot B, the second specific winning opening 650a operates for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse). Alternatively, it may operate in a manner of maintaining the open state (until 10 balls are won).

Further, the number of rounds for opening the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is not limited to the 12th round, and may be set to any round. Further, the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened in a plurality of rounds. For example, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a may be opened in the first round and the fifteenth round. May be set to. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the probability-changing ball opening 1031, so that it is possible to more easily enter the probability-changing state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot B. Therefore, even though the jackpot B is won, the ball cannot be entered into the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a, which lowers the player's motivation for the game. It can be prevented (suppressed).

The contents of ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and FIG. 17B schematically shows a correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 17 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol.

As shown in FIG. 17A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a random number table 202a per first, a type selection table 202b per first, and a random number table 202c per second as part of the fixed value data described above. , And the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

The first hit random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter, which is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec), is stored. When the value of the first random number counter acquired based on the starting prize matches any of the determination values specified in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 17B) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type. , And the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry slot 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49". The jackpot A is associated with and defined in (see 202b1 in FIG. 17B). As described above, in the case of a jackpot A, the period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened is extremely short in the 12th round (FIG. 16A). reference). Therefore, it becomes difficult to store a plurality of balls in the tilting member 1040, and it becomes difficult to allow the balls to enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031. That is, when the jackpot A is reached, it becomes difficult to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

Further, the jackpot B is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99" (see 202b2 in FIG. 17B). As described above, in the case of a jackpot B, the period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened becomes longer in the 12th round, and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is opened. The flow-down prevention plate 1015 is configured to maintain a protruding state during the opening period of 650a (see FIG. 16B). Therefore, by allowing a plurality of balls to enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a while the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is open, the tilting member 1040 A plurality of spheres can be stored in the sphere, and the tilting member 1040 can be tilted by the weight of the spheres. Then, as described above, the probability variation entry ball opening 1031 is provided at the destination where the ball flows in the state where the tilting member 1040 is tilted. Therefore, when the jackpot B is reached, it becomes easy to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". The jackpot A is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 17B). Further, the jackpot B is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20 to 99" (see 202b4 in FIG. 17B). That is, the number of determination values that result in a jackpot B is larger when a jackpot is achieved by the special symbol 2 lottery than in the case where a jackpot is achieved by the special symbol 1 lottery. Therefore, when a big hit is made by the lottery of the special symbol 2, it is more likely to be a big hit B.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit is increased. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second entrance 640, and it becomes easy to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the probabilistic state of the special symbol that is likely to be a jackpot of the special symbol and is likely to be the jackpot B when the jackpot is reached, and the probabilistic change of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot Since the jackpot B, which tends to be in a state, is likely to be repeated, it becomes easy for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17C) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5-28" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 17 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5-204" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 17 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal entry port 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is used. It is judged whether or not it is a hit. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

As described above, according to the first embodiment, as a method of configuring the gaming machine, that the balls can easily flow down to the probabilistic side flow path 1032 by storing a predetermined number of balls in the tilting member 1040, the tilting member 1040 is used. By adopting a method of associating the ease of collecting balls with the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 650, the above-mentioned object can be achieved by one driving means (solenoid 650c).

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 21. In the first embodiment, the case where the flow prevention plate 1015 operates every time the second variable winning device 650 opens and closes has been described, but the storage device 2000 in the second embodiment opens and closes the second variable winning device 650. An opening / closing operation for operating the flow-down prevention plate 1015 and an opening / closing operation for not operating (maintaining) the flow-down prevention plate 1015 can be formed depending on the operation mode of. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the annular groove 2012 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 18 (a) is a front view of the annular groove 2012 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 18 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the annular groove 2012 in the line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. 18 (a). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the annular groove 2012 in the line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 18A.

As shown in FIG. 18A, the annular groove 2012 is a groove formed along a long elliptical shape in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 18A), and is formed on the upper side of the L rotary gear 1013. It mainly includes an upper groove 2012a and a lower groove 2110 formed and branched on the lower side of the L rotary gear 1013.

The upper groove 2012a has a smaller radius of curvature than the upper groove 1012a of the first embodiment, and is formed at a position that does not interfere with the cross member 1013b in FIG. 18A. Therefore, when the transmission rod 1016 passes through the upper groove 2012a, the cross member 1013b and the transmission rod 1016 do not come into contact with each other, and the L rotary gear 1013 maintains its posture.

The lower groove 2110 has a start groove 2111 connected to the rear end portion (left end portion in FIG. 18A) of the upper groove 2012a and a front end portion of the upper groove 2012a extending forward from the start groove 2111 (FIG. 18 (FIG. 18). a) The contact groove 2112 connected to the right end), the branch groove 2113 extending rearward from the connection position between the start groove 2111 and the contact groove 2112, and the rear end (rear end) of the branch groove 2113. It mainly includes a separation groove 2114 extending forward from the left end portion of FIG. 18A and connected to the front end portion (right end portion of FIG. 18A) of the upper groove 2012a.

As shown in FIGS. 18 (b) and 18 (c), the depth of the bottom of the annular groove 2012 is not constant and changes in an inclined direction in the extending direction of the groove. Thereby, the movement path of the transmission rod 1016 can be limited.

That is, as shown in FIG. 18B, at the connection position between the upper groove 2012a and the start groove 2111, the groove depth of the start groove 2111 is deeper than that of the upper groove 2012a, and the start groove 2111 and the contact groove 2112 At the connection position of, the groove depth of the contact groove 2112 is deeper than that of the start groove 2111, and at the connection position of the contact groove 2112 and the upper groove 2012a, the groove depth of the upper groove 2012a is deeper than that of the contact groove 2112. It is deepened.

Therefore, in the cross section shown in FIG. 18B, the transmission rod 1016 can move only in the moving direction of moving from the left end to the right. Therefore, the direction in which the transmission rod 1016 moves along the annular groove 2012 can be determined in one direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 18B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 18C, at the connection position between the upper groove 2012a and the start groove 2111, the groove depth of the start groove 2111 is deeper than that of the upper groove 2012a, and the start groove 2111 and the contact groove 2112 At the connection position of, the groove depth of the contact groove 2112 is deeper than that of the start groove 2111, and at the connection position of the contact groove 2112 and the separation groove 2114, the separation groove 2114 is larger than the contact groove 2112. The groove depth is deepened, and at the connection position between the separation groove 2114 and the upper groove 2012a, the groove depth of the upper groove 2012a is deeper than that of the separation groove 2114.

Therefore, in the cross section shown in FIG. 18C, the transmission rod 1016 can be moved only in the moving direction in which the transmission rod 1016 moves from the left end to the right. Therefore, the movement path of the transmission rod 1016 is determined when the solenoid 650c (see FIG. 9) is driven in such a manner that the contact groove 2112 is moved to the left again while the transmission rod 1016 is moving to the right. Can be done. That is, when the contact groove 2112 is moved to the left again while the transmission rod 1016 is moving to the right, the transmission rod 1016 moves along the path cross-sectionally viewed in FIG. 18 (c). In addition, the movement path of the transmission rod 1016 can be restricted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, the operation of the flow prevention plate 1015 caused by the transmission rod 1016 moving in the annular groove 2012 will be described. First, a case will be described in which the transmission rod 1016 does not turn back in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 19, the right side in FIG. 19 is the front side) while passing through the lower groove 2110. In this operation, specifically, as a driving mode of the solenoid 650c (see FIG. 9), the current is not applied again within a short period (for example, a period of less than 0.2 seconds) after the application of the current is stopped. Correspond to the case.

19 (a) to 19 (d) are side views schematically showing the ball stopper 2010. In addition, in FIG. 19A, the transmission rod 1016 is arranged at the front end of the annular groove 2012 (corresponding to the closed state of the second specific winning opening 650a), but in FIG. 19B, the transmission rod is The state in which the 1016 is arranged at the rear end of the annular groove 2012 (corresponding to the open state of the second specific winning opening 650a), but in FIG. 19C, the transmission rod 1016 is in contact with the cross member 1013b. However, in FIG. 19D, a state in which the transmission rod 1016 is separated from the cross member agent 1013b and arranged to the right is shown. The state shown in FIG. 19 (d) is restored to the state shown in FIG. 19 (a) when the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. In the series of operations returning from FIG. 19 (a) to FIG. 19 (d) and FIG. 19 (a), the second specific winning opening 650a changes from the closed state to the open state, and then returns to the closed state. Corresponds to the operation.

As shown in FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (b), as the second specific winning opening 650a changes from the closed state to the open state (the state changes in about 0.2 seconds by driving the solenoid 650c). ), The transmission rod 1016 moves rearward, and the tip of the transmission rod 1016 comes into contact with the start groove 2111 (see FIG. 19B).

As the second specific winning opening 650a is changed from the state shown in FIG. 19B to the closed state (the state is changed by the elastic spring due to the release of the drive of the solenoid 650c), the transmission rod 1016 moves forward. Based on the rotation of the L rotary gear 1013, the reversing gear 1014 rotates 180 degrees, and the flow prevention plate 1015 changes its state.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the second specific winning opening 650a performs the opening / closing operation once, the flow-down prevention plate 1015 changes to a different state. Therefore, in order to change the flow prevention plate 1015 from the buried state shown in FIG. 19D to the protruding state shown in FIG. 19A, the opening / closing operation of the second specific winning opening 650a may be performed once again.

20 (a) to 20 (d) are side views schematically showing the ball stopper 2010. In addition, in FIG. 20A, the transmission rod 1016 is arranged at the front end of the annular groove 2012 (corresponding to the closed state of the second specific winning opening 650a), but in FIG. 20B, the transmission rod is In FIG. 20 (c), the transmission rod 1016 is arranged at the back end of the separation groove 2114, and the state where the transmission rod 1016 is arranged at the back end of the contact groove 2112 is shown in FIG. 20 (d). The state in which the transmission rod 1016 has moved to the vicinity of the connection position between the separation groove 2114 and the upper groove 2012a is shown in the figure. The state shown in FIG. 20 (d) is restored to the state shown in FIG. 20 (a) when the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. In the series of operations returning from FIG. 20 (a) to FIG. 20 (d) and FIG. 20 (a), the second specific winning opening 650a changes from the closed state to the open state, and then returns to the closed state. Corresponds to the operation.

As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the second specific winning opening 650a changes from the closed state to the open state, and then the solenoid 650c is released to slightly move the closing plate 650b toward the front side. Along with the return, the transmission rod 1016 slightly moves from the rear end of the upper groove 2012a to the front side, and the tip of the transmission rod 1016 comes into contact with the confluence of the contact groove 2112 and the branch groove 2113 (FIG. 20 (b)).

By driving the solenoid 650c again from the state shown in FIG. 20B (for example, by driving the solenoid 650c again 0.1 seconds after the drive release of the solenoid 650c), the transmission rod 1016 is attached to the cross member 1013b. The transmission rod 1016 can be moved to the back side before abutting, in which case the transmission rod 1016 moves along the branch groove 2113 along the shape of the lower groove 2110 and reaches the separation groove 2113 ( (See FIG. 20 (c)).

After that, by releasing the drive of the solenoid 650c, the transmission rod 1016 moves to the front side along the separation groove 2114 as the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. Therefore, in the series of operations shown in FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (d), the transmission rod 1016 and the cross member 1013b do not come into contact with each other, so that the state of the flow prevention plate 1015 can be kept unchanged.

By combining the operation shown in FIG. 19 and the operation shown in FIG. 20, when the second specific winning opening 650a is maintained in the open state, the flow prevention plate 1015 is brought into the protruding state, and the balls are stored in the storage device 2000. It is possible to form both the case where the flow prevention plate 1015 is buried and the case where the ball cannot be stored in the storage device 2000. An example thereof will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 21 (a) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and FIG. 21 (b) is a diagram showing the second specific winning in the 12th round of the jackpot B. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the mouth 650a.

First, FIG. 21A will be described. The graph on the upper side of FIG. 21 (a) shows the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 21 (a). The lower graph shows the timed change (whether it is in the protruding state or the buried state) of the flow prevention plate 1015.

As shown in FIG. 21A, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time When (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is operated toward the closed state. After that, after a predetermined extremely short time (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed without waiting for the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a to be closed, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is again. Opening port) 650a is opened. This open state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls win), and after the predetermined time elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is closed. And the 12th round is over. In addition, this closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the flow prevention plate 1015 maintains the buried state independently of the state change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a. Therefore, it is possible to form a state in which it is difficult to maintain the ball in the storage device 2000 while maintaining the state in which the ball can enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. As a result, in the jackpot A, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation entry ball opening 1031. Therefore, in most cases where the jackpot A is reached, the ball does not enter the probability variation entry ball opening 1031 during the special game state (during the jackpot), so that it is difficult to set the probability variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21B, the time change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot B will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 21 (b) shows the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 21 (b). The lower graph shows the timed change (whether it is in the protruding state or the buried state) of the flow prevention plate 1015.

As shown in FIG. 21B, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time When (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. Then, the closed state is maintained at a predetermined waiting time (for example, 1 second), and when the predetermined waiting time elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened. This open state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls win), and after the predetermined time elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is closed. And the 12th round is over. In addition, this closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the flow prevention plate 1015 changes its state every time the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a changes from the open state to the closed state. That is, at the start of the 12th round, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened and then closed, so that the buried state is changed to the protruding state, and then the opening is opened for a predetermined time. It changes from a protruding state to a buried state based on being closed afterwards.

In this way, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the flow prevention plate 1015 is maintained in the protruding state during the period in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is maintained in the open state for a predetermined period, so that the identification is specified. The state in which the ball easily enters the winning opening 650a is maintained, and the state in which the ball is easily stored in the tilting member 1040 is maintained. As a result, the tilting member 1040 can be easily tilted by the weight of the ball, and at the jackpot B, the ball can easily pass through the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031. Therefore, the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state after the jackpot ends. It will be easier.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a maintains the open state, but the state of the flow prevention plate 1015 while maintaining the open state is maintained. Since it can be changed, regardless of the jackpot type, the jackpot type is given to the player with sufficient opportunity to obtain a prize ball by inserting the ball into the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a. The only difference caused by the difference is whether or not the special symbol is likely to change after the big hit. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of balls that can be obtained by the player who has won the jackpot A.

The reason why the opening period immediately after the start of the 12th round is made common to 0.2 seconds is to make it difficult to understand that the jackpot A is immediately after the start of the 12th round. In the jackpot B, which makes it easy for the ball to enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened immediately after the start of the 12th round. Therefore, by sharing the operation of the second specific winning opening (second big opening) 650a immediately after the start of the 12th round between the jackpot A and the jackpot B, it is expected that the jackpot this time will be the jackpot B. be able to.

On the other hand, since the closing time of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is different after that, by confirming this closing time, the player can make the jackpot type of this jackpot A. It is possible to easily determine whether it is a jackpot B or a jackpot B. As a result, the player's attention can be focused on the opening / closing operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a at the start of the twelfth round.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the vicinity of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a (the part that the player pays attention to) is lit brightly by the LED, while the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is lit up. Power consumption can be reduced by turning off the LED in the portion away from the 650a (the portion that the player hardly sees). In addition, the visibility of the ball in the portion of the game area away from the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a can be deteriorated.

Regarding the visibility of the ball in the game area, for example, by deteriorating the visibility of the ball flowing down the upstream side of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, the ball can be seen from an unexpected position. It is possible to form a state in which the ball flows down to the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

Further, for example, when the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is in an impossible state, it flows down to the left of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, and the outer edge member 73 (see FIG. 2). By impairing the visibility of the ball flowing downstream (toward the first out port 66), it is possible to prevent the player from concentrating on the ball flowing toward the first out port 66. .. As a result, the degree of attention in the vicinity of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a can be maintained.

As described above, according to the second embodiment, the operation of the flow prevention plate 1015 with respect to the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 650 can be made different depending on the driving mode of the solenoid 650c. As a result, the attention of the second variable winning device 650 can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 28. In the first embodiment, the case where the flow prevention plate 1015 is driven by the driving force of the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 650 has been described, but the storage device 3000 in the third embodiment has a drive motor 3012 that always operates. The second variable winning device 650 is configured to switch between transmission and interruption of the driving force from the driving motor 3012 to the flow prevention plate 1015 by the driving force of the opening / closing operation. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

22 (a) and 22 (b) are rear perspective views of the storage device 3000 according to the third embodiment. 23 (a) is a front view of the storage device 3000, FIG. 23 (b) is a top view of the storage device 3000, and FIG. 24 is a rear view of the storage device 3000. In addition, in FIGS. 22 to 24, the illustration of the base plate 60 is omitted above the second variable winning device 650, and in FIG. 22A, a perspective view of the storage device 3000 as viewed from above is shown in FIG. 22 (b). ), A perspective view of the storage device 3000 as viewed from below is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b), the storage device 3000 includes a main body plate portion 1001, a ball stopper 3010 disposed on the back surface side of the main body plate portion 1001, and the above-mentioned induction flow. It mainly includes a road 1020, a branch flow path 1030, and a tilting member 1040.

The ball stopper 3010 is a drive motor 3012 fixed to a plate-shaped base plate portion 3011 extending from the back surface of the main body plate portion 1001 to the rear and a flange extending in parallel with the base plate portion 3011. The fixed clutch 3013a, which is fixed to the rotating shaft of the drive motor 3012 and has a sharp uneven shape formed on one surface in the axial direction over the outer circumference, and the uneven shape that can be meshed with the fixed clutch 3013a. A moving clutch 3013b having a shape and idlingly supported by the rotating shaft of the drive motor 3012, a switching clutch 3013 formed from the moving clutch 30, a rotating disk 3014 that rotates in synchronization with the moving clutch 3013b, and a rotating disk thereof. It mainly includes a flow-down prevention plate 1015 that moves in the front-rear direction based on the rotation of 3014, and a switching member 3016 that moves the position of the moving clutch 3013b by driving the second variable winning device 650.

The foundation plate portion 3011 includes an elastic spring 3011a that urges the flow-down prevention plate 1015 in the direction of projecting to the front side, and a shaft rod that is projected toward the back side in a rod shape and rotatably supports the protrusion switching member 3016. 3011b and. By the action of the elastic spring 3011a, the flow-down prevention plate 1015 projects to the front side and maintains the protruding state.

The drive motor 3012 is a DC motor that constantly rotates and drives in one direction, and operates at a slow rotation speed. In this embodiment, the rotation operation is performed in the mode of one rotation in 3 seconds.

The rotating disk 3014 extends from the center position of the above-mentioned disk portion 1014b and the projecting pin 1014b and the disc portion 1014b through the base plate portion 3011 and is coaxial with the rotating shaft of the drive motor 3012. A through shaft 3014a to be formed is provided.

The moving clutch 3013b includes a through hole 3013b1 that is externally fitted to the through shaft 3014a at its center position, and a support edge portion 3013b2 that extends radially outward from the portion where the uneven shape is formed. .. The through hole 3013b1 and the through shaft 3014a are configured in such a manner that they can move relative to each other in the axial direction but cannot move relative to each other in the circumferential direction. For example, the outer shape of the through shaft 3014a is formed from a D shape, and the inner shape of the through hole 3013b1 is formed from a D shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the through shaft 3014a.

In the switching clutch 3013, when the moving clutch 3013b and the fixed clutch 3013a are separated from each other, only the fixed clutch 3013a rotates by the driving force of the drive motor 3012. On the other hand, when the moving clutch 3013b is arranged at a position where it meshes with the fixed clutch 3013a, the moving clutch 3013b rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the fixed clutch 3013a.

As a result, after the moving clutch 3013b begins to mesh with the fixed clutch 3013a, the drive motor 3012 rotates half a turn (after a delay period of 1.5 seconds in this embodiment), so that the flow prevention plate 1015 is changed to the buried state. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 22 to 24, in the present embodiment, the solenoid 650c of the second variable winning device 650 expands and contracts in the left-right direction. Based on this expansion / contraction operation in the left-right direction, the rigid rod B31 extending in the expansion / contraction direction of the solenoid 650c operates in the left-right direction. The tip of the rigid rod B31 is connected to a connecting groove C31 formed on the lower surface of the opening / closing plate 650b, and in the present embodiment, the connecting groove C31 inclines toward the back side as the distance from the solenoid 650c in the left-right direction increases. Formed in an embodiment. Therefore, when the solenoid 650c is driven (when the rigid rod B31 is operated in the pulling direction), the opening / closing plate 650b is pulled in, the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and when the driving of the solenoid 650c is released, the opening / closing plate 650b is released. Is projected to the front side, and the second variable winning device 650 is closed.

The switching member 3016 is formed of vertically long rod members, and has a shaft hole 3016a rotatably supported by the shaft rod 3011b at a position slightly upwardly displaced from the lower end, and a moving portion of the solenoid 650c at the upper end portion. A long hole-shaped support elongated hole 3016b supported by a support shaft projecting parallel to the projecting direction of the shaft rod 3011b, and a support edge portion 3013b2 of the moving clutch 3013b at the lower end portion on both sides of the moving clutch 3013b in the axial direction. Mainly includes a claw portion 3016c that slidably supports the clutch portion 3016c.

In the present embodiment, when the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state (when the solenoid 650c is driven and the rigid rod B31 is pulled to the right in the rear view), the switching member 3016 is tilted toward the solenoid 650c. When the switching clutch 3013 forms a release state (clutch irregularities are separated from each other) and the second variable winning device 650 is closed (solenoid 650c drive is released). When the rigid rod B31 is pushed to the left when viewed from the rear), the switching member 3016 is in a transmission posture in which the switching member 3016 is tilted to the opposite side of the solenoid 650c, the fixed clutch 3013a and the moving clutch 3013b are engaged, and the switching clutch 3013 is engaged. , Form a transmission state that transmits the driving force.

When the switching clutch 3013 is in the transmission state, the convex portions of the fixed clutch 3013a and the moving clutch 3013b may come into contact with each other in the axial direction, but the uneven portions have a sharp shape (have a plane perpendicular to the axis). Since it is formed from a shape that is inclined with respect to the shaft), the moving clutch 3013b rotates at the time of contact, so that the impact at the time of contact can be released. As a result, the durability of the switching clutch 3013 can be improved as compared with the case where the uneven portion is formed from the concave-convex shape having a surface perpendicular to the axis.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27, the process from the transmission of the driving force of the drive motor 3012 to the operation of the flow prevention plate 1015 will be described. 25 (a) is a rear view of the ball stop device 3010, and FIG. 25 (b) is a side view of the ball stop device 3010 in the direction of arrow XXVb of FIG. 25 (a). Is a rear view of the ball stop device 3010, FIG. 26 (b) is a side view of the ball stop device 3010 in the direction of arrow XXVIb of FIG. 26 (a), and FIG. 27 (a) is a ball stop device. It is a rear view of 3010, and FIG. 27 (b) is a side view of the ball stop device 3010 in the direction of arrow XXVIIb of FIG. 27 (a).

It should be noted that FIG. 25 shows a state in which the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state and the switching member 3016 is in the released posture, and in FIG. 26, the second variable winning device 650 is closed from the state shown in FIG. The state in which the switching member 3016 is in the transmission posture is shown, and in FIG. 27, the second variable winning device 650 is closed for a predetermined time (1.5 in the present embodiment) from the state shown in FIG. The state after the maintenance (for seconds) is shown.

The relationship between the operation of the second variable winning device 650 and the operation of the flow prevention plate 1015 will be described. Before the start of the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 650, the second variable winning device 650 maintains the closed state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26, the switching clutch 3013 maintains the transmission state, and the drive motor 3012 Since the driving force is constantly transmitted to the rotating disk 3014, the state of the flow-down prevention plate 1015 changes every predetermined time (1.5 seconds in the present embodiment) between the protruding state and the buried state. Since this state change is performed at a position visible to the player, it is possible to improve the attention to the vicinity where the flow prevention plate 1015 is arranged (near the storage device 3000).

When the jackpot game starts, the 12th round is started, and the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state, the switching clutch 3013 is released and the driving force from the drive motor 3012 is not transmitted to the flow prevention plate 1015. The flow-down prevention plate 1015 is pushed out to the front side by the elastic force of the elastic spring 3011a, and is in a protruding state. This protruding state is maintained at least while the second variable winning device 650 maintains the open state.

When a predetermined time elapses from the state shown in FIG. 25 and the second variable winning device 650 changes to the closed state, the switching clutch 3013 is in the transmission state and the driving force of the drive motor 3012 is increased as shown in FIG. 26 (a). It starts to be transmitted to the flow prevention plate 1015 via the rotating disk 3014.

Here, when the flow-down prevention plate 1015b is in a protruding state, the protrusion pin 1014c of the rotary disk 3014 is arranged inside the connecting elongated hole 1015a of the flow-down prevention plate 1015, so that the rotary disk 3014 is projected. The pin 1014c is arranged at the front end (the position where the rotating disk 3014 is translated from the rotation axis to the front side).

The flow prevention plate 1015 is in the buried state because the posture of the rotating disk 3014 is such that the protrusion pin 1014c is arranged at the rear end (the position where the rotating disk 3014 is translated from the rotation axis to the back side). Since it is in the posture, even if the switching clutch 3013 starts to be in the transmission state, the flow prevention plate 1015 is not immediately in the buried state, and as shown in FIG. 26A, the protruding state is maintained. ..

The rotation of the switching clutch 3013 is caused by the rotation of the drive motor 3012. In the present embodiment, since the drive motor 3012 rotates at a speed of one rotation in 3 seconds, when the second variable winning device 650 maintains the closed state for 1.5 seconds, as shown in FIG. 27, the projecting pin 1014c Is moved to a position where the rotation disk 3014 is translated in parallel from the rotation axis to the back surface side, and the flow prevention plate 1015 forms a buried state. As a result, after the second variable winning device 650 is closed, the balls remaining on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 can be discharged to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the normal ball entry port 1033.

That is, in the present embodiment, the flow prevention plate 1015 forms a buried state and discharges the remaining spheres after a predetermined time (1.5 seconds in the present embodiment) from the closing of the second variable winning device 650. It is formed. Further, when the second variable winning device 650 is opened, the flow-down prevention plate 1015 projects to the front side by the elastic force of the elastic spring 3011a, so that a protruding state is formed without a time delay. Therefore, the timing of the state change of the flow prevention plate 1015 with reference to the operation timing of the second variable winning device 650 can be changed depending on the direction of the state change.

As described above, by maintaining the closed state of the second variable winning device 650 for 1.5 seconds, the flow prevention plate 1015 can be changed to the buried state, but for example, before the elapse of 1.5 seconds. When the second variable winning device 650 is changed to the open state again (for example, before 1 second has elapsed), the switching clutch 3013 is released, and the flow prevention plate 1015 is projected by the elastic force of the elastic spring 3011a and flows down. The prevention plate 1015 forms a protruding state. That is, the operation mode of the flow prevention plate 1015 can be changed depending on whether the closed state is maintained for 1.5 seconds or more, or the state is maintained for 1.5 seconds or less (about 1 second) and then opened again. .. Hereinafter, this will be described with reference to FIG. 28.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a will be described. FIG. 28A is a diagram showing the time change of the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and FIG. 28B is a diagram showing the second specific winning in the 12th round of the jackpot B. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the mouth 650a.

First, FIG. 28A will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 28 (a) shows the timed change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 28 (a). The lower graph shows the timed change (whether it is in the protruding state or the buried state) of the flow prevention plate 1015.

As shown in FIG. 28A, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time When (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. Then, after maintaining the closed state for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and the predetermined time (for example, 1 second) is opened. After that, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. The closed state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) of 1.5 seconds or more. After that, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened again for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and when the predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is opened. Opening port) 650a is closed and the 12th round is completed. In addition, this closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the flow prevention plate 1015 changes to the buried state every time the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a keeps the closed state for 1.5 seconds or more. Therefore, while creating a state in which a ball can enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, the flow prevention plate 1015 is inserted each time the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. By changing to the buried state, it is possible to make it difficult to store the sphere on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040. That is, a ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a after opening for one second is flown toward the normal entry opening 1033 each time the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. As long as three balls do not enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a in one opening, the tilting member 1040 may not tilt.

As a result, in the jackpot A, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation entry ball opening 1031. Therefore, in most cases where the jackpot A is reached, the ball does not enter the probability variation entry ball opening 1031 during the special game state (during the jackpot), so that it is difficult to set the probability variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28B, the time change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot B will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 28 (b) shows the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 28 (b). The lower graph shows the timed change (whether it is in the protruding state or the buried state) of the flow prevention plate 1015.

As shown in FIG. 28B, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time When (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. Then, after maintaining the closed state for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) of 1.5 seconds or less, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and the predetermined time When the time (for example, 1 second) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. The closed state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) of 1.5 seconds or less. After that, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened again for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and when the predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is opened. The open opening) 650a is closed, and then the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened again for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed from the start of the 12th round, or in the 12th round, the ball is released. It will be opened (until 10 prizes are won), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a will be closed, and the 12th round will end. This closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the flow prevention plate 1015 operates differently from the 12th round of the jackpot A. That is, the flow prevention plate 1015 forms a buried state when the second specific winning opening 650a maintains the closed state for 1.5 seconds, but in the jackpot B, the period of being closed is longer than 1.5 seconds. Since it is a short 1 second, the flow prevention plate 1015 keeps protruding during the 12th round.

Therefore, from the start of the 12th round of the jackpot B to the end of the 12th round, the state in which the ball can easily enter the second specific winning opening 650a is maintained, and the ball is stored in the tilting member 1040. A state that is easy to do is maintained. As a result, the tilting member 1040 can be easily tilted by the weight of the ball, and at the jackpot B, the ball can easily pass through the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031. Therefore, the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state after the jackpot ends. It will be easier.

In this way, the operation mode of the second specific winning opening 650a after the start of the 12th round is a similar operation mode in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for 1 second, then closed, and then opened again for 1 second, while the jackpot A and the jackpot B Then, it is possible to form a case where it is easy to set the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends (see FIG. 28 (b)) and a case where it is difficult to set the probabilistic state of the special symbol (see FIG. 28 (a)). it can. As a result, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the jackpot is jackpot A or jackpot B for a while after the start of the 12th round, and the player's expectation can be maintained longer during the game. ..

The number of rounds for opening the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to the twelfth round, and may be set to any round. Further, the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened in a plurality of rounds. For example, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a may be opened in the first round and the fifteenth round. May be set to. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the probability-changing ball opening 1031, so that it is possible to more easily enter the probability-changing state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot B. Therefore, even though the jackpot B is won, the ball cannot be entered into the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a, which lowers the player's motivation for the game. It can be prevented (suppressed).

Further, in the jackpot B (FIG. 28 (b)), after the jackpot ends (after the second specific winning opening 650a is closed), the flow prevention plate 1015 is delayed by a predetermined period (1.5 seconds in the present embodiment). It changes to a buried state. Therefore, for example, when a hall clerk is requested to repair a ball due to a jam, and the repair takes until the end of the 12th round, the ball is launched in a hurry and a plurality of balls are launched just before the end of the 12th round. Even if it enters, there is room for tilting the tilting member 1040 for a predetermined period after the end of the 12th round. As a result, it becomes easier to set the special symbol to the probabilistic state after the jackpot ends.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the operation mode in which the flow prevention plate 1015 is buried after a predetermined time from the closing of the second variable winning device 650 is realized only by controlling the operation mode of the solenoid 650c. can do.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 36. In the third embodiment, the case where the flow prevention plate 1015 is driven based on the length of the closed state of the second variable winning device 650 has been described, but the storage device 4000 in the fourth embodiment has the second variable winning device. Based on the length of the open state of the device 650, it is configured to switch whether or not to drive the flow prevention plate 1015. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 29 is a rear perspective view of the storage device 4000 according to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 29, the state in which the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 2) is in the closed state is shown, and the drawing of the base plate 60 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 29, the storage device 4000 includes a main body plate portion 1001 fastened and fixed to the base plate 60, a ball stopper 4010 arranged on the back surface side of the main body plate portion 1001, and the above-described induction flow path. It mainly includes a 1020, a branch flow path 1030, and a tilting member 1040 (see FIG. 23).

The ball stopper 4010 includes a plurality of plate-shaped base plate portions 4011 extending rearward from the back surface of the main body plate portion 1001, a drive motor 4012 supported by a part of the base plate portion 4011, and the drive motor 4012 thereof. From the friction rotation member 4013 having a plurality of surfaces to which the driving force is transmitted from the drive motor 4012 and being configured to be slidable in the axial direction, and the friction rotation member 4013 arranged coaxially with the friction rotation member 4013. Rotating disk 4014 configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the above, a flow-down prevention plate 1015 connected to the rotating disk 4014, and a sliding rotating member 4013 connected to a moving portion of the solenoid 650c. Mainly includes a switching member 3016 to be operated.

In the present embodiment, contrary to the case of the third embodiment, when the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 24) is closed by the solenoid 650c, the switching member 3016 is on the solenoid 650c side (rear view). While tilting to the right side), when the second variable winning device 650 is opened by the solenoid 650c, the switching member 3016 tilts to the side away from the solenoid 650c. In this case, it is preferable to use a solenoid 650c of a type that extends by electric drive from the viewpoint of power saving.

For example, by reversing the inclination direction of the connecting groove C31 (see FIG. 22B) of the solenoid 650c to the left and right, the above-mentioned operating condition can be satisfied. The posture in the closed state (see FIG. 29) is referred to as the first transmission posture of the switching member 3016, and the posture in the open state is referred to as the second transmission posture of the switching member 3016.

The base plate portion 4011 includes a first support plate 4011a that supports the drive motor 4012, a second support plate 4011b that is juxtaposed with the first support plate 4011a and supports the tip of the drive shaft of the drive motor 4012. The third support plate 4011c, which is arranged above the first support plate 4011a and extends with the shaft rod portion 4011d for rotatably supporting the friction rotating member 4013, and the rotary disk 4014 are slidably sandwiched from both sides in the axial direction. It mainly includes a fourth support plate 4011e that supports and maintains the position coaxial with the friction rotating member 4013.

The fourth support plate 4011e rotates in such a manner that the plate projects from the outer periphery of the rotary disk 4014 to a position slightly inside, and the rotary disk 4014 is slidably sandwiched from the axial direction over a range of about 200 degrees. Supports disk 4014. Further, since the portion that receives the outer peripheral surface of the rotating disk 4014 is formed as a circular recess having a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rotating disk 4014, it is possible to prevent the rotating disk 4014 from being displaced in the radial direction. doing. The rotating disk 4014 is maintained in a coaxial state with the friction rotating member 4013 by a holding mechanism (not shown).

The drive motor 4012 includes a pair of drive disks 4012a and 4012b in which a bracket is fixed to the first support plate 4011a and the bracket is fixed to the rotating shaft on the opposite side of the bracket with the first support plate 4011a interposed therebetween.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of drive disks 4012a and 4012b are arranged at positions where they can come into contact with the outer peripheral surfaces of the friction rotation member 4013, and the rubbing drive disks 4012a and 4012b are replaced by the arrangement of the friction rotation member 4013. In the state shown in FIG. 29, the friction rotating member 4013 is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the driving disk 4012a arranged on the side close to the rotating disk 4014. The drive motor 4012 continues to rotate at a constant speed at all times. In the present embodiment, the drive motor 4012 rotates at a speed of one rotation in 6 seconds.

Next, the friction rotating member 4013 and the rotating disk 4014 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. 30 and 31 are exploded rear perspective views of the ball stopper 4010. Note that FIG. 30 shows a state of the drive motor 4012 as viewed from the bracket side, and FIG. 31 shows a state of the drive motor 4012 as viewed from the shaft side. Further, in FIGS. 30 and 31, the illustration of the base plate portion 4011 and the switching member 3016 is omitted.

The friction rotating member 4013 is a donut-shaped disk member having a through hole formed in the center, and the boundary disk portion 4013a forming the maximum outer diameter and the bracket side of the drive motor 4012 from the boundary disk portion 4013a. A donut-shaped protrusion with the same outer diameter as the first friction disk 4013b on the opposite side of the first friction disk 4013b projecting in a hednut shape and the first friction disk 4013b sandwiching the boundary disk portion 4013a. The second friction disk 4013c to be formed, the projecting engaging portion 4013d projecting eccentrically from the axial surface of the second friction disk 4013c, and a part of the outer peripheral portion of the second friction disk 4013c. It mainly includes a release recess 4013e, which is a portion recessed inward in the radial direction.

The boundary disk portion 4013a engages with the claw portion 3016c of the switching member 3016 in the vicinity of the outer peripheral position (see FIG. 29). Therefore, when the switching member 3016 operates, the boundary disk portion 4013a is pushed by the claw portion 3016c, so that the friction rotating member 4013 moves along the extending direction of the shaft rod portion 4011d.

The first friction disk 4013b and the second friction disk 4013c are formed to have the same outer diameter as the drive disks 4012a and 4012b of the drive motor 4012. Therefore, the rotation speed of the drive motor 4012 and the rotation speed of the friction rotation member 4013 are the same in a situation assuming that there is no slip.

The release recess 4013e is formed in such a manner (size, radial depth) that the contact with the drive disk 4012a is released when the release recess 4013e is arranged to face the drive disk 4012a. That is, in a state where the second friction disk 4013c and the drive disk 4012a are in contact with each other and the second friction disk 4013c is rotating due to the friction with the drive disk 4012a, the release recess 4013e is on the drive disk 4012a side. When the posture is facing (the posture in which the release recess 4013e is arranged on a straight line connecting the shaft rod portion 4011d and the rotation shaft of the drive motor 4012), the driving force transmission to the second friction disk 4013c is released and the friction rotation occurs. The member 4013 maintains the same posture.

The rotating disk 4014 is projected in the opposite phase of the protrusion pin 1014c on the side opposite to the side where the above-mentioned disk portion 1014b, the protrusion pin 1014c, and the protrusion pin 1014c are projected. It is mainly provided with a protruding rib 4014a.

The projecting rib 4014a is formed from a long shape along the radial direction of the disk portion 1014b, and in a state where the friction rotating member 4013 is arranged on the shaft side of the drive motor 4012 (see FIG. 29), the projecting rib 4014a is in charge of projecting. A height that allows contact with the joint portion 4013d in the circumferential direction, and a height that cannot contact the protrusion engaging portion 4013d in the circumferential direction when the friction rotating member 4013 is arranged on the bracket side of the drive motor 4012. It is thrust at.

With reference to FIG. 32, switching of the driving force transmission mode of the driving motor 4012, the friction rotating member 4013, and the rotating disk 4014 will be described. 32 (a) and 32 (b) are rear views of the ball stopper 4010. Note that FIG. 32 (a) shows a state in which the second variable winning device 650 is in the closed state and the switching member 3016 is in the first transmission posture, and FIG. 32 (b) shows the second variable winning device. The state in which the device 650 is in the open state and the switching member 3016 is in the second transmission posture is shown.

In addition, in FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the rotating disk 4014 has the protrusion pin 1014c arranged on the front side (the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 32) (flow prevention). The friction rotating member 4013 is shown in a state in which the release recess 4013e is arranged on the back side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 32).

As shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the second variable winning device 650 is in the closed state, the second friction disk 4013c and the driving disk 4012a are in contact with each other. Therefore, in this state, the friction rotating member 4013 rotates at the rotation speed of the driving disk 4012a (the speed of one rotation in 6 seconds).

Further, when the friction rotating member 4013 continuously rotates and the release recess 4013e is arranged at a position (lower side in FIG. 32A) facing the drive disk 4012a, the second friction with the drive disk 4012a. The disc 4013c is separated from the disk 4013c, and the transmission of the driving force is released. Therefore, even if the arrangement of the friction rotating member 4013 in the axial direction continues to maintain the arrangement shown in FIG. 32 (a), the friction rotating member 4013 is arranged at a position where the release recess 4013e is arranged so as to face the drive disk 4012a. The driving force transmission is released by the posture (with a rotation amount of less than one round).

As shown in FIG. 32B, when the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state, the first friction disk 4013b and the drive disk 4012b are in contact with each other. Therefore, in this state, the friction rotating member 4013 rotates at the rotation speed of the driving disk 4012b (the speed at which one rotation occurs in 6 seconds).

As described above, in the state shown in FIG. 32A (after maintaining this state for 6 seconds or more), the friction rotating member 4013 has a posture in which the release recess 4013e is arranged to face the drive disk 4012a. Since the posture is maintained at the same time, the posture of the friction rotating member 4013 at the moment when the second variable winning device 650 is opened can be unified every time. That is, the driving force transmission between the first friction disk 4013b and the driving disk 4012b can be started in a posture in which the release recess 4013e is arranged so as to face the driving disk 4012a. As a result, the posture of the friction rotating member 4013 after a lapse of a predetermined time after changing the second variable winning device 650 from the closed state to the open state can be grasped on the control side.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 32B, the second friction disk 4013c and the driving disk 4012b are always in contact with each other, so that the driving force is constantly transmitted. On the other hand, since the projecting rib 4014a and the projecting engaging portion 4013d do not abut in the circumferential direction, the state of the flow prevention plate 1015 does not change even if the state shown in FIG. 32B is maintained for a long time. Therefore, it is possible for the player to be less aware that the friction rotating member 4013 continues to change its posture. From these configurations, it is possible to switch whether the flow prevention plate 1015 is left in the protruding state or changed to the buried state depending on the length of the period for maintaining the open state. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

33 (a) to 33 (c) are schematic views of the drive motor 4012, the friction rotating member 4013, the rotating disk 4014, and the flow prevention plate 1015 in the direction of the arrow XXXIIIa of FIG. 32 (a). Note that FIG. 33 (a) shows the closed state of the second variable winning device 650, and FIG. 33 (b) shows the state in which the closed state is changed to the open state and 2 seconds have passed. ) Shows the state after switching from the open state to the closed state in the state of FIG. 33 (b) and 4 seconds after the state of FIG. 33 (b).

As shown in FIG. 33 (a), in FIG. 33 (a), the drive motor 4012 rotates in the clockwise direction CW. When the second variable winning device 650 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 33 (a), the friction rotating member 4013 is brought into contact with the first friction disk 4013b and the drive disk 4012b (see FIG. 32). In (a), it rotates in a counterclockwise CCW.

When the state is changed to the closed state after opening for 2 seconds, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the projecting rib 4014a is arranged in the traveling direction of the projecting engaging portion 4013d, so that the friction disk member 4013 The rotating disk 4014 rotates as the protruding rib 4014a is pushed by the protruding engaging portion 4013d while the rotating disk 4013d continues to rotate. As a result, the flow-down prevention plate 1015 changes its state from the protruding state to the buried state.

After that, the friction rotation member 4013 continues to rotate until the posture shown in FIG. 33 (c), and the transmission of the driving force from the drive motor 4012 is released. Since the flow prevention plate 1015 returns to the protruding state by the elastic spring 3011a, the rotating disk 4014 also rotates from the state shown in FIG. 33 (c) based on the movement, and returns to the state shown in FIG. 33 (a).

In this way, the flow-down prevention plate is maintained by maintaining the open state for a period slightly shorter than half of the time required for one rotation of the drive motor 4012 (2.5 seconds or less in this embodiment) and then maintaining the closed state. It is possible to form a state in which 1015 has changed to a buried state.

34 (a) to 34 (c) are schematic views of the drive motor 4012, the friction rotating member 4013, the rotating disk 4014, and the flow prevention plate 1015 in the direction of the arrow XXXIIIa of FIG. 32 (a). It should be noted that FIG. 34 (a) shows the closed state of the second variable winning device 650, and FIG. 34 (b) shows the state in which the closed state is changed to the open state and 4 seconds have passed. ) Shows the state after switching from the open state to the closed state in the state of FIG. 34 (b) and 2 seconds after the state of FIG. 34 (b).

When the second variable winning device 650 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 34 (a), the friction rotating member 4013 is brought into contact with the first friction disk 4013b and the drive disk 4012b (see FIG. 32). In (a), it rotates in a counterclockwise CCW.

When the state is changed to the closed state after opening for 4 seconds, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the protrusion rib 4014a is not arranged in the traveling direction of the protrusion engagement portion 4013d, so that the friction disk member 4013 becomes The projecting rib 4014a is placed in place while the rotation continues. Therefore, the rotating disk 4014 is not rotated, and the flow prevention plate 1015 is maintained in a protruding state.

After that, the friction rotating member 4013 continues to rotate until the posture shown in FIG. 34 (c), and the driving force transmission from the driving motor 4012 is released. In this way, the flow-down prevention plate is maintained by maintaining the open state for a period slightly longer than half of the time required for one rotation of the drive motor 4012 (3.5 seconds or more in this embodiment) and then maintaining the closed state. The 1015 can be maintained in a protruding state.

During the period of maintaining the open state from 2.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds for 1 second, the projecting engaging portion 4013d and the projecting rib 4014a may come into contact with each other in the axial direction, which may cause a failure. Therefore, in this period, the control program is constructed so as not to change from the open state to the closed state. As described above, the operation of the flow prevention plate 1015 can be changed only by changing the period for maintaining the open state by a few seconds. This will be described with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a will be described. FIG. 35 (a) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and FIG. 35 (b) is a diagram showing the second specific winning in the 12th round of the jackpot B. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the mouth 650a.

First, FIG. 35 (a) will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 35 (a) shows the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 35 (a). The lower graph shows the timed change (whether it is in the protruding state or the buried state) of the flow prevention plate 1015.

As shown in FIG. 35 (a), when the 12th round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) shorter than 2.5 seconds. Then, when the predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is closed. After that, after maintaining the closed state for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) for 6 seconds or more from the start of the 12th round, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). Then, when the predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is closed. That is, it is opened for 2 seconds and then closed for 4 seconds, and repeated a plurality of times, and a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed from the start of the 12th round, or until 10 balls are won in the 12th round) has elapsed. By doing so, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed, and the twelfth round ends. In addition, this closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the flow prevention plate 1015 changes to the buried state every time the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is maintained in the closed state for 4 seconds. Therefore, while creating a state in which a ball can enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, the flow prevention plate 1015 is inserted each time the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. By changing to the buried state, it is possible to make it difficult to store the sphere on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040. That is, a ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a after opening for 2 seconds is flown toward the normal entry opening 1033 each time the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. As long as three balls do not enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a in one opening (2 seconds), the tilting member 1040 may not tilt. Further, in the present embodiment, the upstream side of the second variable winning device 650 is formed so that the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a at a pace of about one ball per second. Therefore, during the one-time opening of the second specific winning opening 650a, 10 or more balls do not enter the second specific winning opening 650a.

As a result, in the jackpot A, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation entry ball opening 1031 while maintaining a state in which the prize ball at the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a can be sufficiently secured. Therefore, in most cases where the jackpot A is reached, the ball does not enter the probability variation entry ball opening 1031 during the special game state (during the jackpot), so that it is difficult to set the probability variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35 (b), the time change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot B will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 35 (b) shows the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 35 (b). The lower graph shows the timed change (whether it is in the protruding state or the buried state) of the flow prevention plate 1015.

As shown in FIG. 35 (b), when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time of 3 seconds or more (for example, 4 seconds), and the second specified winning opening (second large opening) is opened. After a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. Then, after maintaining the closed state for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds), and the predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) is opened. After that, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. The closed state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). And it is released again.

That is, it is opened for 4 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds, and the predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed from the start of the 12th round or until 10 balls are won in the 12th round) has elapsed. By doing so, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed, and the twelfth round ends. Then, in the interval period, the second second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and when the predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses, the second specific is specified. The winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. In addition, this closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the flow prevention plate 1015 operates differently from the 12th round of the jackpot A. That is, the flow prevention plate 1015 forms a buried state when the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in 2.5 seconds or less and then maintained in the closed state for about 3 seconds. In the jackpot B, the second specific winning opening is formed. Since the open state of the 650a is maintained for 4 seconds and then the closed state is maintained for 2 seconds, the above-mentioned opening / closing conditions are not met, and the flow prevention plate 1015 maintains the protruding state throughout the 12th round. ..

Therefore, from the start of the 12th round of the jackpot B to the end of the 12th round, the state in which the ball can easily enter the second specific winning opening 650a is maintained, and the ball is stored in the tilting member 1040. A state that is easy to do is maintained. As a result, the tilting member 1040 can be easily tilted by the weight of the ball, and at the jackpot B, the ball can easily pass through the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031. Therefore, the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state after the jackpot ends. It will be easier.

In the jackpot B, in the open state for several seconds during the interval, the flow prevention plate 1015 is forcibly buried, and the ball remaining on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 is normally flowed toward the ball entry port 1033. Because.

In this way, the operation mode of the second specific winning opening 650a after the start of the 12th round is a similar operation mode in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a few seconds, then closed, and then opened again for a few seconds, while the jackpot A and the jackpot B Therefore, it is possible to form a case where it is easy to set the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends (see FIG. 35 (b)) and a case where it is difficult to set the probabilistic state of the special symbol (see FIG. 35 (a)). it can. As a result, it is difficult for the player to know whether the jackpot is the jackpot A or the jackpot B for a while after the start of the 12th round, and the player's expectation can be maintained longer during the game.

The number of rounds for opening the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to the twelfth round, and may be set to any round. Further, the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened in a plurality of rounds. For example, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a may be opened in the first round and the fifteenth round. May be set to. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the probability-changing ball opening 1031, so that it is possible to more easily enter the probability-changing state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot B. Therefore, even though the jackpot B is won, the ball cannot be entered into the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a, which lowers the player's motivation for the game. It can be prevented (suppressed).

As described above, the flow prevention plate 1015 is buried in the jackpot for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) of 2.5 seconds or less from the start of the 12th round to the second specific winning opening 650a. This is when the condition of maintaining the closed state for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) after maintaining the open state is satisfied. That is, the opening / closing pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a in which the flow prevention plate 1015 maintains the protruding state is not limited to the pattern shown in FIG. 35 (b). An example thereof will be described with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the time change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot B (No. 2) will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 36 shows the time change (whether it is open or closed) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and the lower graph of FIG. 7 shows the time change (whether it is open or closed). , Shows the timekeeping change (whether it is in a protruding state or a buried state) of the flow prevention plate 1015.

As shown in FIG. 36, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), and the predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) is opened. ) Elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. Then, after maintaining the closed state for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), and the predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) is opened. ) Elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. The closed state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds). When the predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened.

Then, after maintaining the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is closed. The closed state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds). And it is released again.

That is, only at the start of the 12th round, the closing time after opening for 2 seconds is set to 2 seconds, then opening for 2 seconds, and then repeating closing for 4 seconds, for a predetermined time (for example, from the start of the 12th round). After 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls have won in the 12th round), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed, and the 12th round is completed. Then, in the interval period, the second second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and when the predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses, the second specific is specified. The winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. In addition, this closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

By opening and closing the second specific winning opening 650a in this way, the state at the start of the 12th round (that is, the state in which the friction rotating member 4013 is in a posture in which the release recess 4013e is directed toward the drive motor 4012, in other words. In FIG. 36, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) of 2.5 seconds or less from 6n (n is an integer) second after the start of the 12th round, and then closed. It is possible to eliminate the operation pattern of maintaining the closed state for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds). Therefore, the flow prevention plate 1015 can be maintained in a protruding state.

Therefore, from the start of the 12th round of the jackpot B (No. 2) to the end of the 12th round, the state in which the ball can easily enter the second specific winning opening 650a is maintained, and the tilting member 1040 is maintained. The state in which balls can be easily stored is maintained. As a result, the tilting member 1040 can be easily tilted by the weight of the ball, and in the jackpot B (No. 2), the ball can be easily passed through the probability variation entry ball opening 1031. Therefore, the probability variation of the special symbol after the jackpot ends. It becomes easier to set the state.

On the other hand, the operation pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a shown in FIG. 36 is the operation pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a at the time of the jackpot A shown in FIG. 35 (a) after 4 seconds have passed from the start. Is the same as. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the type of jackpot from the operation pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a. As a result, it is possible to direct the player to visually confirm whether or not the ball can be stored in the tilting member 1040, and it is possible to improve the attention power in the vicinity of the tilting member 1040.

In the jackpot B (No. 2), in the open state for several seconds during the interval, the flow prevention plate 1015 is forcibly buried, and the ball remaining on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 is usually the ball entry port 1033. This is to let it flow toward.

In this way, the operation mode of the second specific winning opening 650a after the start of the 12th round is a similar operation mode in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a few seconds, then closed, and then opened again for a few seconds, while the jackpot A and the jackpot B In (2), a case where it is easy to set the special symbol probabilistic state after the jackpot ends (see FIG. 36) and a case where it is difficult to set the special symbol probabilistic state (see FIG. 35 (a)) are formed. Can be done. This makes it difficult for the player to know whether the jackpot is jackpot A or jackpot B (part 2) for a while after the start of the 12th round, and keeps the player's expectation longer during the game. be able to.

As described above, according to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to change whether or not the flow-down prevention plate 1015 is in the buried state after closing, depending on the length of the opening time of the second variable winning device 650. In addition, the length of the opening time is not limited to the elapsed time from each opening, but there is a period in which the elapsed time from the first opening operation can be adopted, and from the middle of this period, the opening time from the first opening Then, the second variable winning device 650 is opened and then closed in the opening time that does not change the state of the flow prevention plate 1015, so that the flow prevention plate 1015 can be changed to the buried state. As a result, the operation of the second variable winning device 650 for each jackpot type can form a period in which the operation modes are the same, so that it is difficult for the player to notice the difference in the jackpot type from the operation of the second variable winning device 650. can do.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41. In the first embodiment, the case where the flow prevention plate 1015 is driven based on the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 650 has been described, but the storage device 5000 in the fifth embodiment is the two variable winning device 650. It is configured to switch whether or not to drive the flow prevention plate 1015 based on the number of times of opening and closing. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is set so as not to open and close (so-called small hit) except during the big hit period. Therefore, the number of times of opening and closing of the second variable winning device 650, which will be described later, is entirely due to the operation during the jackpot game.

FIG. 37 (a) is a front view of the storage device 5000 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 37 (b) is a top view of the storage device 5000 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a). In FIG. 37 (a), the main body plate portion 1001 is not shown, and in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b), the guide flow path 1020, the branch flow path 1030, and the tilting member 1040 are drawn by imaginary lines. Illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b), the storage device 5000 includes a main body plate portion 1001, a ball stopper 5100 disposed on the back surface of the main body plate portion 1001, and the above-described induction flow path. It mainly includes a 1020, a branch flow path 1030, and a tilting member 1040.

A second specific winning device 650 is arranged on the back side of the main body plate portion 1001. In the second embodiment, as in the third embodiment, in the second specific winning device 650, the rigid rod B31 transmits the driving force to the opening / closing plate 650b via the connecting groove C31 by operating the solenoid 650c in the left-right direction. Consists of aspects.

The rigid rod B31 includes a claw portion B51 formed from an elastic member in a leaf spring shape. The claw portion B51 is arranged so as to face the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member 5120, which will be described later, and is viewed in the axial direction of the rotating member 5120 with respect to a straight line L51 that is ejected from the center of the rotating member 5120 and intersects the rigid rod B31 perpendicularly. It is extended so as to be inclined toward the side close to the solenoid 650c.

Therefore, when the rigid rod B31 moves toward the solenoid 650c while the rotating member 5120 and the claw portion B51 are in contact with each other, the tip portion of the claw portion B51 pierces the rotating member 5120 (the driving force is transmitted by point contact). Since it acts on the rotating member 5120 in this manner, the rotating member 5120 can be easily rotated. On the other hand, when the rigid rod B31 moves in the direction away from the solenoid 650c, the abdomen portion of the claw portion B51 acts on the rotating member 5120 in a manner of rubbing against the outer circumference of the rotating member 5120, which makes it difficult to rotate the rotating member 5120. Can be done. As a result, by driving and releasing the solenoid 650c once (by moving the rigid rod B31 back and forth once to the left and right), the second variable winning device 650 opens and closes only once, and the rotating member 5120 Can be rotated in a predetermined direction (in the present embodiment, FIG. 37 (a) counterclockwise direction).

The ball stopper 5100 includes a shaft rod portion 5110 projecting from the back surface of the main body plate portion 1001 in a rod shape, a rotating member 5120 pivotally supported by the shaft rod portion 5110, and a main body plate portion of the rotating member 5120. It mainly includes an urging portion 5130 that applies a load to a surface that faces the 1001 and a switching device 5140 that operates the flow-down prevention plate 5015 according to the posture of the rotating member 5120.

The rotating member 5120 is a member whose outer peripheral surface is always in contact with the claw portion B51 and rotates by the action of the claw portion B51. The rotating member 5120 will be described with reference to FIG. 38.

38 (a) is a front view of the rotating member 5120, FIG. 38 (b) is a top view of the rotating member 5120 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIIb of FIG. 38 (a), and FIG. 38 (c) is a top view of the rotating member 5120. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the rotating member 5120 in the line XXXVIIIc-XXXVIIIc of FIG. 38 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (c), the rotating member 5120 is mounted on the main body disk 5121 pivotally supported by the shaft rod portion 5110 (see FIG. 37) and the outer peripheral surface of the main body disk 5121. A plurality of outer peripheral engaging portions 5122, which are serrated portions to be formed and are juxtaposed with a uniform angle (22.5 degrees each, divided into 16 equal parts in the present embodiment) from the shaft rod portion 5110, and a main body circle. A concave portion extending along a straight line extending radially from the shaft rod portion 5110 at a position equal to the shaft rod portion 5110 on the surface of the plate 5121 facing the main body plate portion 1001, and is an outer peripheral engaging portion 5122. A plurality of positioning recesses 5123 are arranged so as to be offset by an angle similar to the angle at which they are arranged (22.5 degrees), and one side in the axial direction on the outer peripheral side from the position where the positioning recesses 5123 are formed (FIG. 38 (FIG. 38). a) A plurality of switching projecting portions 5124 projecting from the front side of the paper surface) and a detection pin 5125 projecting eccentrically to the other side in the axial direction are mainly provided.

When the outer peripheral engaging portion 5122 is arranged on the upper side of the main body disk 5121, the outer peripheral engaging portion 5122 is formed in an unevenly inclined manner on the left and right sides, with a sharp rise on the right side in the front view and a gentle descent on the left side in the front view. As a result, the driving force is satisfactorily transmitted when the claw portion B51 (see FIG. 37 (a)) moves to the left, and when the claw portion B51 moves to the right, the outer circumference is engaged from the claw portion B51. It is possible to make it difficult for a load in the rotational direction to be generated on the portion 5122.

The positioning recess 5123 is arranged at a position where it overlaps the urging portion 5130 (see FIG. 37 (a)) in a front view, and the tip of the urging portion 5130 is formed from a shape that allows internal fitting. In the present embodiment, the tip of the urging portion 5130 is spherical, and the width of the positioning recess 5123 in the circumferential direction is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere at the tip of the urging portion 5130. Therefore, the tip of the urging portion 5130 is the positioning recess. By fitting into the 5123, the posture of the rotating member 5120 can be maintained with little misalignment.

The switching protrusion 5124 is a protrusion having an inclined surface portion 5124a that gently inclines toward both sides in the circumferential direction. The inclined surface portion 5124a can reduce the resistance generated when the rotating member 5120 rotates and comes into contact with the short arm portion 5142b of the switching device 5140, and can reduce the load applied to the solenoid 650c.

In the present embodiment, it is composed of a pair of protrusions formed from the same shape, and they are arranged at positions offset by 45 degrees with respect to the shaft rod portion 5110. The detection pin 5125 is a protrusion that is detected by the position sensor 5144 described later and is used for grasping the posture of the rotating member 5120.

It will be described back to FIG. 37. The urging portion 5130 includes a support cylinder 5131 extending in a tubular shape from the back surface of the main body plate portion 1001 to the rear, a spherical fitting piece 5132 arranged inside the support cylinder 5131, and fitting thereof. It mainly includes an elastic spring 5133 between the piece 5132 and the main body plate portion 1001 and arranged inside the support cylinder 5131.

As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the tip of the support cylinder 5131 is extended to a position where the gap between the support cylinder 5131 and the rotating member 5120 is smaller than the diameter of the fitting piece 5132. As a result, the fitting piece 5132 is always maintained inside the support cylinder 5131, and the fitting piece 5132 is pressed against the rotating member 5120 by the elastic force of the elastic spring 5133.

The switching device 5140 is rotatably supported by a base plate portion 5141 extending rearward from the back surface of the main body plate portion 1001 and a shaft inserted vertically through the base plate portion 5141, and one arm portion is rotatably supported. A rotating arm portion 5142 connected to the flow prevention plate 5015, a contraction spring 5143 connecting the vicinity of the tip of the long arm portion 5142a of the rotating arm portion 5142 and the main body plate portion 1001 to give a load in the pulling direction, and a base plate portion. It mainly includes a position sensor 5144 which is arranged in 5141 and a detection groove is arranged at a position where the detection pin 5125 can pass.

The rotating arm portion 5142 includes a long arm portion 5142a connected to the flow-down prevention plate 5015 and a short arm portion 5142b extending on the opposite side of the long arm portion 5142a with the rotation axis interposed therebetween, and the short arm portion 5142b. Is pressed against the front side surface of the rotating member 5120.

Next, the operation of the rotating member 5120 and the switching device 5140 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. In the description of FIG. 39, FIG. 37 will be referred to as appropriate. 39 (a) is a front view of the storage device 5000, and FIG. 39 (b) is a top view of the storage device 5000 in the direction of arrow XXXIXb of FIG. 39 (a). In FIG. 39 (a), the main body plate portion 1001 is not shown, and in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), the guide flow path 1020, the branch flow path 1030, and the tilting member 1040 are drawn by imaginary lines. Illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), switching is performed by rotating the rotating member 5120 to a position where the switching protruding portion 5124 of the rotating member 5120 comes into contact with the short arm portion 5142b of the switching device 5140. The short arm portion 5142b is pushed by the projecting portion 5124, and the rotating arm portion 5142 rotates (see FIG. 39 (b)). In this state, the flow prevention plate 5015 forms a buried state.

As described above, as for the rotating arm portion 5142, the arm extending toward the rotating member 5120 side (short arm portion 5142b) with respect to the rotation axis is the arm extending toward the flow prevention plate 5015 side (the arm extending toward the flow prevention plate 5015 side). It is shorter than the long arm part 5142a). Therefore, the long arm portion 5142a can be displaced by a displacement larger than the displacement of the tip of the short arm portion 5142b, so that the amount of displacement of the short arm portion 5142b required to make the flow prevention plate 5015 buried is small. can do. Thereby, the rotating member 5120 can be formed compactly.

In the present embodiment, when the second variable winning device 650 changes from the closed state to the open state, the claw portion B51 pushes the outer peripheral engaging portion 5122 of the rotating member 5120 and is positioned to be fitted with the urging portion 5130. The recess 5123 is rotated so as to be displaced next to each other. In other words, when the second variable winning device 650 changes from the closed state to the open state once, the rotating member 5120 rotates by 1/16 lap (22.5 degrees) (changes to the open state 16 times). By doing so, the rotating member 5120 makes one rotation). As described above, when the second variable winning device 650 changes from the open state to the closed state, a load in the circumferential direction is unlikely to occur from the claw portion B51 to the rotating member 5120, and the rotating member 5120 maintains its posture. By repeating the opening and closing operation of the second variable winning device 650, the posture of the rotating member 5120 is changed in order.

In the present embodiment, the rotating member 5120 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front by opening and closing the second variable winning device 650. That is, by performing the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 650 four times, the state shown in FIG. 39 can be changed to the state shown in FIG. 37.

In the present embodiment, the initial posture of the rotating member 5120 is the posture shown in FIG. 37 (a) (the posture in which the detection pin 5125 is arranged inside the position sensor 5144), and the second variable winning device 650 is 12 from the initial posture. The flow-down prevention plate 5015 is in the buried state only in the release posture (see FIG. 39 (a)) formed after the opening / closing operation. Therefore, by changing the operation mode of the second variable winning device 650, it is possible to change whether or not the balls are likely to be accumulated inside the storage device 5000. This will be described with reference to FIG. 40.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a will be described. FIG. 40 (a) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and FIG. 40 (b) is a diagram showing the second specific winning in the 12th round of the jackpot B. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the mouth 650a.

First, FIG. 40A will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 40 (a) shows the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 40 (a). The lower graph shows the timed change (whether it is in the protruding state or the buried state) of the flow prevention plate 5015.

As shown in FIG. 40A, when the twelfth round is started, the opening / closing operation for 0.5 seconds (a short time during which the ball cannot enter the ball) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 11 times). After that, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened (12th opening), and the ball is released for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed from the start of the 12th round, or in the 12th round. (Until 10 prizes are won) The second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed, and then, during the interval, the number of opening and closing from the start of the 12th round becomes 16 times. The opening and closing operation is performed for 0.5 seconds (a short time that makes it impossible for the ball to enter) each time (for example, 4 times), and after the opening and closing operation, the closed state is maintained, and the 12th round is performed. finish. In addition, this closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

It should be noted that it is set so that 10 or more balls do not enter the second variable winning device 650 within a predetermined number of opening / closing operations (for example, 11 times). In the present embodiment, the upstream path of the second variable winning device 650 is formed so that the ball reaches the second variable winning device 650 once per second, so that the opening and closing operation is performed 11 times (about). This is ensured by configuring the second variable winning device 650 so that 10 or more balls do not reach the second variable winning device 650 (during operation for 5.5 seconds).

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the flow prevention plate 5015 maintains the protruding state until just before the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a performs the 12th opening operation, and the 12th opening. When the operation is performed, the state changes to the buried state, and when the 13th opening operation is performed, the protruding state is obtained again. Further, when the 14th opening operation is performed, it becomes a buried state, and when the 15th opening operation is performed, it becomes a protruding state. Here, in a state where the second variable winning device 650 is opened for a long time and a large number of balls can be entered, the flow prevention plate 5015 is in a buried state, so that it is difficult to store the balls in the storage device 5000. Further, after the twelfth opening operation of the second variable winning device 650, the flow prevention plate 5015 is put into the buried state again, so that all the balls can flow to the tip of the flow prevention plate 5015. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the special gaming state (big hit state) from ending while the ball that has entered the second variable winning device 650 immediately before the end of the twelfth opening remains on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040.

In this way, while creating a state in which a ball can enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, the flow prevention plate 5015 is maintained in a buried state, so that the ball is difficult to accumulate in the storage device 5000. Can be formed.

As a result, in the jackpot A, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation entry ball opening 1031 while maintaining a state in which the prize ball at the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a can be sufficiently secured. Therefore, in most cases where the jackpot A is reached, the ball does not enter the probability variation entry ball opening 1031 during the special game state (during the jackpot), so that it is difficult to set the probability variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40 (b), the time change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot B will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 40 (b) shows the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 40 (b). The lower graph shows the timed change (whether it is in the protruding state or the buried state) of the flow prevention plate 5015.

As shown in FIG. 40 (b), when the 12th round is started, the opening / closing operation for 0.5 seconds (a short time during which the ball cannot enter the ball) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). After that, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened (11th opening), and the ball is released for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed from the start of the 12th round, or in the 12th round. (Until 10 prizes are won) The second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed, and then, during the interval, the number of opening and closing from the start of the 12th round becomes 16 times. The opening and closing operation is performed for 0.5 seconds (a short time that makes it impossible for the ball to enter) each time (for example, 5 times), and after the opening and closing operation, the closed state is maintained, and the 12th round is performed. finish. In addition, this closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

It should be noted that the opening and closing operation of a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) is set so that 10 or more balls do not enter the second variable winning device 650. In the present embodiment, the upstream path of the second variable winning device 650 is formed so that the ball reaches the second variable winning device 650 once per second, so that the opening and closing operation is performed 10 times (about). This is ensured by configuring so that 10 or more balls do not reach the second variable winning device 650 (during operation for 5.0 seconds).

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the flow prevention plate 5015 maintains the protruding state until just before the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a performs the 12th opening operation, and the 12th opening. When the operation is performed, the state changes to the buried state, and when the 13th opening operation is performed, the protruding state is obtained again. Further, when the 14th opening operation is performed, it becomes a buried state, and when the 15th opening operation is performed, it becomes a protruding state. Here, in the state where the second variable winning device 650 is opened for a long time and a large number of balls can be entered (the 11th open state), the flow prevention plate 5015 is in a protruding state, so that the balls are put into the storage device 5000. It will be easy to store.

Further, the 11th open state of the second variable winning device 650 is closed after a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed from the start of the 12th round, or until 10 balls have been won in the 12th round). Even so, since the flow prevention plate 5015 maintains the protruding state until the second variable winning device 650 performs the twelfth opening operation, it is necessary to control the period from the eleventh closing operation to the twelfth opening operation. Therefore, it is possible to secure the time until the ball that has entered just before the lapse of the predetermined time reaches the tilting member 1040.

In the 12th round of the jackpot B, the flow prevention plate 5015 operates differently from the 12th round of the jackpot A. That is, the flow prevention plate 5015 is maintained in a protruding state while the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a long time in a manner in which the ball can enter.

Therefore, from the start of the 12th round of the jackpot B to the end of the 12th round, the state in which the ball can easily enter the second specific winning opening 650a is maintained, and the ball is stored in the tilting member 1040. A state that is easy to do is maintained. As a result, the tilting member 1040 can be easily tilted by the weight of the ball, and at the jackpot B, the ball can easily pass through the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031. Therefore, the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state after the jackpot ends. It will be easier.

In the jackpot B, by repeating the opening and closing operation several times during the interval, the flow prevention plate 1015 is changed to the buried state, and the ball remaining on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 is flowed toward the normal entry port 1033. Is controlled by.

In this way, the operation mode of the second specific winning opening 650a after the start of the 12th round is similar to the operation mode of maintaining the open state with a length that allows the ball to enter after performing the opening and closing operations a plurality of times. In the case where the jackpot A and the jackpot B are likely to be set to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 40B), and when it is difficult to set the probabilistic state of the special symbol (FIG. 40). (See (a)) and can be formed. As a result, it is difficult for the player to know whether the jackpot is the jackpot A or the jackpot B for a while after the start of the 12th round, and the player's expectation can be maintained longer during the game.

Further, it is difficult to correctly count the number of opening / closing operations due to the quickness of the operation, and it is difficult to judge the type of jackpot by looking only at the opening / closing plate 650b of the second variable winning device 650. is there. Therefore, it is certain that the type of jackpot is determined by whether the flow prevention plate 5015 is in the protruding state or the buried state.

However, since the operation direction of the flow prevention plate 5015 is the front-rear direction and the position in the front view does not change, the protruding state and the buried state are similarly visually recognized in the front view. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish the difference from the front view. Further, even if an attempt is made to look into from above, the line of sight is blocked by the outer edge member 73 (see FIG. 2) and the upper wall surface of the branch flow path 1030, making it difficult to look into.

Therefore, depending on how the sphere actually flows down the branch flow path 1030, it can be directed to confirm the type of jackpot. As a result, the attention force of the branch flow path 1030 and the tilting member 1040 arranged inside the branch flow path 1030 can be improved, and the movement of the sphere flowing down inside the branch flow path 1030 can be noticed.

The number of rounds for opening the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to the twelfth round, and may be set to any round. Further, the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened in a plurality of rounds. For example, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a may be opened in the first round and the fifteenth round. May be set to. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the probability-changing ball opening 1031, so that it is possible to more easily enter the probability-changing state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot B. Therefore, even though the jackpot B is won, the ball cannot be entered into the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a, which lowers the player's motivation for the game. It can be prevented (suppressed).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the state of the flow-down prevention plate 5015 is switched depending on the number of times the second specific winning device 650 is opened and closed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to control not to return to the initial position. The control mode will be described with reference to FIG. 41.

FIG. 41 (a) is a diagram showing the time change (whether the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot A (No. 2). (B) and FIG. 41 (c) are diagrams showing the time-dependent changes (whether the flow-down prevention plate 5015 is in a protruding state or a buried state). In addition, FIG. 41 (b) shows the timekeeping change of the flow prevention plate 5015 at the time of the first big hit when the big hit A (No. 2) occurs continuously, and FIG. 41 (c) shows the big hit A. The timekeeping change of the flow prevention plate 5015 at the time of the second big hit when (No. 2) occurs continuously is shown. That is, in the jackpot A (No. 2) of the same type, the time change of the flow prevention plate 5015 is different.

As shown in FIG. 41 (a), when the twelfth round is started, the opening / closing operation for 0.5 seconds (a short time during which the ball cannot enter the ball) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 11 times). After that, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened (12th opening), and the ball is released for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed from the start of the 12th round, or in the 12th round. The second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed after 10 winnings (until 10 winnings are won), and then, during the interval, the number of opening and closing from the start of the 12th round becomes 20 times. The opening and closing operation is performed for 0.5 seconds (a short time that makes it impossible for the ball to enter) each time (for example, 8 times), and after the opening and closing operation, the closed state is maintained, and the 12th round is performed. finish. In addition, this closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached. That is, in this operation mode, it is permissible that the rotating member 5120 does not enter the initial posture (see FIG. 37) at the end of the special gaming state (big hit state).

It should be noted that it is set so that 10 or more balls do not enter the second variable winning device 650 within a predetermined number of opening / closing operations (for example, 11 times). In the present embodiment, the upstream path of the second variable winning device 650 is formed so that the ball reaches the second variable winning device 650 once per second, so that the opening and closing operation is performed 11 times (about). This is ensured by configuring the second variable winning device 650 so that 10 or more balls do not reach the second variable winning device 650 (during operation for 5.5 seconds).

Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), in the 12th round of the first jackpot A (No. 2), the flow prevention plate 5015 has the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a for the 12th round. The protruding state is maintained until immediately before the opening operation, and the 12th opening operation changes to the buried state, and the 13th opening operation causes the protruding state again. Further, when the 14th opening operation is performed, it becomes a buried state, and when the 15th opening operation is performed, it becomes a protruding state. Here, in a state where the second variable winning device 650 is opened for a long time and a large number of balls can be entered, the flow prevention plate 5015 is in a buried state, so that it is difficult to store the balls in the storage device 5000. Further, after the twelfth opening operation of the second variable winning device 650, the flow prevention plate 5015 is put into the buried state again, so that all the balls can flow to the tip of the flow prevention plate 5015. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the special gaming state (big hit state) from ending while the ball that has entered the second variable winning device 650 immediately before the end of the twelfth opening remains on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040.

In this way, while creating a state in which a ball can enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, the flow prevention plate 5015 is maintained in a buried state, so that the ball is difficult to accumulate in the storage device 5000. Can be formed.

As a result, in the first jackpot A (No. 2), the ball passes through the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031 while maintaining a state in which the prize ball at the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a can be sufficiently secured. It can be difficult to do. Therefore, in most cases of the first jackpot A (No. 2), the ball does not enter the probability change entry ball opening 1031 during the special game state (during the jackpot), so the probability change of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. It becomes difficult to set the state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), at the time of the second jackpot A (No. 2), the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device (second large opening) 650 is the same as that in FIG. 41 (a). Since the posture of the rotating member 5120 is different from the case of the first jackpot A (No. 2), the flow prevention plate 5015 is in a protruding state while the second variable winning device 650 is opened in a time when the ball can be entered. It is said that.

Therefore, in the 12th round of the second jackpot A (No. 2), the flow prevention plate 5015 operates differently from the 12th round of the first jackpot A (No. 2). That is, the flow prevention plate 5015 is maintained in a protruding state while the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a long time in a manner in which the ball can enter.

Therefore, from the start of the 12th round of the second jackpot A (No. 2) to the end of the 12th round, the state in which the ball can easily enter the second specific winning opening 650a is maintained. A state in which the ball is easily stored in the tilting member 1040 is maintained. As a result, the tilting member 1040 can be easily tilted by the weight of the ball, and at the jackpot B, the ball can easily pass through the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031. Therefore, the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state after the jackpot ends. It will be easier.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in a single shot, the operation mode of the flow prevention plate 5015 is a continuous operation mode in which it is difficult to set the probability change state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, and the same jackpot of the same jackpot type. It is possible to form a case in which the operation mode of the flow-down prevention plate 5015 is likely to be set to a probabilistic state of a special symbol after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation even when the jackpot, which is an operation mode that is difficult to be set in the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot in a single shot, is continuously acquired.

Further, since the main body plate portion 1001 is made of a translucent material, the player can grasp the posture of the rotating member 5120, so that the rotation can be used as a selection criterion when selecting the gaming machine to be played. The posture of the member 5120 can be provided to the player as information directly linked to the interest of the player.

That is, when the posture of the rotating member 5120 is viewed and the posture of the rotating member 5120 is changed by an angle of 12 times (12 times of opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 650), the switching protrusion portion 5124 is arranged at which position. Since it is possible to confirm in advance whether or not it is easy to shift to the probability change state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot state when the jackpot A is acquired next time, and if the jackpot A is acquired many times in a row, the jackpot state It is possible to obtain in advance information as to whether or not it will be easy to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the end. As a result, for example, a platform that can easily shift to a probabilistic state of a special symbol by acquiring a jackpot A at the next jackpot, or a jackpot A that is continuously obtained by two or three jackpots, if not the next time. In that case, it is possible to confirm the platform that can easily shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol. As a result, the player confirms the expected value of the subsequent game (for example, the state of the flow prevention plate 5015 is likely to change with a small number of big hits (short period), etc.), and makes a selection when selecting a game machine. Can be used as a reference.

When the number of opening / closing operations of the second variable winning device 650 reaches the least common multiple of 16, the rotating member 5120 takes the initial posture (see FIG. 37) after the jackpot ends. Therefore, according to the operation mode shown in FIG. 41, when the jackpot A (No. 2) is acquired five times in a row, when the jackpot A (No. 2) is acquired the next sixth time, the first jackpot A (No. 2) is acquired. The flow-down prevention plate 5015 operates in the same operation mode as in the case of 2).

If the jackpot is jackpot B, the rotating member 5120 is returned to the initial posture in which the detection pin 5125 is detected by the position sensor 5144 (the ball enters the second variable winning device 650). It is controlled to start the opening / closing operation of the jackpot B after the opening / closing operation for a short time that is impossible is performed a plurality of times. As a result, once the jackpot B is reached, the gameability of resetting the number of jackpots A up to that point can be created. That is, when the jackpot A (No. 2) is drawn multiple times, there is a relief for the player (a relief that makes it easier to set the special symbol to the probabilistic state after the jackpot ends) because the jackpot A (No. 2) is continuously drawn. It is possible to form a playability that is limited to the case of pulling.

Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 46. In the third embodiment, the case where the flow prevention plate 1015 changes to the buried state after a predetermined delay time elapses from the closing of the second variable winning device 650 has been described, but the storage device 6000 in the sixth embodiment has been described. At least while the ball is arranged in the induction flow path 1020, the delay time count is not started, and the flow prevention plate 1015 is configured to maintain the protruding state. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

42 (a) is a front view of the storage device 6000 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 42 (b) is a side view of the storage device 6000 in the direction of arrow XLIIb of FIG. 42 (a). Is a rear view of the storage device 6000, and FIG. 44 is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device 6000 in the XLIV-XLIV line of FIG. 42 (a). In FIGS. 42 and 43, the main body plate portion 1001, the drive motor 3012, the switching clutch 3013, the rotary disk 3014, and the switching member 3016 are illustrated by imaginary lines. Further, in FIG. 42B, the branch flow path 1030 is partially cross-sectionally viewed so that the inside can be visually recognized, and the flow-down prevention plate 1015 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 42 (a), 42 (b), and 43, the storage device 6000 includes a main body plate portion 1001, the above-mentioned ball stop device 3010, an induction flow path 1020, and a branch flow path 1030. The tilting member 1040 is provided in the same manner as in the third embodiment, and in addition, the rotating floor device 6100 which projects inside the induction flow path 1020 and is supported so as to be swingable in the vertical direction, and the inside of the branch flow path 1030. It mainly includes a rotating wall device 6200 that is swingably supported before and after overhanging.

The rotating floor device 6100 is a shaft rod portion 6110 projecting in a columnar shape toward the back surface side of the main body plate portion 1001, and a plate-shaped member rotatably supported by the shaft rod portion 6110, and is an induction flow path 1020. The rotating plate portion 6120 and the shaft rod portion 6110 that operate by the weight of the ball overhanging the inside of the induction flow path 1020 through the operating hole H61, which is a through hole formed by omitting the formation of the lower bottom portion, are sandwiched. An elastic spring 6130 that pulls the rotary plate 6120 downward on the opposite side of the rotary plate 6120, and an engaging arm 6140 that extends upward from the rotary plate 6120 and is configured to be engaged with the switching member 3016. And a support plate 6150 that supports the rotating plate portion 6120 at the time of tilting are mainly provided.

As shown in FIG. 44, the operation hole H61 is formed in such a manner that the bottom portion of the ball receiving recess 1021 is partially scraped. The rotating plate portion 6120 is provided with an extended bottom portion 6121 which is extended to the front side in a form of compensating for the scraped portion of the ball receiving recess 1021 and is formed by raising the ball receiving recess 1021 upward. As a result, the weight of the ball can be continuously applied to the rotating plate portion 6120 (the rotating plate portion 6210 is continuously tilted) from the time when the ball enters the ball receiving recess 1021 until the ball passes through the induction flow path 1020. it can.

The support plate 6150 is a plate portion extending rearward from the back surface of the main body plate portion 1001, and when the rotating floor device 6100 is in an inclined state (see FIG. 45A), the rotating plate portion 6120 is moved. It is a member that supports from below and prevents further tilting. Due to the action of the support plate 6150, the rotating floor device 6100 is as long as the balls are on it, regardless of the number of balls on the rotating plate 6120 (the tilt angle does not increase due to the large number of balls). Can be tilted.

In the rotating floor device 6100, in the initial state in which the ball is not on the upper surface of the rotating plate portion 6120, the extended tip of the engaging arm portion 6140 abuts on the transmission posture switching member 3016 from the right side in the front view (engagement). The switching member 3016 starts operating from the start of operation of the arm 6140).

The rotating wall device 6200 has a contact plate portion 6210 capable of swinging in the front-rear direction through an operation hole H62 bored in the branch flow path 1030 in the front-rear direction, and a back side wall of the contact plate portion 6210. The engaging arm 6220, which extends to the right from the rear view and is inclined rearward and upward from the extending tip, and the engaging arm 6220 in the initial state shown in FIG. 42 are contacted from below. It mainly includes a detent portion 6230 extending from the main body plate portion 1001 in a contacting manner.

The operation hole H62 is arranged at a position where the ball and the operation hole H62 overlap each other only after the third ball is stored in the tilt member 1040 in the front view (only two balls are stored in the tilt member 1040). If not, the sphere, the sphere, and the operation hole H62 are arranged at positions where they do not overlap).

The operation hole H62 is provided with a recessed portion extending from both sides in the left-right direction at the upper end portion thereof and recessed from the back surface side, and the recessed portion is extended in a columnar shape in the left-right direction from the upper end portion of the contact plate portion 6210. The abutting plate portion 6210 is swingably supported by the branch flow path 1030 by fitting the shaft rod portion 6211 from the back surface side.

The contact plate portion 6210 includes a receiving surface portion 6212 formed on the left side portion of the front side wall surface in a front view so as to be inclined toward the rear side toward the left side. The receiving surface portion 6212 reduces the resistance between the contact plate portion 6210 and the sphere when the sphere moved from the left side to the right in the front view of the contact plate portion 6210 comes into contact with the contact plate portion 6210. be able to.

Further, since the receiving surface portion 6212 has the above-mentioned shape, the ball dropped from directly above is passed to the left. As a result, when the ball is discharged from the right side of the discharge port 1024 to the front side, the ball comes into contact with the receiving surface portion 6212, so that the ball can be given momentum toward the left side in the front view. As a result, even though the tilting member 1040 is not in the tilted state, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing to the right of the tilting member 1040 and flowing down to the probabilistic change side flow path 1032.

As shown in FIG. 42B, the extension tip of the engaging arm portion 6220 is arranged behind the switching member 3016. Therefore, by tilting the abutting plate portion 6210 downward (operating in the clockwise direction in FIG. 42B), the engaging arm portion 6220 can be brought closer to the switching member 3016.

Next, a case where the ball is placed on the upper surface of the rotating plate portion 6120 of the rotating floor device 6100 will be described with reference to FIG. 45. 45 (a) is a front view of the storage device 6000, and FIG. 45 (b) is a side view of the storage device 6000 in the direction of arrow XLVb of FIG. 45 (a). In FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b), the main body plate portion 1001, the drive motor 3012, the switching clutch 3013, and the switching member 3016 are illustrated by imaginary lines. Further, in FIG. 45B, the branch flow path 1030 is partially cross-sectionally viewed so that the inside can be visually recognized, and the flow-down prevention plate 1015 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 45 (a), when a sphere flows down the induction flow path 1020, the rotating plate portion 6120 rotates due to the weight of the sphere, and the rotating floor device 6100 changes to a tilted state (FIG. 45 (a). )reference). This tilted state is maintained until the ball is discharged from the induction flow path 1020 (from the discharge port 1024), and when the ball is discharged from the guidance flow path 1020, the load applied to the rotating floor device 6100 is released. , The urging force of the elastic spring 6130 returns to the initial state (see FIG. 42).

As shown in FIG. 45A, when the rotating floor device 6100 is tilted, the tip of the engaging arm 6140 pushes the tip of the switching member 3016 to the left in the front view, so that the switching member 3016 is released. It rotates to the posture side (the side where the upper end portion tilts to the left), and the engagement of the switching clutch 3013 is released. Specifically, the posture of the switching member 3016 is not rotated to the releasing posture, but at least it is rotated to the posture of releasing the teeth of the switching clutch 3013 (intermediate posture, see FIG. 45A), and the switching clutch 3013 is rotated. Release the teeth. In this state, the switching member 3016 is not rotated to the release posture. Therefore, in this state, the opening / closing plate 650b of the second variable winning device 650 is not opened, and the ball is opened to the extent that the ball cannot enter. It is said that it has been done.

Therefore, if the ball remains in the induction flow path 1020 after the second variable winning device 650 is closed, the switching clutch 3013 is prevented from being in the transmission state, and at least the ball is transmitted from the induction flow path 1020. It is prevented that the flow prevention plate 1015 is buried until it is discharged. On the other hand, even if the ball remains in the induction flow path 1020, the second variable winning device 650 maintains the state in which the ball cannot enter after the second variable winning device 650 is closed. It is possible to prevent a ball from accidentally entering the second variable winning device 650 after the second variable winning device 650 is closed (after being controlled so as to be closed).

Here, the rotating floor device 6100 releases the meshing of the switching clutch 3013 while the ball is arranged in the induction flow path 1020 to prevent the flow prevention plate 1015 from being buried. After the ball is ejected from the 1020 toward the tilting member 1040, the disengagement of the switching clutch 3013 cannot be maintained. In this case, the ball may flow into the normal side flow path 1034 before the tilting member 1040 tilts, and as a countermeasure, a rotating wall device 6200 is provided. Next, the operation of the rotating wall device 6200 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 46 (a) is a front view of the storage device 6000, and FIG. 46 (b) is a side view of the storage device 6000 in the direction of the arrow XLVIb of FIG. 46 (a). In FIGS. 46A and 46B, the main body plate portion 1001, the drive motor 3012, the switching clutch 3013, and the switching member 3016 are illustrated by imaginary lines. Further, in FIG. 46B, the branch flow path 1030 is partially cross-sectionally viewed so that the inside can be visually recognized, and the flow-down prevention plate 1015 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), a sphere lands on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 from the induction flow path 1020, and the sphere is arranged on the front side of the abutting plate portion 6210. When the 6210 is pushed by the ball, the rotating wall device 6200 changes from the initial state (see FIG. 42) to the upward state (see FIG. 46). In this upward movement, the engaging arm 6220 pushes up the upper end of the switching member 3016 from the lower side, and the switching member 3016 rotates to the release posture side. In this state, the driving force of the switching clutch 3013 is transmitted. Is released. The release of the driving force transmission is maintained as long as the ball is arranged on the front side of the contact plate portion 6210, and the ball moves from the front side of the contact plate portion 6210 to hang from the ball on the contact plate portion 6210. The applied load is eliminated, and the rotating wall device 6200 returns to the initial state under the weight of the engaging arm portion 6220.

As a result, even after the spheres are discharged from the induction flow path 1020, the spheres are arranged in front of the contact plate portion 6210 based on the fact that three spheres are arranged side by side on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040, thereby switching. The driving force transmission of the clutch 3013 can be released. Therefore, the delay time until the flow prevention plate 1015 is buried can be made longer.

Since the contact plate portion 6210 is provided at a position where the balls are arranged on the front side for the first time when three balls are placed on the tilting member 1040, the action of the rotating wall device 6200 is applied to the tilting member 1040 by three balls. It can be exerted only in the state where the individual is stored (the state in which the ball may enter the probabilistic entry ball hole 1031). Therefore, even if a ball enters immediately before the closing of the second variable winning device 650 and the ball is discharged from the induction flow path 1020, for example, one ball also stays on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040. If not (when the first ball is ejected from the induction flow path 1020), the rotating wall device 6200 maintains the initial state, and transmission of the switching clutch 3013 is started.

As a result, there is no possibility that the tilting member 1040 will eventually tilt, and it is possible to prevent the rotating wall device 6200 from delaying the state change of the flow-down prevention plate 1015 even when the ball does not face the probabilistic entry ball port 1031. Therefore, the ball can be quickly discharged to the normal side flow path 1034 so that the player can quickly concentrate on a portion other than the branch flow path 1030 (for example, the third symbol display device 81 or the like).

On the other hand, after three balls are lined up on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040, the switching clutch is used until the balls are removed from the front of the contact plate portion 6210 (until the tilting member 1040 tilts and the balls move). Since the driving force transmission of 3013 remains released, even if the rotation speed of the tilting member 1040 is slightly slowed down, as long as the tilting member 1040 is rotatably formed, the ball is surely changed sideflow. It can be sent to road 1032. As a result, it is possible to prevent a malfunction in which the flow-down prevention plate 1015 is buried before the tilting member 1040 tilts and the ball flows down to the normal side flow path 1034.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49. In the first embodiment, the case where the flow prevention plate 1015 changes to the buried state based on the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 650 has been described, but the storage device 7000 in the seventh embodiment is caused by the action of the flowing ball. The flow prevention plate 1015 is configured to change to a buried state. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 47 (a) is a front view of the storage device 7000 according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 47 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device 7000 in the XLVIIb-XLVIIb line of FIG. 47 (a). In FIG. 47 (a), the main body plate portion 1001 is illustrated by an imaginary line, the rotating floor device 6100 and the rotating wall device 6200 are partially illustrated by hidden lines, and in FIG. 47 (b), the rotating floor is illustrated. The illustration of the device 6100 and the rotating wall device 6200 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the storage device 7000 is tilted with the main body plate portion 1001, the above-mentioned rotating floor device 6100, the rotating wall device 6200, the induction flow path 1020, and the branch flow path 1030. A member 1040 is provided, and in addition, a release flow path 7100 that accommodates a ball that does not enter the second variable winning device 650 and flows down to the left of the opening / closing plate 650b, and can operate inside the release flow path 7100. Mainly includes a swing member 7200 having a fan-shaped cross section formed in the above, and a plate-shaped distribution member 7300 formed operably inside the release flow path 7100.

The release flow path 7100 is a flow path having a cross-sectional area such that one sphere passes through, and branches from the first flow path 7110 and the first flow path 7110 in which the swing member 7200 projects into the flow path. It mainly includes a second flow path 7120, which is a flow path and in which the sphere does not come into contact with the swing member 7200. The ball that has passed through the first flow path 7110 is configured to flow down to the first variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2).

The swing member 7200 is swingably supported by the back side wall portion of the main body plate portion 1001 so as to project inward of the first flow path 7110, and is a plate member extending to the left in the front view from the flow prevention plate 7015. It is urged to the front side by the urging force of the elastic spring 3011a (see FIG. 22B) which is brought into contact with the 7015c and applied to the flow prevention plate 7015, and is in the initial state (see FIG. 47B).

48 (a) is a front view of the storage device 7000, and FIG. 48 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device 7000 in the XLVIIIb-XLVIIIb line of FIG. 48 (a). In FIG. 48 (a), the main body plate portion 1001 is illustrated by an imaginary line, the rotating floor device 6100 and the rotating wall device 6200 are partially illustrated by hidden lines, and in FIG. 48 (b), the rotating floor is illustrated. The illustration of the device 6100 and the rotating wall device 6200 is omitted. Further, a state in which the sphere flows down the first flow path 7110 and the swing member 7200 is changed from the initial state to the extruded state is shown.

As shown in FIG. 48B, when the ball flows down the front side of the swing member 7200 and is in the extruded state, the plate member 7015c of the flow-down prevention plate 7015 is pushed backward, and the flow-down prevention plate 7015 is buried. Form. Further, if the sphere passes below the oscillating member 7200, the load applied to the oscillating member 7200 by the sphere is eliminated, so that the urging force of the elastic spring 3011a causes the flow prevention plate 7015 to return to the protruding state.

By passing the sphere through the first flow path 7110 in this way, the flow prevention plate 7015 can be temporarily buried, so that when the sphere remains in the branch flow path 1030, the sphere is placed on the normal side. It can flow toward the flow path 1034. Therefore, as compared with the case where the state of the flow prevention plate 7015 is changed by the solenoid 650c or another driving device, the arrangement space of the device for transmitting the driving force can be omitted, and the other device (for example, large) can be omitted. It is possible to earn an opening space and a space for arranging the liquid crystal effect device).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, during the special game (big hit game), a ball that happens to fail to enter the second variable winning opening 650 (bounces and jumps out, etc.) passes through the first flow path 7110. If this happens, the flow-down prevention plate 7015 will unexpectedly form a buried state, which may be disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the ball has entered the storage device 7000, the ball that has entered the release flow path 7100 is not the first flow path 7110 but the second flow path 7120. By letting the ball enter the ball, the flow prevention plate 7015 is prevented from being buried. This will be described with reference to FIG.

49 (a) is a front view of the storage device 7000, and FIG. 49 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device 7000 in the XLIXb-XLIXb line of FIG. 49 (a). In FIG. 49 (a), the main body plate portion 1001 is illustrated by an imaginary line, the rotating floor device 6100 and the rotating wall device 6200 are partially illustrated by hidden lines, and in FIG. 49 (b), the rotating floor is illustrated. The illustration of the device 6100 and the rotating wall device 6200 is omitted. Further, the sphere rides on the upper surface of the rotating plate portion 6120, and the distribution state of the distribution member 7300 is shown.

The distribution member 7300 is rotatably supported on the back side of the main body plate portion 1001, and operates based on the operation of the rotating floor device 6100 or the rotating wall device 6200, and the driven arm portion 7310 and the driven arm thereof. It is mainly provided with a movable floor portion 7320 which is integrally formed with the portion 7310 and penetrates from the back surface to the front side of the release flow path 7100 and forms the floor wall of the first flow path 7110.

As shown in FIG. 49 (a), when the ball rides on the upper surface of the rotating plate portion 6120, the engaging arm portion 6140 pushes the driven arm portion 7310 to the left in the front view, whereby the movable floor portion 7320 Is lifted upwards to form a distribution state. When the engaging arm portion 6140 is retracted to the right, the distribution member 7300 returns to the original initial state (see FIG. 47 (a)) due to the weight of the distribution member 7300.

In the distribution state of the distribution member 7300 shown in FIG. 49 (a), the entrance to the first flow path 7110 is narrowed, and a state in which the sphere easily faces the second flow path 7120 can be formed. Further, even if the sphere does not go to the second flow path 7120, the sphere is not allowed to enter the first flow path 7110 as long as the distribution member 7300 maintains the distribution state by the action of the sphere (first flow path 7110). Since the ball is stopped at the entrance of the ball), it is possible to prevent the ball from coming into contact with the swing member 7200, and it is possible to maintain the protruding state of the flow prevention plate 7015.

The effects produced by the rotating floor device 6100 and the rotating wall device 6200 (effects described in the sixth embodiment) depending on the mode of storing the balls in the storage device 7000 are similarly produced in the present embodiment. ..

If the game is played so that the ball does not pass through the first flow path 7110, the flow prevention plate 7015 may not be buried, and the state in which the ball remains in the branch flow path 1030 may be maintained after the big hit game. .. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the time reduction is set after the end of the big hit, the ball spilled from the second entrance 640 (see FIG. 2) enters the release flow path due to the time reduction game after the end of the big hit. It can be made to ball. As a result, the balls remaining in the branch flow path 1030 can be easily flowed to the normal side flow path 1034 by the game after the jackpot game is completed.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. In the sixth embodiment, if a ball remains in the guide flow path 1020, the case where the period until the flow prevention plate 1015 operates is delayed has been described, but the storage device 8000 in the eighth embodiment has the guide flow path 1020. If a ball remains on the surface, the prevention claw portion 8230, which is different from the flow prevention plate 1015, projects. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

50 (a) is a front view of the storage device 8000 according to the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 50 (b) is a partial side view of the storage device 8000 in the direction of arrow Lb of FIG. 50 (a). In FIG. 50, the main body plate portion 1001 is illustrated by an imaginary line. Further, in FIG. 50 (a), the branch flow path 1030 is partially broken so that the rear can be visually recognized, and in FIG. 50 (b), the illustration of the left side wall of the branch flow path 1030 in front view is omitted, and the branch flow The road 1030 is partially broken so that the inside can be seen.

Although not shown, the operation of the flow prevention plate 1015 in the present embodiment is executed by transmitting the driving force by the switching clutch 3013 (see FIG. 42 (a)) as in the sixth embodiment. To.

As shown in FIG. 50 (a), the storage device 8000 tilts the main body plate portion 1001, the above-mentioned rotating floor device 6100, the rotating wall device 6200, the guide flow path 1020, and the branch flow path 1030. A fan member 8100 that includes a member 1040, and is rotatably supported on the back surface of the main body plate portion 1001 and rotates by the operation of the rotating floor device 6100 or the rotating wall device 6200, and the fan member 8100. It mainly includes an overhanging device 8200 that operates in conjunction with the operation and projects inside the branch flow path 1030.

The extension device 8200 includes a pair of gears 8210 rotatably supported on the back surface of the main body plate portion 1001, and an extension arm portion extending in the radial direction from the gear 8210 on the left side of the gears 8210. Prevention of 8220 and a portion extending from the extension tip of the extension arm portion 8220, which is configured to be able to project inward of the branch flow path 1030 through a through hole formed in the side wall of the branch flow path 1030. It mainly includes a claw portion 8230.

The fan member 8100 is pivotally supported by the main body plate portion 1001, and a portion extending upward from the shaft fulcrum is extended to a position where it can come into contact with the engaging arm portion 6140 and the engaging arm portion 6220. On the opposite side, a fan-shaped tip with gear teeth 8110 is formed.

The gear teeth 8110 and the gear 8210 are meshed with each other, and the gear ratio thereof is 1:10 (the gear 8210 is rotated 10 degrees by rotating the fan member 8100 once). ). Therefore, even when the operation of the rotating floor device 6100 or the rotating wall device 6200 is small, the operation of the prevention claw portion 8230 can be increased.

51 (a) is a front view of the storage device 8000, and FIG. 51 (b) is a partial side view of the storage device 8000 in the direction of the arrow LIb of FIG. 51 (a). In FIG. 51 (a), the main body plate portion 1001 is illustrated by an imaginary line. Further, in FIG. 51 (a), the branch flow path 1030 is partially broken so that the rear can be visually recognized, and in FIG. 51 (b), the illustration of the left side wall of the branch flow path 1030 in front view is omitted, and the branch flow The road 1030 is partially broken so that the inside can be seen.

FIG. 51 shows a state in which the ball rides on the rotating plate portion 6120, the engaging arm portion 6140 moves to the left, and the fan member 8100 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the fan member 8100 operates in this way, the gear 8210 on the right side, which is meshed with the fan member 8100, rotates clockwise in the front view, and the gear 8210 on the left side rotates counterclockwise in the front view. As a result, the extended arm portion 8220 extending from the gear 8210 on the left side of the front view rotates counterclockwise in the front view, and the prevention claw portion 8230 projects inward of the branch flow path 1030. As a result, even after the flow-down prevention plate 1015 is in the buried state, the prevention claw portion 8230 can prevent the ball from flowing down to the normal side flow path 1034.

The effects produced by the rotating floor device 6100 and the rotating wall device 6200 (effects described in the sixth embodiment) depending on the mode of storing the balls in the storage device 8000 are similarly produced in the present embodiment. ..

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. In the first embodiment, the case where the ball discharged from the discharge port 1024 is likely to fall on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 on the left side of the rotation axis of the tilting member 1040 in the front view has been described, but the storage device in the ninth embodiment has been described. The 9000 is configured to fall on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 on the right side of the rotation axis of the tilting member 1040 when viewed from the front. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. A mode in which the game ball flows into the storage device 9000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53.

52 (a) is a partial front view of the storage device 9000 according to the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 52 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device 9000 in the LIIb-LIIB line of FIG. 52 (a). 52 (c) is a partial front view of the storage device 9000, and FIG. 52 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device 9000 along the LIId-LIId line of FIG. 52 (c). For ease of understanding, the enclosure support portion 9130 is illustrated by a hidden line only in FIG. 52A, and the enclosure support portion 9130 is omitted in other drawings.

Further, FIG. 53 (a) is a partial front view of the storage device 9000, and FIG. 53 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device 9000 in line LIIIb-LIIIb of FIG. 53 (a). c) is a partial front view of the storage device 9000, and FIG. 53 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device 9000 along the LIIId-LIIId line of FIG. 53 (c). In addition, in FIG. 52 and FIG. 53, the balls that have entered the second variable winning device 650 are shown with numbers that are added in the order of entry. It should be noted that in FIGS. 52 and 53, the configuration in which the flow-down prevention plate 1015 is operated and the configuration in which the flow-down prevention plate 1015 is arranged on the back surface side of the branch flow path 1030 is not shown for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in the storage device 9000 of the present embodiment, the inclined surface portion 1023a of the first embodiment is formed to have substantially the same shape as the inclined surface portion 1023a, and constitutes the downstream end wall surface of the inclined flow path 1023. The 9023a is arranged at a position where the left-right width of the discharge port 1024 is slightly larger than that of one ball, and the storage device 9000 comes into contact with the ball inside the branch flow path 1030 to form a flow of the ball. The locking device 9100 and the discharge prevention protrusion 9200 are provided.

The locking device 9100 is configured to change the state by arranging the ball entering the branch flow path 1030 on the front side, and is in a non-contact state (FIGS. 52A and 52) in which the ball does not come into contact with the ball. (See (b)), the L-shaped moving member 9110 having a substantially L-shape in front view and the L-shaped moving member 9110 protruding inward of the branch flow path 1030 and the elasticity of urging the L-shaped moving member 9110 toward the non-contacting position. The spring 9120 and the side wall on the back side of the branch flow path 1030 are extended rearward in an L-shape in a front view, and each side of the L-shape is made into two sides at the extended end, and the L-shaped moving member 9110 It mainly includes an enclosure support portion 9130 on which a rectangular plate-shaped support side surface 9131 that intersects the slide operation direction perpendicularly is formed.

The L-shaped moving member 9110 is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction (vertical direction on the paper surface in FIG. 52 (a)), and has a ball contact portion 9111 extending parallel to the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 in the initial state and a ball contact portion 9111 thereof. A tilt prevention portion 9112 extending from a downstream end portion (see FIG. 52A) of the portion 9111 toward the tilt member 1040 is mainly provided.

In the ball contact portion 9111, a ball receiving inclined surface 9111a is formed so that the surface that comes into contact with the ball flowing down the tilting member 1040 is inclined toward the back side toward the upstream side (right side in the front view). When the ball abuts on the ball receiving inclined surface 9111a, a load directed to the back side is applied to the ball abutting portion 9111 via the ball receiving inclined surface 9111a, and the L-shaped moving member 9111 moves (pushes in) to the back side. ).

The tilt prevention portion 9112 overlaps the tilt member 1040 in a top view in a non-contact state of the L-shaped moving member 9110, and a surface on the side facing the tilt member 1040 is formed parallel to the tilt member (the tilt member 1040 is formed). The locking surface portion 9112a (which does not generate a load toward the back side by tilting) and the inclined surface portion connected to the front side of the locking surface portion 9112a, and ascending toward the front side (tilting member 1040). Mainly provided with a rubbing inclined surface 9112b (toward a direction away from the above).

Since the tilt preventing portion 9112 has the above-described configuration, the locking surface portion 9112a comes into contact with the L-shaped moving member 9110 even if the tilting member 1040 is about to tilt in the non-contact state of the L-shaped moving member 9110. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the tilting member 1040 from being tilted.

Further, in the contact state where the sphere is arranged on the front side of the L-shaped moving member 9110 and the L-shaped moving member 9110 is moved to the back side (see FIG. 52 (d)), the locking surface portion 9112a is in contact with the tilting member 1040. It is retracted to a position where it cannot be touched, and depending on the positioning of the ball in the front-rear direction, the rubbing inclined surface 9112b can come into contact with the upper surface of the tilting member 1040.

Here, since the rubbing inclined surface 9112b is configured to be inclined upward toward the front side, it is pushed out toward the back side by contact with the tilting member 1040, and the tilting operation of the tilting member 1040 is performed. It can be prevented from interfering. Therefore, it is possible to change whether or not the tilting member 1040 can tilt and operate depending on whether the L-shaped moving member 9110 is in the non-contact state or the contact state.

The elastic spring 9120 is arranged between the support side surface 9131 of the enclosure support portion 9130 and the L-shaped moving member 9110. As a result, the expansion / contraction direction of the elastic spring 9120 and the operation direction of the L-shaped moving member 9110 can be aligned with each other, and the transmission efficiency of the elastic force can be improved.

The discharge prevention protrusion 9200 is a plate portion that protrudes from the back side wall of the branch flow path 1030 to the front side above the extension tip of the extension plate portion 1043 of the tilt member 1040 in the initial state of the tilt member 1040. The side surface of the plate portion is configured to be perpendicular to the upper surface of the tilting member 1040. Further, the discharge prevention protrusion 9200 is configured such that when the tilting member 1040 forms the initial state, the sphere flowing on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 can come into contact with the tilting member 1040, and the tilting member 1040 is in the tilted state. If this happens, the ball flowing on the upper surface can pass between the tilting member 1040 and the discharge prevention protrusion 9200 (no contact) (a gap larger than the diameter of the sphere is between the tilting member 1040 and the discharge prevention protrusion). (Arrangement formed between 9200).

Due to the discharge prevention protrusion 9200, for example, before the tilting member 1040 is tilted, the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 is blown to the right in the front view by the collision between the balls. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the road 1032. As a result, it is possible to ensure the playability that the balls enter the probabilistic change side flow path 1032 only when a predetermined number of balls (three in the present embodiment) are stored on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040.

In the present embodiment having the above-described configuration, the flow until the tilting member 1040 tilts and operates will be described. First, in a big hit game, when a ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a while the second variable winning device 650 is open, the ball reaches the discharge port 1024 via the inclined flow path 1023 (FIG. 52 (a). ) And FIG. 52 (b)).

From here, when the ball is discharged to the front side of the discharge port 1024, the ball lands on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 on the right side of the shaft rod portion 1042 when viewed from the front. At this time, since the sphere is not arranged on the front side of the L-shaped moving member 9110, the L-shaped moving member 9110 tilts the tilting member 1040 even when the vigorous sphere is discharged from the discharge port 1024. Acts in a manner that prevents. Therefore, when only one ball lands on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040, it is possible to prevent the tilting member 1040 from being tilted.

On the other hand, when the sphere is arranged on the front side of the L-shaped moving member 9110, the tilting member 1040 and the L-shaped moving member 9110 do not overlap in the top view, while the sphere is the left end of the front surface of the tilting member 1040. By riding on (see FIGS. 52 (c) and 52 (d)), the position of the center of gravity of the tilting member 1040 moves to the left. Therefore, when the second ball is discharged from the discharge port 1024 and lands on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040, it is possible to prevent the tilting member 1040 from tilting due to an impact.

Further, when the tilting member 1040 is on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 up to the second ball, the tilting member 1040 maintains the initial state, but depending on the mode of collision between the first ball and the second ball, the second ball May be ejected to the right. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the discharge prevention protrusion 9200 is arranged in the direction in which the ball is ejected (see FIG. 53 (a)), the ejected ball is dammed by the discharge prevention protrusion 9200. , Bounced to the left in front view. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the probability variation side flow path 1032 even though the tilting member 1040 is not tilted.

When the third ball lands on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040, the position of the center of gravity of the tilting member 1040 is moved to the right of the shaft rod portion 1042, and the tilting member 1040 changes to the tilted state. In this tilted state, a sufficient gap is formed between the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 and the discharge prevention protrusion 9200 (see FIG. 53 (c)), so that the ball is placed on the probabilistic side. It can flow down toward the flow path 1032.

Further, in the tilted state of the tilting member 1040, the side surface on the back surface side of the tilting member 1040 is in contact with the front end portion of the L-shaped moving member 9110 (see FIGS. 53 (c) and 53 (d)). When the tilting member 1040 returns from the tilted state to the initial state, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the tilting member 1040 and the L-shaped moving member 9110 come into contact with each other in the moving direction.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the ball is landed on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 on the right side of the shaft rod portion 1042 in the front view, and the ball is flown by utilizing the inclination of the tilting member 1040 to prevent the ball from flowing down. Since it is configured to be stored on the right side of the plate 1015, it is possible to form a state in which the balls stored in the tilting member 1040 are lined up in the left-right direction regardless of the setting of the tilting angle of the tilting member 1040.

Further, since the locking device 9100 can prevent the tilting member 1040 from tilting due to the momentum of the ball, it tilts only when a predetermined number of balls are stored in the tilting member 1040 without depending on the momentum of the ball. The member 1040 can be tilted. Further, the discharge prevention protrusion 9200 can prevent the ball from flowing down toward the probabilistic change side flow path 1032 regardless of how the ball bounces when the tilting member 1040 is in the initial state.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the inclined flow path 1023 is gently inclined downward toward the front side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclined flow path 1023 may be horizontal in the front-rear direction, or may be gently ascended toward the front side toward the back side. In this case, it is possible to easily prevent the sphere from being discharged from the discharge port 1024 to the front side in the middle of the inclined flow path 1023, and when the sphere flows down toward the inclined member 1040, the left end of the inclined member 1040. It can be made easier to flow down toward the part. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent one ball from falling to the right end portion of the tilting member 1040 and tilting the tilting member 1040 due to the load at the time of landing of the ball, and erroneously to the probabilistic side flow path 1032. Can be prevented from flowing in.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 is formed only from the planar shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the interference member is extended upward along the back side surface near the end of the rectangular weight portion 1041 and the tilting member 1040 is in the initial state, the interference member does not overlap with the discharge port 1024 in the front view. On the other hand, when the tilting member 1040 is in a tilted state, the interfering member may overlap with the discharge port 1024 in the front view. In this case, the interference member can prevent the next ball from being discharged from the discharge port 1024 after the tilted member 1040 is tilted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the tilting member 1040 from returning to the initial state again when the next ball rides on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 and the position of the center of gravity changes again.

In each of the above embodiments, the ball that deviates from the second entry port 640 and flows downstream collides with the arc member 70 and the outer edge member 73, bounces, and travels through the outer edge member 73 to the second variable winning device 650. The case of reaching is explained, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a flow path having a cross-sectional area such that one ball passes through the path from the second entry port 640 to the outer edge member 73 is formed so that the ball reaches the outer edge member 73 through the flow path. Is also good. In this case, since the interval at which the balls reach the outer edge member 73 can be controlled, the number of balls entering the second variable winning device 650 within a predetermined time can be controlled. The internal shape of the flow path is not particularly limited, and for example, ribs extending in a direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the sphere are alternately formed on the opposing inner surfaces to decelerate the sphere. good.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the flow-down prevention plate 1015 changes its state in association with the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 650 provided with the storage device 1000 downstream is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state of the flow prevention plate 1015 may be changed by opening and closing the first variable winning device 65.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the tilting member 1040 is supported by the shaft extending in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be supported by a shaft extending to the left and right and tilted so as to tilt toward the front side (bow toward the player). In this case, when one ball rides on the tilting member 1040, the ball is arranged on the back side of the front view, making it difficult to see. On the other hand, when three or more balls ride on the tilting member 1040, the ball is on the front side of the front view. It is possible to form an easy-to-understand game property that the ball on the tilting member 1040 becomes more visible to the player (the more it protrudes toward the front), which is advantageous to the player.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the state of the flow prevention plate 1015 is changed and the ball is stopped on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 based on the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 650 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, in two types of pachinko gaming machines, the state of the flow prevention plate 1015 is configured to be changed and opened in response to the movement of the wing member that opens and closes when the ball enters a predetermined entry port. The tilting member 1040 may be arranged in the path through which the ball flows down after entering the wing member. In this embodiment, when the tilting member 1040 is in the initial state, the ball is sent to the normal flow path, and the tilting member 1040 In the tilted state, the ball may be sent to a special flow path that makes it easier for the ball to enter the V winning opening (the winning opening for winning a jackpot) than the normal flow path.

For example, when the ball stopper 5100 described above in the fifth embodiment is used to change the state of the flow prevention plate 1015, for example, the flow prevention plate 5015 is buried every time the wing member is opened four times. By setting, if a plurality of balls (for example, 3) can be put in the path behind the wing member while the wing member is opened three times, the sphere can be sent to the special flow path and a big hit can be obtained. It is possible to form a playability that is easy to acquire.

In each of the above embodiments, the tilting member 1040 for switching the flow direction of the sphere is formed in the storage device 1000 in a rotational manner, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the distribution member that switches the flow direction of the sphere may be configured to slide with the weight of the sphere. That is, when one ball is stored in the storage device 1000, the sorting member does not slide and move, but when a plurality of balls (for example, five) are stored, the weight of the balls causes them to separate from the flow prevention plate 1015 (front view). The distribution member may be pushed to the right) to slide and move, and the sliding movement may open the entrance to the probability-changing side flow path 1032 so that the ball can enter the probability-changing side flow path 1032. .. In this case, the distribution member gradually slides and moves according to the accumulation condition of the balls (for example, when three balls are accumulated and when four balls are accumulated, the movement width of the distribution member is larger when four balls are accumulated. Although it is large, the entrance to the probabilistic side flow path 1032 can still be configured so as not to be opened to the extent that the spheres pass through), and the distribution member can be operated each time the number of spheres stored in the storage device 1000 increases. .. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of improving the interest of the player by the operation of the sorting member.

In the third embodiment, based on the operation of the second variable winning device 650, a state is formed in which the operation of the constantly driven drive motor 3012 and the operation of the flow prevention plate 1015 are synchronized, and in that state, the flow prevention plate 1015 is formed. The case where the state of is changed has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow-down prevention plate 1015 may be configured to constantly change its state by the constantly driven drive motor 3012. In this case, a predetermined number of balls may or may not be stored on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 due to differences in the opening / closing pattern of the second variable winning device 650 due to the timing at which the jackpot game is started or the difference in the jackpot type. And can be formed. For example, by forming the drive motor 3012 to make one rotation in 360 seconds (long period), the flow prevention plate 1015 is always in the branch flow path 1030 during the maximum opening period (30 seconds) of the 12th round of the jackpot. Both the situation where it remains buried on the back side and the situation where the flow prevention plate 1015 always remains protruding inward of the branch flow path 1030 during the maximum opening period (30 seconds) of the 12th round of the jackpot. Can be formed.

In the fourth embodiment, in order to prevent the projecting rib 4014a of the rotating disk 4014 and the projecting engaging portion 4013d of the friction rotating member 4013 from colliding in the axial direction, the period for maintaining the open state is set. The case where the second variable winning device 650 is controlled so as not to change from the open state to the closed state has been described for 1 second from 2.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an inclined surface that inclines the protruding rib 4014a toward both ends in the circumferential direction in a manner closer to the disk portion 1014b is formed from the central portion in the circumferential direction (that is, the central portion in the circumferential direction of the protruding rib 4014a). Is composed of ridges instead of surfaces), and the projecting engaging portion 4013d is formed from a conical shape in which the height direction is along a straight line parallel to the rotation axis of the friction rotating member 4013. You may. In this case, even if the projecting rib 4014a and the projecting engaging portion 4013d collide with each other in the axial direction, the collision can be passed on the inclined surfaces of each other, and a failure can be prevented.

Further, the sharp tip of the protrusion rib 4014a (the tip on the side facing the friction rotating member 4013) and the sharp tip of the protrusion engagement portion 4013d (the tip on the side facing the rotating disk 4014) Regarding the positional relationship in the circumferential direction (whether the protrusion rib 4014a is arranged in the traveling direction of the protrusion engagement portion 4013d or the protrusion engagement portion 4013d passes through the protrusion rib 4014a), the center position of the tip thereof is the circumference. It is switched at the timing of overlapping in the direction (for example, 3 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 650). As described above, the collision between the protrusion rib 4014a and the protrusion engagement portion 4013d is performed even when the second variable winning device 650 is opened at any timing except for the timing when the center positions of the sharp tips overlap in the circumferential direction. Does not cause any trouble. Therefore, for example, in the jackpot A, the second variable winning device 650 is controlled to be opened for 2.9 seconds and then closed, and in the jackpot B, the second variable winning device 650 is opened for 3.1 seconds. It may be controlled so that it is in a closed state after being in a state. In this case, the difference in the time when the second variable winning device 650 is open between the jackpot A and the jackpot B may be set as a period (for example, 0.2 seconds) in which it is difficult for the player to determine the difference. it can. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the acquired jackpot is jackpot A or jackpot B from the operation mode of the second variable winning device 650, and attract the player's attention to the tilting member 1040. Can be done.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the switching protrusions 5124 are arranged at two locations on the rotating member 5120 of the ball stopper 5100 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be one place or a plurality of places of three or more places. Further, when the switching protrusions 5124 are arranged at a plurality of locations of three or more, the intervals between the arrangements can be arbitrarily determined (different). As a result, for example, the second variable winning device 650 is from the time when the first switching protrusion 5124 comes into contact with the switching device 5140 until the adjacent second switching protrusion 5124 comes into contact with the switching device 5140. The number of times the switch is opened and closed, and after the second switching protrusion 5124 comes into contact with the switching device 5140, the third switching protrusion 5124 adjacent to the first switching protrusion 5124 is adjacent to the switching protrusion 5124. The number of times the second variable winning device 650 is opened and closed before the 5124 comes into contact with the switching device 5140 can be made different. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to associate the number of opening / closing operations of the second variable winning device 650 with the change in the state of the flow prevention plate 5015, and it is difficult for the player to predict the change in the state of the flow prevention plate 5015. It is possible to form a playability that the player can always play with a sense of expectation without knowing when the flow prevention plate 5015 operates.

In the fifth embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is in a state where the switching protrusion 5124 arranged on the rotating member 5120 of the ball stopper 5100 is in contact with the rotating arm portion 5142 of the switching device 5140. Although the case where the contact between the rotating arm portion 5142 and the switching protrusion portion 5124 is always released by the rotation opening / closing operation has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by extending the circumferential length of one of the switching protrusions 5124, the rotating arm portion 5142 and the switching protrusion 5124 come into contact with each other while the second variable winning device 650 opens and closes a plurality of times. It may be maintained. In this case, regardless of whether the flow prevention plate 5015 is in the buried state or the protruding state when the second variable winning device 650 is in the closed state immediately before the opening operation of the ball with a length capable of entering the ball, the following It is difficult to predict which state the flow prevention plate 5015 will be in when the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and it is possible to easily maintain the expectation of the player.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the ball entering the first flow path 7110 is limited to the ball flowing down from the second variable winning device 650 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a flow path may be formed (connected) so that a ball that has entered the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 enters the first flow path 7110. As a result, even if the ball remains on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 after the special game state (big hit game state) is completed, the act of aiming for the next big hit (first entry port 64 or second entry ball). By (the act of inserting the ball into the mouth 640), the flow prevention plate 7015 can be changed to the buried state, and the ball remaining on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 can be discharged.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where one ball is arranged at the position where it comes into contact with the flow prevention plate 1015 causes the L-shaped moving member 9110 to retract from the operation locus of the tilting member 1040 has been described. It is not limited. For example, the second L-shaped moving member (No. 2) is arranged at a position corresponding to the second ball (a position shifted diagonally upward to the right of the L-shaped moving member 9110 in the front view), and the second L-shaped moving member (No. 2) is arranged. The L-shaped moving member (No. 2) may be configured such that the second ball is retracted from the operation locus of the tilting member 1040 by stopping on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040. In this case, when the second ball lands on the tilting member 1040, the L-shaped moving member (No. 2) is arranged in the moving locus of the tilting member 1040, so that the second ball is the tilting member 1040. It is possible to easily prevent the tilting member 1040 from tilting due to the impact when landing on the ground.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the tilting operation of the tilting member 1040 is prevented by the action of the locking device 9100 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position of the center of gravity of the tilting member 1040 may be set to a position excessively to the left, and the tilting operation may not be performed when one ball rides on the extending plate portion 1043. In this case, the locking device 9100 can be omitted.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the discharge prevention protrusion 9200 is projected from the side wall on the back side of the branch flow path 1030 toward the front side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate member may be extended from the extension tip of the extension plate portion 1043 of the tilting member 1040 (the tip on the opposite side of the shaft rod portion 1042). As a result, in the tilted state of the tilting member 1040, the plate member is also integrated with the tilting member 1040 and displaced downward, so that a wide path for the sphere discharged from the discharge port 1024 to flow into the probabilistic side flow path 1032 is secured. be able to.

Here, as the shape of the plate member, for example, in the tilted state of the tilting member 1040, the plate member is horizontally extended from the extending tip of the extending plate portion 1043 (extending in a direction of gently ascending and tilting from the extending direction). The shape (to be provided) is illustrated. In this case, when the ball is flown in the tilted state, the surface of the plate member that comes into contact with the ball becomes horizontal, so that it is possible to prevent the ball from hindering the flow of the ball, but in the initial state, the plate member that comes into contact with the ball. By making the surface of the ball ascending and sloping, it is possible to decelerate the ball that is about to jump out to the right and produce the effect of preventing the ball from jumping out.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Point where the seesaw stopper moves by the operation of the V attacker (also used as a drive)>
A winning opening arranged in the game area where the game ball flows down, a first switching means for switching between a possible state in which the game ball can win a prize and an impossible state in which the game ball cannot win, and the first switching means thereof. In a game machine provided with a first driving means for driving a player and a profit acquisition means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by flowing down the game ball winning the winning opening, the game ball winning the winning opening is A stopping means configured to be able to stop and allowing the stopped game ball to flow down to the profit acquisition means, a stopping state in which the game ball reaching the stopping means can be stopped at the stopping means, and a stopped state. A second switching means for switching between a non-stop state in which the game ball reaching the stopping means is not stopped at the stopping means is provided, and the driving force of the first driving means is transmitted to the second switching means. Based on this, the gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the state changes between the stationary state and the non-stationary state.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the second profit state determination unit (corresponding to the stopping means) at which the game ball winning the second major winning opening (corresponding to the winning opening) arrives, and the distribution unit (second). There is a gaming machine that distributes a gaming ball to two flow paths having different benefits for a player by operating the switching means (corresponding to the switching means) in the left-right direction (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the large winning opening opening / closing accessory that changes the state of the second winning opening and the distribution unit are driven by separate driving means, the arrangement of the two driving means is arranged. It is necessary to decide the arrangement of the second prize opening and the distribution part while securing the space, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom of arrangement is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the state of the second switching means changes based on the transmission of the driving force of the first driving means, so that only one driving means is required and the arrangement space can be secured. Since it becomes easy, the degree of freedom in arranging the first switching means, the second switching means, and the stopping means can be increased.

Further, since the second switching means changes the state between the stationary state and the non-stationary state by driving the first driving means that drives the first switching means that changes the state of the winning opening, the operation pattern of the second switching means The degree of freedom can be improved, and the situation in which the player gets bored can be less likely to occur.

It should be noted that the predetermined profits include a profit that makes the game state a probable change state (V sure prize), a profit that can obtain a big hit (two types of V prizes), and a profit that enables a flow path that is likely to be a big hit. To.

In the game machine A1, the second switching means is characterized in that the driving force of the first driving means is transmitted via the first switching means.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the driving force of the first driving means is transmitted to the second switching means via the first switching means, so that the operating width of the first switching means is used. Therefore, the operating width of the second switching means can be secured. Further, by using both the means for securing the operating width of the first switching means and the means for securing the operating width of the second switching means, a means for securing the operating width of the first driving means is provided for each switching means. The arrangement space can be suppressed as compared with the case of arranging. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the first switching means, the second switching means, and the stopping means can be increased.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the stopping means is characterized in that, when a predetermined number or more of the game balls are stored, the game balls are brought down toward the profit acquisition means by the operation. Machine A3.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1 or A2, when a predetermined number or more of the game balls are stored in the stop means, the stop means operates and the game balls are directed toward the profit acquisition means. Since it is in a state of flowing down, the movement of the stopping means and the movement of the game ball can be linked and shown to the player as compared with the case where the flow path of the game ball changes only by the state change of the second switching means. It is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, when one game ball is stopped at the stopping means, the game ball is not in a posture in which it can flow down toward the profit acquisition means, so that the first switching means becomes possible in a short period of time (for a short period of time). Even if one game ball wins in the case of (Paca), it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down toward the profit acquisition means. Therefore, as has been conventionally performed, control is performed so that the game ball does not accidentally flow down to the profit acquisition means by changing the state of the distribution unit several seconds after the timing of switching the first switching means to the possible state. Along with the control, the control of opening the first switching means for a short period of time at the start of opening can be eliminated, and the control of the first driving means can be simplified.

The operation mode of the stopping means is not particularly limited, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the game ball may be stored on the upper surface, the position of the load applied to the stopping means with respect to the rotation axis may change depending on the number of stored game balls, and the seesaw may be tilted or slid with the weight of the ball. It may be in the mode of

Further, when the stopping means tilts, the landing point of the ball on the stopping means is not particularly limited. That is, with reference to the rotation axis, the side may be lowered or the side may be raised.

A4 of the game machine A3 is characterized in that the movement of the stopping means makes it difficult for the ball to flow down to a flow path that causes the ball to flow down to the opposite side of the profit acquisition means.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, the operation of the stopping means makes it difficult for the ball to flow down to the flow path that causes the ball to flow down to the opposite side of the profit acquisition means. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to flow from the stopping means to the opposite side of the profit acquisition means before the operation is started and the stopped state is reached.

The game machine A1 includes a first special means for transmitting the driving force of the first driving means to the second switching means, and the first driving means is driven and controlled by a plurality of driving patterns, and the first special means. When the first driving means operates based on the driving pattern of 1, the state of the second switching means is changed, and when the first driving means operates based on another driving pattern, the said A game machine A5 characterized in that the state of the second switching means is not changed.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, whether or not the state of the second switching means changes depending on the drive pattern of the first driving means changes, so the operation pattern of the first switching means is confirmed. This makes it possible to determine whether or not the state of the second switching means is changed. Therefore, for the player who wants the state of the second switching means to be switched to a state advantageous to the player, the attention of the first switching means operated by the driving force of the first driving means can be improved. The line of sight of the person can be gathered near the first switching means.

In this state, the LED in the vicinity of the first switching means is lit, while the LED in the portion away from the first switching means is turned off, so that the brightness of the portion of interest of the player is maintained and the other portions are displayed. It can be darkened. As a result, the power consumption can be reduced, and the visibility of the game ball in the portion away from the first switching means in the game area can be deteriorated.

Regarding the visibility of the game ball in the game area, for example, by impairing the visibility of the game ball flowing down on the upstream side of the first switching means, a state in which the game ball flows down to the winning opening from an unexpected position is formed. It can be done, and the player can be less likely to get bored.

Further, for example, when the first switching means is in an incapable state, the first switching means flows down and the visibility of the game ball flowing down to the downstream side is deteriorated, so that the player concentrates on the game ball flowing toward the out port. It can be prevented from doing so. As a result, the degree of attention in the vicinity of the first switching means can be maintained.

In the game machine A5, the first special means has a movement locus on a predetermined plane, and while the stopping means forms the stopping state by the second switching means, the second switching means from the ball. The gaming machine A6, characterized in that the direction of the load applied to is directed in a direction perpendicular to the predetermined plane.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of the game machine A5, the direction of the load applied from the ball to the second switching means is directed in the direction perpendicular to the plane on which the movement locus of the first special means is formed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first special means from operating due to the load via the second switching means, and each time the game ball comes into contact with the second switching means, the load is applied in the moving direction of the first special means. It can be prevented from being given. Thereby, the durability of the second switching means can be improved.

In the game machine A1, when the interval at which the first switching means is switched between the possible state and the impossible state is shorter than a predetermined interval depending on the mode of changing the state of the first switching means. The gaming machine A7 is provided with a second special means for preventing switching between a stationary state and a non-stationary state.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, it is possible to form a state in which the state change of the first switching means and the state change of the second switching means are not linked by the second special means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the operation mode of the first switching means.

That is, it is possible to maintain the state of the second switching means (for example, maintain the state of being stopped) while changing the state of the first switching means with a short interval, so that the game ball can be stopped.

The second special means in the game machine A7 is characterized in that the second special means is switched to the non-stationary state by maintaining the impossible state of the first switching means for a predetermined period of time. Game machine A8 to play.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7, the second switching means is in the stationary state at the moment when the first switching means is switched to the disabled state, and the first switching means maintains the disabled state for a predetermined period. As a result, the second switching means is switched to the non-stationary state, so that the game ball that has won the winning opening just before the first switching means becomes incapable waits for the game ball to reach the stopping means, and then the second switching means. The state of can be switched to the non-stationary state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being stopped at the stopping means, and it is possible to completely flush the game ball.

<Point to set a period from the operation of the V attacker to the release of the stopper>
A winning opening arranged in the game area where the game ball flows down, a first switching means for switching between a possible state in which the game ball can win a prize and an impossible state in which the game ball cannot win, and the first switching means thereof. In a game machine including a first driving means for driving a player and a profit acquisition means for giving a predetermined profit to a player by flowing down a game ball that has won a prize in the winning opening. A stop means that is configured to be able to stop and allows the stopped game ball to flow down to the profit acquisition means, and a stop state in which the game ball that has reached the stop means can be stopped at the stop means. The second driving means, which is different from the first driving means, is provided with a second switching means for switching between a non-stop state in which the game ball reaching the stopping means is not stopped at the stopping means. The driving force of the second driving means can be transmitted to the second switching means based on the fact that the switching means is switched to the impossible state, and the driving force of the second driving means causes the second switching means to be transmitted to the second switching means. A delay driving means for changing a state between a stationary state and a non-stationary state, wherein a predetermined period elapses before the second switching means switches from the stationary state to the non-stationary state. Characteristic game machine B1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a distribution unit (corresponding to the second switching means) is assigned to the second profit state determination unit (corresponding to the stopping means) to which the game ball winning the second major winning opening arrives. There is a gaming machine that distributes a gaming ball to two flow paths having different benefits for a player by operating in the left-right direction (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the operation timings of the large winning opening opening / closing accessory that changes the state of the second large winning opening and the distribution unit are different, but in this case, they operate at different timings. There is a problem that the control becomes complicated because it is necessary to control the operation.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, the delay driving means has the second driving means, and the driving force of the second driving means moves to the second switching means side based on the switching of the state of the first switching means. Since it is possible to transmit and the second switching means is set to the non-stationary state after a predetermined period from the state change of the first switching means, the operation timings of the first switching means and the second switching means are different. This can be done only by controlling the first switching means. This can simplify the control.

The game machine B1 is characterized in that the delay driving means starts transmitting the driving force of the second driving means to the second switching means based on the fact that the first switching means becomes impossible. Game machine B2.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the predetermined period secured until the second switching means is switched to the non-stationary state is the period after the first switching means is disabled. Therefore, after the first driving means starts the control to switch the first switching means to the impossible state for some reason, such as a game ball being caught between the first switching means and the board surface, the first switching means is actually used. Even if a period of time elapses before the state becomes impossible, it is possible to secure a period from the state of the first switching means to the state of the second switching means changing. As a result, it is possible to prevent a malfunction in which the second switching means changes its state before the game ball that has won the winning opening reaches the stopping means immediately before the first switching means becomes incapable.

In the game machine B2, the delay driving means is a transmission state in which the power of the second driving means is transmitted by driving the second driving means operating in a certain mode and the driving of the first driving means, and non-transmission. A displacement means that switches between the non-transmission state and displaces in the transmission state, and a return means that gives the displacement means a load for returning the displacement means to the initial position before displacement in the non-transmission state. The second switching means is in a stationary state when the displacement means is arranged at the initial position, and is displaced toward the arrangement in the non-stationary state based on the displacement of the displacement means. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the displacement means is displaced for a predetermined delay period to be in a non-stationary state.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the displacement means that changes the state of the second switching means after the lapse of the delay period has a certain aspect by driving the first drive means and entering a transmission state. The driving force of the second driving means that operates in the above is transmitted and displaced, and when the first driving means is driven and put into a non-transmission state, the returning means returns to the initial position. The period from when the 1 driving means is driven to the transmission state until the second switching means changes the state can be kept constant.

Further, since the first driving means is not used as a driving source of the second switching means but is used for switching transmission with a separate second driving means, the second switching means may malfunction due to insufficient driving force. It can be prevented from occurring.

Further, if the driving state of the first driving means changes during the delay period and the state of the first switching means changes again, the state of the second switching means also returns to the arrangement in the stationary state, so that the delay period or less By changing the driving state of the first driving means at intervals, the state of the second switching means can be maintained in the stationary state while changing the state of the first switching means.

In the game machine B3, when the first switching means is brought into the possible state by driving the first driving means, the displacement means is put into the non-transmission state, and the displacement means by the return means. B4, characterized in that the displacement of is performed in a period shorter than the delay period.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, the displacement of the displacement means by the return means is performed in a period shorter than the delay period, so that the first switching means changes to a possible state and the winning opening is won. The second switching means can be returned to the stopped state before the game ball reaches the stopped means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the winning game ball from flowing down without being stopped by the stopping means immediately after the first switching means becomes possible, so that the game ball can be easily stopped by the stopping means. ..

In the game machine B2, the delay driving means is a transmission state in which the power of the second driving means is transmitted by driving the second driving means operating in a certain mode and the driving of the first driving means, and non-transmission. A transmission clutch that switches between the non-transmission state and displaces in the transmission state, and an engagement cam that is configured to be displaceable by engaging with the transmission clutch and that holds the second switching means in the stationary state at the initial position. And, in the non-transmission state, the second switching means includes a return means for giving a load for returning the engagement cam to the initial position before displacement to the engagement cam, and the second switching means displaces the engagement cam. The engagement cam is displaced for a predetermined delay period to be in a non-stationary state, and the transmission clutch is in a state in which the first switching means is possible. In the case of, the gaming machine B5 is characterized in that it is not engaged with the engaging cam.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B2, when the first switching means becomes possible, the second switching means operates by the action of the returning means and becomes a stationary state, so that the game ball is placed in the winning opening. It is possible to stop the game ball at each timing when it starts to be able to win a prize, and it is possible to improve the expectation that the game ball will be passed through the profit acquisition means.

In the game machine B5, when the first switching means is in an incapable state, the transmission clutch is in the first posture, which is a predetermined posture, so that the non-transmission state is formed, and the transmission clutch is in the first posture. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that when the posture is maintained and the first switching means changes to a possible state, the driving force of the second driving means is started to be transmitted from the first posture.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, when the first switching means maintains the disabled state for a long period of time, the transmission clutch of the transmission clutch is operated even when the second driving means (DC motor or the like) is constantly rotated. Since the phase can be fixed and the transmission between the transmission clutch and the second drive means can be started from the time when the first switching means changes to the possible state, the transmission from the time when the first switching means becomes possible can be started. The posture of the transmission clutch after a predetermined period can be determined in advance.

As a result, for example, when the first switching means is a special electric accessory that opens and closes the winning opening in the special game, the transmission clutch and the engaging cam are engaged with each other several seconds after the start of the jackpot round. It is possible to specify whether or not the second switching means starts to move by the operation of the engaging cam, and it is possible to easily obtain consistency with the liquid crystal effect.

Further, even if the second driving means continues to operate while maintaining the disabled state, it is possible to prevent the second switching means from continuing to move. Therefore, the second switching means is always operating. It is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player.

In the game machine B6, when the transmission clutch and the second driving means start transmission from the state where the transmission clutch is in the first posture, the first switching means has a predetermined pattern after a lapse of a predetermined period. The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that the second switching means does not change from a stationary state to a non-stationary state if no operation is performed.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of the game machine B6, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the state in which the transmission clutch is in the first posture and the transmission clutch and the second driving means start transmission, the first Since it is determined whether or not the state of the second switching means changes depending on whether or not the switching means operates in a predetermined pattern, for example, the operation mode of the first switching means until the predetermined period elapses is the second switching. By preparing a large number of operation modes that do not affect the change of the state of the means, it is possible to camouflage the operation for a period that affects the change of the state of the second switching means. This makes it difficult for the player to know whether or not this round is a round in which the game ball can be stopped.

In addition, after the lapse of a predetermined period, it is possible to maintain the stationary state by sandwiching an operation different from the operation of the predetermined pattern, and even after the lapse of the predetermined period, the attention of the first switching means is kept improved. Can be done.

In addition, by preparing a plurality of types of round opening / closing patterns for each hit symbol (by making the pattern of the state change of the first switching means different for each hit symbol), which of the state changes of the second switching means can be obtained. It is possible to arbitrarily specify whether to perform at the timing. As a result, unlike the case where the second switching means is operated by performing a constant operation based on the operation of the first driving means by another solenoid, the chance of flowing down to the profit acquisition means is given to any round. Can be provided.

<Point where the state of the stopper changes based on the number of times the V attacker opens and closes>
A winning opening arranged in the game area where the game ball flows down, a first switching means for switching between a possible state in which the game ball can win a prize and an impossible state in which the game ball cannot win, and the first switching means thereof. In a game machine including a first driving means for driving a player and a profit acquisition means for giving a predetermined profit to a player by flowing down a game ball that has won a prize in the winning opening. A stop means that is configured to be able to stop and allows the stopped game ball to flow down to the profit acquisition means, and a stop state in which the game ball that has reached the stop means can be stopped at the stop means. The second switching means is provided with a second switching means for switching between a non-stop state in which the game ball reaching the stopping means is not stopped at the stopping means, and the second switching means is provided by the first switching means only a predetermined reference number of times. The gaming machine C1 is provided with a number transmission means for changing the state of the second switching means between the stopped state and the non-stationed state at least once each time the state changes between the possible state and the impossible state.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a distribution unit (corresponding to the second switching means) is assigned to the second profit state determination unit (corresponding to the stopping means) to which the game ball winning the second major winning opening arrives. There is a gaming machine that distributes a gaming ball to two flow paths having different benefits for a player by operating in the left-right direction (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the first switching means is controlled to perform a specific operation before the state change of the second switching means occurs, for example, it is not necessary to confirm the suggestion in the liquid crystal effect. , The player can grasp whether or not the game ball can be flowed down to the profit acquisition means. Therefore, there is a problem that the player's attention tends to be particularly concentrated around the large winning opening, and the attention to other parts, for example, the liquid crystal screen as the production range is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the state change between the stationary state and the non-stationary state of the second switching means occurs at least once when the first switching means changes the state by a predetermined reference number of times. Since it is configured, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the state of the second switching means by confirming the operation mode of the first switching means.

That is, for example, if the state of the second switching means becomes a stationary state advantageous to the player after the first switching means performs a predetermined operation, the player can perform the operation mode of the first switching means. It is easy to grasp the state of the second switching means because it is sufficient to confirm whether or not the predetermined operation has been performed. However, when the state of the second switching means is changed by the number of state changes of the first switching means, the first Even if the mode of state change (operation mode) of the switching means is exactly the same, the influence on the second switching means is completely different depending on the number of state changes within the reference number of times.

Therefore, it is possible to realize the playability that the second switching means is in a stationary state advantageous to the player without warning. As a result, it is not possible to know when the player will be in an advantageous state, so that the player's attention can be focused on the vicinity of the second switching device, and the player's attention can be focused on the vicinity of the large winning opening (first switching). It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is particularly easy to concentrate on (around the device).

The mode of the number-of-times transmitting means includes a device that operates in response to a change in the state of the first switching means, acts on the second switching means at a predetermined number of times, and changes the state of the second switching means. Examples thereof include a case where the sensor detects the number of state changes of the first switching means and a drive device is provided which acts on the second switching means at a predetermined number of times.

In the game machine C1, the state of the first switching means is continuously changed by the trigger of 1, and the state changes are a short-term state change performed at a length that the game ball cannot win and a game ball. The gaming machine C2 is composed of a combination with a long-term state change performed with a winning length, and is performed at the same number of times as an integral multiple of the predetermined reference number of times.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the first switching means is in a short-term state when the state of the second switching means is in the stationary state while returning the number transmission means to the initial posture for each continuous operation. Either a case of change or a case of long-term state change can be formed by a mode of continuous operation.

Therefore, as a mode of continuous operation of the first switching means, it is possible to prepare a mode in which the profit acquisition means can flow down the game ball and a mode in which the profit acquisition means cannot flow down the game ball. it can.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the first switching means continuously changes its state by the trigger of 1, and the number transmission means is formed from a device that circulates in a manner of returning to the initial position every reference number of times. The gaming machine C3 is provided with a returning means for returning the number-of-times transmitting means to an initial position regardless of the posture of the number-of-times transmitting means.

Here, when the number transmission means returns to the initial position only when the state change of the first switching means is performed by the same number as a multiple of the reference number, the number transmission means is arranged at the initial position after the special game. In order to do so, it is necessary to limit the number of state changes of the first switching means in the special game to an integral multiple of the reference number of times, so that the pattern of state changes of the first switching means is limited. That is, if the number of times of opening per round is set to a plurality of times, the number of state changes of the first switching means until a predetermined number of game balls are won changes, so that the first switching means is possible throughout one round. Only the pattern of state change is allowed.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the return means can return the number of times transmission means to the initial position after the continuous operation of the first switching means, so that the number of times after the special game It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the mode of continuous operation of the first switching means while maintaining the function of returning the transmitting means to the initial position.

For example, in a mode in which the first switching means changes its state a plurality of times during one round, the first switching means can be controlled to continuously change its state. In this case, by inserting a predetermined number of game balls (predetermined count) in one round, it is possible to proceed to the next round. That is, by checking the state of the circulation operation means, thinking about how much the state of the circulation operation means will be changed in each round, and changing the pace of putting the ball into the grand prize opening based on that idea, the circulation operation by itself. You can play while changing the state of the means. As a result, the special game can be advanced so as to adjust the state of the number transmission means so that the second switching means is in the stationary state according to the round in which the long-term state changes, and even during the round digestion, the game ball is simply played. You can play while thinking about the pace at which you should win the game ball, as well as winning the prize.

Further, the posture of the number-of-times transmitting means at the end of the special game may differ from the initial position, but since the posture of the number-of-times transmitting means can be returned to the initial posture by the returning means, the number-of-times transmitting means after the special game ends. It is possible to prevent a malfunction in which a normal game starts with different postures.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, the first driving means generates a load that can be increased by an applied current in one direction, and the number transmission means is such that the first driving means operates in the one direction. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that it comes into contact with the first driving means, the driving force is transmitted, and the displacement is caused by a predetermined amount.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C5, the first driving means operates in one direction in which the displacement of the number transmission means is a direction in which the driving force can be increased by the applied current. At that time, since it is generated by the contact between the first driving means and the number-of-times transmitting means and the driving force is transmitted, the load from the game ball to the second switching means resists the operation of the second switching means. Even if it occurs in the direction, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the second switching means does not move due to insufficient driving force.

In the game machine C4, the second switching means includes a prevention stopper for preventing the number-of-times transmission means from being displaced in the other direction.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, the load given to the second switching means when the second switching means is pressed by the contact between the game ball and the second switching means. However, since it is possible to prevent the number-of-times transmitting means from operating in the other direction by being transmitted to the number-of-times transmitting means, the number of state changes of the first switching means and the state of the second switching means are synchronized. Can be prevented from slipping.

In the game machine C1, the player allows the number-of-times transmitting means not to return to the state before the operation after the operation of the first driving means caused by the trigger of 1, and the player perceives the state of the number-of-times transmitting means. A game machine C6 characterized in being capable of being configured.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, the state of the number transmission means is cumulatively changed during the game, which the player can perceive, so that it is one of the cases when selecting the game machine to be played. As a selection criterion, the state of the number transmission means associated with the special game can be provided.

That is, the number-of-times transmitting means changes the state of the second switching means each time the first switching means changes its state by a predetermined reference number of times, but from the state of the number-of-times transmitting means, what is the first switching means? It is possible to change for each game machine whether or not the reference number of times is reached if the state changes only once, and the player can change the state of the number transmission means to the expected value at which the state of the second switching means changes (for example, in a short period of time). It can be used as a selection criterion when selecting a game machine in anticipation of a change in the state of the second switching means, etc.).

In the game machine C6, the first switching means is a continuously movable means capable of continuous operation by one trigger, and the number of continuous operations of the first switching means changes depending on the type of the operation trigger. , From the initial state of the second switching means, while the second switching means forms the non-stationary state after the continuous operation by the operation trigger of 1, from that state, the continuous operation by one or another operation trigger is further performed. The gaming machine C7, which later forms the stationary state.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, the first switching means performs a predetermined number of continuous operations, the state of the second switching means does not change to the stationary state, and a predetermined profit cannot be obtained. Even in this case, the state of the second switching means changes to the stationary state after the first switching means continuously operates, and the expectation of obtaining a predetermined profit can be increased.

<The state of the stopper does not change while the ball is passing through the passage of the V attacker (unfiled)>
A winning opening arranged in the game area where the game ball flows down, a first switching means for switching between a possible state in which the game ball can win a prize in the winning opening and an impossible state in which the game ball cannot win, and the first switching means thereof. In a game machine provided with a first driving means for generating the driving force of the above and a profit acquisition means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by flowing down the game ball winning the winning opening, the winning opening is won. The stopped game ball is configured to be able to be stopped, and the stopped game ball is configured to be able to flow down to the profit acquisition means, and the game ball that has reached the stopping means can be stopped at the stopping means. A second switching means for switching between a stopped state and a non-stop state in which the game ball is not flown to the profit acquisition means is provided, and the second switching means is a game ball in the elapsed section from the winning opening to the stopping means. D1 is a gaming machine D1 comprising: a change prevention means which acts so as to maintain the staying state when the staying means is arranged.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a distribution unit (corresponding to the second switching means) is assigned to the second profit state determination unit (corresponding to the stopping means) to which the game ball winning the second major winning opening arrives. There is a gaming machine that distributes a gaming ball to two flow paths having different benefits for a player by operating in the left-right direction (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the large winning opening opening / closing accessory that changes the state of the second large winning opening and the distribution unit are controlled to operate at a predetermined operation timing. If the game ball wins a prize just before the closing of the opening / closing accessory, and then the game ball flows down the profit acquisition means, the player is given a profit, but the flow of the game ball is delayed due to an unexpected situation. Before reaching the distribution unit, the distribution unit may change to a non-storage state that is disadvantageous to the player, which may cause dissatisfaction of the player.

On the other hand, if the period until the state change of the second switching means is unnecessarily lengthened, the state change from the stationary state is delayed, so that the discharge of the game ball is delayed, which causes the player to feel distrust. .. Further, while the game ball remains in the stopping means, there is a problem that the player's attention is easily attracted to the stopping means, and the attention of the production of other parts (for example, the liquid crystal screen) is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, only when the game ball is arranged in the elapsed section from the winning opening to the stopping means, the stopping means maintains the stopped state by the change prevention means, so that the game ball is maintained in the elapsed section. Even if the flow of the liquid crystal is stagnant, it is possible to prevent the stopping means from being in a non-stopping state before the game ball reaches the stopping means, and it is possible to eliminate the dissatisfaction of the player and unnecessary. Since the change of state of the stopping means is not delayed until time, it is possible to secure the attention of the effect of the part other than the stopping means (for example, the liquid crystal screen).

In the game machine D1, the stopping means is configured to perform a predetermined operation by storing a predetermined number of game balls, and the game balls can be sent to the profit acquisition means by the predetermined operation. When the game balls arranged in the elapsed section reach the stop means and a predetermined number of game balls are stored in the stop means, until the predetermined operation of the stop means is completed. A game machine D2 characterized in that the stopping means is maintained in a stopped state.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the stopping means is maintained in the stopped state until the predetermined operation of the stopping means is completed, so that the game ball is discharged from the elapsed section to the stopping means. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball is discharged without flowing down to the profit acquisition means due to a non-stop state after the operation of the stopping means is completed.

In addition, when the game balls arranged in the elapsed section reach the stop means, if the number of game balls is less than the predetermined number, the player is immediately put into a non-stop state to attract the player's attention from the vicinity of the stop means. By deflecting it, the attention of other parts of the game board (for example, the liquid crystal display part) can be improved.

In the game machine D2, the second switching means can switch the state by a game ball flowing down the first flow path, and the change prevention means can determine whether or not the game ball can enter the first flow path. A game machine D3 characterized in that it is configured in a mode of switching between.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the state of the second switching means is switched by the game ball flowing down the first flow path, so that the state of the second switching means is changed. The device that causes the above can be replaced by a flow path, and the arrangement space can be reduced. In addition, by switching whether or not the game ball can enter the first flow path by the change prevention means, the game ball flowing down the game area by a random route invades the first flow path at an inappropriate period, which is erroneous. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the second switching means from being changed.

In the game machine D3, the first flow path is connected to a variable winning opening capable of generating a special symbol variation by winning a prize in the game machine D4.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D3, the game ball winning the variable winning opening flows down the first flow path, so that the special game state ends and the next special game state starts. In the meantime, the game ball remaining in the stopping means can be discharged downstream of the stopping means.

That is, when the special game state ends with less than a predetermined number of game balls staying in the stopping means, it is necessary to win the game balls in the variable winning opening in order to shift the game state to the next special game state. Yes, the winning game ball flows down the first flow path and switches the state of the second switching means. Therefore, the game ball remaining in the stop means can be discharged downstream of the stop means by the game for shifting the game state to the next special game state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special game state from starting with the game ball remaining in the stopping means.

In the game machine D2, the second switching means operates based on the operation of the first driving means, and the change preventing means is displaced by the action of the game ball, and the first driving means is said to be the same. A game machine D5 characterized by releasing power transmission to the second switching means.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the driving force of the first driving means is transmitted to the second switching means after the game ball has passed through the elapsed section, and the control mode of the first driving means is changed. Since the state of the second switching means changes based on this, it is possible to easily control the state change of the second switching means after the game ball has passed the elapsed section.

In the game machine D2, the second switching means operates based on the operation of the first driving means, and the change preventing means is displaced by the action of the game ball and is on the opposite side of the profit acquisition means. The game machine D6 is provided with an overhanging plate portion for preventing the game ball flowing down to the vehicle from falling off from the stopping means.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, when the game ball is arranged in the elapsed section by the overhanging plate portion, the game ball flowing down to the opposite side of the profit acquisition means is from the stopping means. It is possible to prevent it from falling off. As a result, even after the state of the second switching means is changed, the game ball can be maintained on the stopping means by the overhanging plate portion.

A game machine Z1 in any one of the game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B7, C1 to C7, and D1 to D6, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B7, C1 to C7, and D1 to D6, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B7, C1 to C7, and D1 to D6, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board 65 1st variable winning device 67 Through gate 640a Electric accessory 640 2nd ball opening 650 2nd variable winning device (1st switching means, continuously movable means)
650a Second specified winning opening (winning opening, part of continuously movable means)
650b Open / close plate (part of the first switching means, part of the continuously movable means)
650c solenoid (first drive means, part of return means, part of continuously movable means)
1010 Ball stop device (1st special means, 2nd special means)
1013 L rotary gear (part of the first special means, part of the second special means)
1014 Reversing gear (part of the first special means, part of the second special means)
1015 Flow prevention plate (second switching means)
1016 Transmission rod (part of the first special means, part of the second special means)
1031 Probability change entrance (profit acquisition means)
1040 Tilt member (stopping means)
2010 ball stop device (first special means, second special means)
2012 annular groove (part of the first special means, part of the second special means)
3010 Ball stop device (second special means, delay drive means)
3011a Elastic spring (part of delay drive means, return means)
3012 Drive motor (part of second special means, part of delay drive means)
3013 Switching clutch (part of the second special means, part of the delay drive means)
3014 Rotating disk (part of second special means, part of delay drive means, displacement means)
3016 Switching member (part of the second special means, part of the delay drive means)
4010 Ball stop device (second special means, delay drive means)
4012 Drive motor (part of second special means, part of delay drive means, second drive means)
4013 Friction rotation member (part of second special means, part of delay drive means, transmission clutch)
4014 Rotating disk (part of second special means, part of delay drive means, displacement means, engagement cam)
5100 Ball stop device (number transmission means)
5120 Rotating member (part of number transmission means)
5125 Detection pin (part of return means)
5130 Biasing part (part of the number transmission means, prevention stopper)
5140 Switching device (part of the number transmission means)
5144 Position sensor (part of return means)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine of the pachinko machine or the like, at a predetermined position of a game ball that winning can reach entrance prize slot, there is YU skill machine Ru is operating the operation section (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-155538

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the operation mode of the operation unit .

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a good operation mode of an operating unit .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a winning opening arranged in a gaming area where the gaming ball flows down, a state in which the gaming ball can be won in the winning opening, and a state in which the game ball cannot be won. a first switching means for switching the operation bets, the first drive means for driving the first switching means, profit acquiring means game ball that winning the prize hole gives a predetermined benefit to Yu technique who by flowing down When, a gaming machine having a, is stationary configured to enable a game ball that is finished in the winning hole, and its retention was falling configured to be capable of stopping means game balls to the benefit acquiring means, to the retention means A second switching means for switching between a stopped state in which the reached game ball can be stopped at the stopping means and a non-stop state in which the game ball reaching the stopping means is not stopped at the stopping means, and the first It has a second driving means different from the driving means, and can transmit the driving force of the second driving means to the second switching means in the impossible state of the first switching means, and drives the second driving means. The state of the second switching means is changed between the stationary state and the non-stationary state by force, and a predetermined period elapses before the second switching means switches from the stationary state to the non-stationary state. and a predetermined driving means to be said a state for transmitting the driving force of the second driving means in response to the driving of the first driving means, the state and the switching not to transmit the driving force of the second driving means The second switching means includes a displacement means that is enabled and displaced, and a returning means that gives a load that returns the second switching means to a predetermined position in a state where the driving force of the second driving means is not transmitted. When the displacement means is arranged at the first position, the displacement means is arranged at the predetermined position and becomes the stationary state, and the displacement means is displaced from the first position to displace toward the arrangement in the non-stationary state. When the displacement means is displaced for the predetermined period, the non-stop state is set, and the stop means collides with a game ball stopped at the stop means when another game ball collides with the game ball. It is provided with an arrangement means which is arranged on the side where the stationary game ball can move .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the operation mode of the second switching means can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a partial front view of the portion of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board on the upstream side of the storage device. It is a partial front view of the portion of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board on the downstream side of the second entrance. (A) and (b) are front views of the first variable winning device, the second variable winning device, and the storage device. (A) is a front perspective view of the storage device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the storage device. (A) is a front view of the storage device, and (b) is a top view of the storage device. (A) is a rear view of the storage device, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device in line Xb-Xb of FIG. 9 (a). (A) is a partial side view of the storage device in the direction of arrow XIa of FIG. 10 (a), and (b) is a partial side view of the storage device in the direction of arrow XIb of FIG. 10 (a). (A) and (b) are partial front views of the second variable winning apparatus. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the storage device. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the storage device. (A) and (b) are partial front perspective views of the first variable winning apparatus. (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the second specific winning opening in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and (b) shows the time change of the second specific winning opening in the 12th round of the jackpot B. It is a figure shown. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a front view of the annular groove in the second embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the annular groove in the line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. 18 (a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the annular groove in the XVIIIc-XVIIIc line of a). (A) to (d) are side views schematically showing the ball stop device. (A) to (d) are side views schematically showing the ball stop device. (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the second specific winning opening in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and (b) shows the time change of the second specific winning opening in the 12th round of the jackpot B. It is a figure shown. (A) and (b) are rear perspective views of the storage device according to the third embodiment. (A) is a front view of the storage device, and (b) is a top view of the storage device. It is a rear view of a storage device. (A) is a rear view of the ball stop device, and (b) is a side view of the ball stop device in the direction of arrow XXVb of FIG. 25 (a). (A) is a rear view of the ball stop device, and (b) is a side view of the ball stop device in the direction of arrow XXVIb of FIG. 26 (a). (A) is a rear view of the ball stop device, and (b) is a side view of the ball stop device in the direction of arrow XXVIIb of FIG. 27 (a). (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the second specific winning opening in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and (b) shows the time change of the second specific winning opening in the 12th round of the jackpot B. It is a figure shown. It is a rear perspective view of the storage device in 4th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a ball stop device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a ball stop device. (A) and (b) are the rear view of the ball stop device. (A) to (c) are schematic views of a drive motor, a friction rotating member, a rotating disk, and a flow prevention plate in the direction of arrow XXXIIIa in FIG. 32 (a). (A) to (c) are schematic views of a drive motor, a friction rotating member, a rotating disk, and a flow prevention plate in the direction of arrow XXXIIIa in FIG. 32 (a). (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the second specific winning opening in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and (b) shows the time change of the second specific winning opening in the 12th round of the jackpot B. It is a figure shown. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the 2nd specific winning opening in the 12th round of jackpot B (the 2). (A) is a front view of the storage device according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a top view of the storage device in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a). (A) is a front view of the rotating member, (b) is a top view of the rotating member in the direction of arrow XXXVIIIb of FIG. 38 (a), and (c) is a top view of the rotating member of FIG. 38 (a). It is a partial cross-sectional view of the rotating member in line XXXVIIIc. (A) is a front view of the storage device, and (b) is a top view of the storage device in the direction of arrow XXXIXb of FIG. 39 (a). (A) is a diagram showing the time change of the second specific winning opening in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and (b) shows the time change of the second specific winning opening in the 12th round of the jackpot B. It is a figure shown. (A) is a diagram showing the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening in the 12th round of the jackpot A (No. 2), and (b) and ( c) is a diagram showing the time-dependent change (whether it is in a protruding state or a buried state) of the flow-down prevention plate. (A) is a front view of the storage device according to the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the storage device in the direction of arrow XLIIb of FIG. 42 (a). It is a rear view of the storage device 6000. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device in the XLIV-XLIV line of FIG. 42 (a). (A) is a front view of the storage device, and (b) is a side view of the storage device in the direction of arrow XLVb of FIG. 45 (a). (A) is a front view of the storage device, and (b) is a side view of the storage device in the direction of arrow XLVIb of FIG. 46 (a). (A) is a front view of the storage device according to the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device in the XLVIIb-XLVIIb line of FIG. 47 (a). (A) is a front view of the storage device, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device in line XLVIIIb-XLVIIIb of FIG. 48 (a). (A) is a front view of the storage device, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device in the XLIXb-XLIXb line of FIG. 49 (a). (A) is a front view of the storage device according to the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a partial side view of the storage device in the direction of arrow Lb of FIG. 50 (a). (A) is a front view of the storage device, and (b) is a partial side view of the storage device in the direction of arrow LIb of FIG. 51 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the storage device according to the ninth embodiment, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device in the LIIb-LIIB line of FIG. 52 (a), and (c) is a storage device. It is a partial front view of the apparatus, (d) is a partial sectional view of the storage apparatus in the LIId-LIID line of FIG. 52 (c). (A) is a partial front view of the storage device, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device in line LIIIb-LIIIb of FIG. 53 (a), and (c) is a partial front view of the storage device. (D) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device on the LIIId-LIIId line of FIG. 53 (c).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 17, one embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 as a first embodiment will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a game ball) flowing down in front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in the front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. Port 63, 1st ball entrance 64, 2nd ball opening 640, 1st variable winning device 65, 2nd variable winning device 650, normal ball opening (through gate) 67, variable display device unit 80, storage device 1000 Etc. are assembled together, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the variable display device unit 80, and the storage device 1000 are base plates 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the through hole formed in the above, and is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) formed in front of the game board 13 by being partitioned by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn by taking the opportunity of winning a prize in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and the ball normally enters the ball 67. When it passes, a lottery of ordinary symbols (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery of special symbols performed for the balls entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. In the pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also referred to as the probability variation state of the special symbol). For example, it is determined as a jackpot of a special symbol with a probability of 1/60. For convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed for the entry into the first entrance 64 is referred to as the "lottery of the special symbol 1", and the lottery is performed for the entry into the second entry 640. The lottery of the special symbol is called "lottery of special symbol 2".

When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, which are normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse). Alternatively, the opening operation is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) (until 10 balls are won). More specifically, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won), and 12 In the round, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

In addition, inside the storage device 1000 arranged downstream of the second variable winning device 650, there are two types of ball entrances (probability change) for determining the added value after the end of the jackpot given after the end of the special game state. The ball entry port 1031 and the normal ball entry port 1033) are provided. Although the details will be described later, when a ball enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031 in the special game state, a “high probability state of a special symbol” is given as an added value after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, if the ball never enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031 during the special game state, the "normal symbol time saving state" is given as an added value after the jackpot ends. There are two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B" (see FIG. 17). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a is configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the ease of entering the ball into the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031 is different.

When the lottery of the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and the lottery result is obtained after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed. The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry times is for each type of entry opening. Each is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1) or the number of reserved balls for the second entry port 640 (special). If the number of reserved balls of symbol 2) remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed, and the variable display according to the lottery is started. If both the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

In the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol), whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is determined. When the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entry port 640. It will be easy. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second entry port 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is held by the first symbol display device 37. Along with being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. To be started.

In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds is 15 rounds in a special gaming state (15R big hit). Further, in the special game state, when the ball enters the probability variation entrance 1031 (see FIG. 2), as an added value after the end of the big hit, the pachinko machine 10 from the end of the big hit to the next big hit. Shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol). On the other hand, if the ball never enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031 in the special game state, as an added value after the jackpot ends, from the end of the jackpot until the end of the special symbol lottery 100 times. During that time, it shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol. In addition, when shifting to the time saving state of the normal symbol after the end of the big hit, it also shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol. This low-probability state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit. Although the details will be described later, in the "big hit B", the ball is more likely to enter the probability variation entrance 1031 during the special game state (during the big hit state) than in the "big hit A". That is, since the "big hit B" is more likely to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit, it is more likely to be the big hit again at short intervals after the end of the big hit. Therefore, the "big hit B" is a more advantageous jackpot for the player than the "big hit A".

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, to the special gaming state. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift. The high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) in the present embodiment includes the state of the game in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640. .. On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the probability of the special symbol is not changing, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of the jackpot is lower than that during the probability change of the special symbol.

In addition, the time saving state of the normal symbol (during the time saving) means a state of the game in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased and the ball is easily won in the second entrance 640. Further, the normal state refers to a state of the game in which neither the probability of the special symbol is changed nor the time is shortened of the normal symbol (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) are not increased).

During the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, not only the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state A longer time is set compared to. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640. That is, a lottery for special symbols is likely to be performed.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol. , The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened when the normal symbol is hit may be increased as compared with the normal state. In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) does not change during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed. Further, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed, and the normal symbol (normal symbol) Only the hit probability of the second symbol) may be configured to be increased as compared with the normal state.

In the present embodiment, when the probabilistic state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special game state, the probabilistic state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may limit the number of times. Specifically, for example, the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given from the end of the special game state to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 120 times, and after the lottery of the special symbol is completed 120 times. May be configured to be set to the normal state. Further, the number of times that the special symbol is in the probable change state is not limited to 120 times, and may be arbitrarily determined. Similarly, in the present embodiment, when the ball does not enter the probability variation entry ball opening 1031 in the special game state, the time saving state of the normal symbol is set until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times. However, the time saving period of a normal symbol is not limited to 100 times, and may be arbitrarily determined.

A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by the lighting state whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with the entry (starting winning) into the first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 640 is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or a ball entered in the first entrance 64. Of these, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry is made. The number of balls is held up to 4 times for each type of entry slot, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of times of holding is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, it corresponds to the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 to display the third symbol. The third symbol display device 81, which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and the second symbol, which is triggered by the passage of a ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67, is variablely displayed. A second symbol display device 83 composed of the LED is provided. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display device 37 displays the first symbol. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the device 37. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols having numbers from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned. It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, in the case of "big hit B", one of all the numbers "0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9" including odd numbers is added. A variable display is performed in which the symbols are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned.

Next, a display (right-handed navigation) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 that prompts the player to launch the ball aiming at the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 will be described.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special symbol is in a probabilistic state or the normal symbol is in a time-saving state, the electric accessory 640a is easily released, so that the ball is moved to the right side of the game board 13. By launching (striking to the right), it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second entry port 640. Further, as will be described in detail later, if a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the first entrance 64 It is more likely to be a "big hit B" than when a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 1) performed based on the ball entering the ball. Therefore, in the probabilistic state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot and the time saving state of the normal symbol, right-handed hitting is advantageous for the player. In other words, even if the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state or the normal symbol is set to the time saving state, the ball cannot be entered into the second entrance 640 unless the player hits right. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the probability change state of the symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, by displaying a specific image (right-handed navigation), the player can perform the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol. It is structured so that the benefits of becoming can be surely obtained.

In the right-handed navigation system, the character "Aim to the right !!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three right-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the character. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the player obtains the benefits of being in the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. This warning image is determined to be performing a right-handed hit even though the player is not in a period in which the ball should be hit (right-handed) into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. This is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this case. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is hitting right in the normal state (neither the probabilistic state of the special symbol nor the time saving state of the normal symbol).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to be difficult to open in a normal state (even if a right-handed hit is made, it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640). For this reason, when a right-handed hit is made in a normal state, the chance of receiving a special symbol lottery is reduced as compared with a case where a ball is hit at the first entrance 64 by a left-handed hit. That is, if a right-handed hit is made in a normal state, it is difficult to make a big hit, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image and prompting left-handed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing money.

When it is determined that the player is hitting right in the normal state, the characters "warning" and "play left-handed !!" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Characters and are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that he should not hit right (should hit left). In addition, by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning screen, the clerk in the hall can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method of performing right-handed in a normal state.

As a method of determining whether or not a player is hitting right, for example, a ball enters the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) where the ball can flow in when hitting right. Judge by whether or not the ball is hit.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state, a right-handed warning image is displayed. It is not limited to this. For example, when it is detected that a ball has won (winned) into the second specific winning opening 650a in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), it is determined that an illegal game is being performed, and the right It may be configured to display a hit warning image. As a result, the clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning image. In addition, when it is detected that a ball has entered the second specific winning opening 650a in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), a signal indicating that fraud is being performed is sent to the hall computer. It may be configured to output. As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where fraudulent activity is being performed.

Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 1000 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the storage device 1000 is, for example, a case where a ball entering the probability variation entry port 1031 or the normal entry opening 1033 is detected even though the storage device 1000 is not in the special gaming state (big hit state).

When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 1000, the character "warning" is displayed in large size in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. At the bottom, the words "Call a gate error clerk" are displayed. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, so that the clerk in the hall or the like can promptly request repairs or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 includes a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. Is to be displayed in a variable manner by alternately lighting the above for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time (variation time) required for the variation display of the second symbol is set so that the game state is shorter during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol than during the normal state. As a result, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) can be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, since the chances of hitting the normal symbol increase, it is possible to give the player many chances that the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second entrance 640.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability is increased, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a are increased, and the like, the second entrance 640 is reached by other methods. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than in the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the game state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for one hit of the normal symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal entry port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, the balls that flow down to the right side of the game board. A part of is configured to be passable. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is held up to a total of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and on the second symbol holding lamp 84. Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of a ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of assembled normal ball entrances (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main cause is that the first entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front entrance 64 of the first entrance 64, a second entrance 640 in which the ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and this is mainly due to the on of the second entrance switch. A big hit lottery is made by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37.

In addition, each of the first entry opening 64 and the second entry opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entrance 640 are different, for example, the first entry. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the ball opening 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second ball opening 640 may be set to five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the electric combination The object 640a is in the open state (expanded state), and the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that in the normal state, and the time required for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is short, so that the fluctuation of the normal symbol is short. The "○" symbol is easily displayed on the display. Therefore, the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Further, during the probabilistic change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is longer than that in the normal state. Therefore, during the probabilistic change of the special symbol and during the time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second entry port 640 than in the normal state. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have an electric accessory as provided in the second ball entry port 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first entry port 64 and when the ball wins in the second entry opening 640. is there. However, as a type of jackpot that is selected when a jackpot is hit, the probability of becoming a jackpot (big hit B) that makes it easy for the ball to enter the probability variation entry ball opening 1031 during the special game state is the second entry slot 640. The case where the ball wins the ball is set higher than the case where the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (see FIG. 17).

During normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entry port 640. Therefore, go to the first entry port 64 without an electric accessory. A ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning a prize in the first entrance 64, a lot of chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming.

On the other hand, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the normal entry port (through gate) 67. Since it is easy to win a prize in the second entrance 640, a ball is fired toward the second entrance 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"). ), It is better for the player to aim to become a big hit B by passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 to open the electric accessory 640a and winning the second entrance 640. It will be advantageous.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64 (lower left side of the second ball opening 640), and a horizontally long rectangular first specific winning opening is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. (Large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, if a big hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery performed due to winning a prize in the first ball slot 64 or the second ball slot 640, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a jackpot stop symbol. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is notified. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the first specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The first specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 14 times (14 rounds), for example. More specifically, the opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a is executed in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds in the special gaming state. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 is in a closed state that covers the first specific winning opening 65a and prevents the ball from entering the first variable winning device 65 by protruding toward the front side of the front view. An opening / closing plate 65b forming the above and a solenoid (not shown) for operating the opening / closing plate 65b are provided. The first specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the solenoid is driven to pull the opening / closing plate 65b to the back side of the front view to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the first specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normally closed state are temporarily formed. It operates so as to alternate between states.

A second variable winning device 650 is provided on the upper right side of the first variable winning device 65. Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 includes an opening / closing plate 650b that forms a closed state that prevents the ball from entering the second variable winning device 650 by protruding toward the front side of the front view, and an opening / closing plate thereof. It is equipped with a solenoid 650c (see FIG. 8) that operates the plate 650b. The second specific winning opening 650a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win (see FIG. 7B). On the other hand, a big hit was made by a lottery of special symbols, and in the 12th round, the opening / closing plate 650b covering the second specific winning opening 650a was pulled toward the back side of the front view, and the ball could be opened into the second variable winning device 650. The state is formed in a predetermined pattern (see FIG. 16) (see FIG. 7A).

As described above, based on the fact that the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a in the special gaming state (during the jackpot) enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031 provided inside the storage device 1000, the jackpot is hit. After the end, it shifts to the probable state of the special symbol. On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the special game state, or even if the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, all the balls enter the normal entry opening 1033. If this happens, the game will shift to the normal symbol time reduction state after the jackpot ends.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. In addition to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, other winning openings may be provided as the winning openings opened in the special gaming state. On the contrary, the winning opening may be only the first specific winning opening 65a. Further, the arrangement position is not limited to the arrangement of the present embodiment, and may be arranged at any position.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 66 below the first ball entry port 64. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the entry ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 66. To. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To do.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the first specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor for driving a movable accessory that operates during the game.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6, a route when the player ejects the ball to the right side of the game board 13 (when the ball is hit to the right) will be described. First, FIG. 5 is a partial front view of a portion of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 on the upstream side of the storage device 1000. As shown in FIG. 5, the flow path (path) on the right side of the game board 13 is provided with a normal ball entry port 67 above the flow path.

As described above, when the ball passes through the normal entry port 67, a lottery for the normal symbol is executed. Then, when the normal symbol is hit, the second symbol display device 83 displays the “◯” symbol indicating the hit of the normal symbol after the variable effect for showing the lottery result of the normal symbol is executed. Then, based on the fact that the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 provided downstream of the normal entry port 67 It is released for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds x 1 time or 1 second x 2 times).

While the electric accessory 640 is open, the right-handed ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes shorter, and the opening period of the electric accessory becomes longer. 2 It becomes easy for the ball to enter the ball entry port 640. Therefore, by executing right-handed hitting, it is possible to receive a lottery of special symbols without reducing the number of balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a portion of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 on the downstream side of the second entrance 640 will be described. FIG. 6 is a partial front view of a portion of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 on the downstream side of the second entrance 640. As shown in FIG. 6, a second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, and a second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the second variable winning device 650. A first variable winning device 65 is provided.

That is, when the player hits the ball to the right, the ball that has flowed down to the downstream of the path (flow path) on the right side has flowed down to the downstream without flowing into (entering) the second entry port 640. The ball flows down in the direction of the second variable winning device 650. The ball that flows down in the direction of the second variable winning device 650 and enters the second specific winning opening 650a is guided to the inside of the storage device 1000 through the guide flow path 1020. Further, the ball that flows down in the direction of the second variable winning device 650 and does not enter the second specific winning opening 650a flows down in the direction of the first variable winning device 65. Then, the ball that has flowed down to the first variable winning device 65 and has not entered the first specific winning opening 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 66 (see FIG. 2). Will be done.

In this way, the ball can flow down in the direction of the storage device 1000, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 simply by the player hitting the right side. Therefore, in the special gaming state (big hit state), the player can put the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a simply by hitting the right, and a large amount of balls can be inserted. You can win a prize ball.

In addition, a part of the balls launched aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a enters the storage device 1000. Then, as will be described in detail later, in the special gaming state (big hit state), the tilting member 1040 can be tilted by the plurality of balls entering the storage device 1000 (from the initial state to the tilted state). This allows the ball to flow down to the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031. Since the game machine 13 in the present embodiment is set to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot based on entering the ball into the probable change ball opening 1031, the player is asked. It is possible to make the game more enjoyable to be a big hit, and to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, the operations of the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the storage device 1000 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. 7 (a) and 7 (b) are front views of the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the storage device 1000. Note that FIG. 7A shows a closed state of the first variable winning device 65, an open state of the second variable winning device 650, and a protruding state of the flow prevention plate 1015. FIG. 7B shows the first state. The open state of the variable winning device 65, the closed state of the second variable winning device 650, and the buried state of the flow prevention plate 1015 are shown.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is buried inside the game board 13 by the opening / closing plate 650b sliding toward the back side of the front view. , The second specific winning opening 650a can be opened. By opening the second specific winning opening 650a, a game ball flowing down a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 can enter the second specific winning opening 650a. As described above, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won) in the 12th round of the special gaming state (big hit state). .. Then, when a ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, 15 prize balls are paid out for each ball entered. Therefore, the player can win a large number of prize balls.

The ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a is guided to the inside of the storage device 1000 via the guide flow path 1020. Then, the sphere reaches the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 and flows down according to the inclination created by the upper surface of the tilting member 1040. In the initial state of the tilting member 1040 shown in FIG. 7A, the ball that has reached the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 flows down to the lower left side where the flow prevention plate 1015 is arranged. Therefore, as long as the flow prevention plate 1015 maintains the protruding state, the ball stays on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 moves into the inside of the game board 13 by the opening / closing plate 65b sliding toward the back side of the front view. It is configured so that it can be buried. As a result, the upper part of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, and the game ball flowing down the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 can be entered. As described above, in the first specific winning opening 65a, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds of the special gaming state (big hit state), a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or the ball is It will be open (until 10 prizes are won). Then, when a ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a, 15 prize balls are paid out for each ball entered. Therefore, the player can win a large number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 7B, the flow prevention plate 1015 changes to the buried state in conjunction with the closing state of the second specific winning device 650. Therefore, if the tilting member 1040 maintains the initial state when the second specific winning device 650 is closed, the ball anchored on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 flows down to the lower left side and normally enters. It is discharged to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the ball mouth 1033.

Next, an outline of the configuration of the storage device 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10. FIG. 8A is a front perspective view of the storage device 1000, and FIG. 8B is a rear perspective view of the storage device 1000. 9 (a) is a front view of the storage device 1000, FIG. 9 (b) is a top view of the storage device 1000, and FIG. 10 (a) is a rear view of the storage device 1000. 10 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device 1000 in the Xb-Xb line of FIG. 9 (a).

It should be noted that in FIGS. 8 to 10, the base plate 60 is partially broken and shown. Further, in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the back side of the base plate 60 is visible, and the side wall on the front side of the branch flow path 1030 arranged on the downstream side of the guidance flow path 1020 is transparent. Will be done.

As shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b), the storage device 1000 has a plate-shaped main body plate portion 1001 fastened and fixed to the base plate 60, and a sphere fixed to the back surface of the main body plate portion 1001. The ball that has flowed down on the front side of the main body plate portion 1001 and the stop device 1010 and has entered the second specific winning opening 650a is made to flow down to the back side of the main body plate portion 1001 and then directed toward the front side of the main body plate portion 1001 again. A guide flow path 1020, which is a flow path formed in a manner of flowing down, and a bifurcated branch flow path 1030, which is a flow path to which a ball discharged from the guide flow path 1020 reaches and branches the ball to the left and right. It is mainly provided with a tilting member 1040 that is rotatably supported by the base plate 60 inside the branch flow path 1030 and is arranged below the discharge port of the induction flow path 1020.

The ball stop device 1010 switches between preventing the ball from flowing down on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 in the protruding state of the flow-down prevention plate 1015, or making the flow-down prevention plate 1015 buried and letting the ball flow down downstream. It is a device to perform. The details will be described later.

The guide flow path 1020 has a ball receiving recess 1021 which is a U-shaped recess in front view for receiving a ball entering the second specific winning opening 650a, and a main body plate portion 1001 from the ball receiving recess 1021 toward the rear side. A passage port 1022 formed through the passage port 1022, an inclined flow path 1023 formed to be inclined to the lower left in the front view on the rear side of the passing port 1022, and a main body plate portion on the left side of the inclined flow path 1023 toward the front side. It mainly includes a discharge port 1024 formed through 1001 (see FIG. 10B).

The ball receiving recess 1021 is formed in such a manner that the bottom portion is inclined downward toward the rear side. As a result, the ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a can be smoothly flowed down toward the passing opening 1022.

The passage port 1022 is one of the detection ports for detecting the passage of the ball, and when the ball passes, the winning of the ball to the second variable winning device 650 is detected and the prize ball is paid out.

The inclined flow path 1023 is a flow path extending downward to the left, and is formed so that the bottom portion is gently inclined downward toward the front side (the inclination in the front-rear direction is gently formed as compared with the inclination in the left-right direction). The left end portion is provided with an inclined surface portion 1023a. The inclined surface portion 1023a is formed as an inclined surface that inclines toward the left toward the front side.

Due to such a configuration, the sphere that has passed through the passage port 1022 rarely flows down to the front side in the middle of the inclined flow path 1023, and most of them collide with the inclined surface portion 1023a after flowing down to the lower left in the front view. By doing so, the direction is changed to the front side, and the water flows down from the discharge port 1024 in a downward manner. As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball is easily discharged from the left end of the discharge port 1024.

The discharge port 1024 is a through hole for discharging the ball flowing down the inclined flow path 1023 to the front side. In the present embodiment, a plurality of spheres (up to 3) can be ejected side by side in a left-right width. As a result, for example, the discharge mode of the sphere can be different depending on whether the sphere flows down one inclined flow path 1023 or the sphere flows down a plurality of inclined flow paths 1023 together. It is possible to prevent the player who visually recognizes the storage device 1000 from getting bored due to the same flow mode each time, and it is possible to entertain the player.

The branch flow path 1030 is a flow path partitioned by a plate extending on the front side of the main body plate portion 1001, and is a bifurcated flow path through which balls discharged from the discharge port 1024 can flow down, as described above. The probabilistic entry port 1031, the probabilistic side flow path 1032 that guides the ball to the probabilistic entry port 1031 and is formed on the right side of the tilting member 1040, and the above-mentioned normal entry port 1033. A normal side flow path 1034, which is a flow path for guiding the ball to the normal entry port 1033 and is formed on the left side of the tilting member 1040 in the front view, is mainly provided.

The tilting member 1040 is a rod-shaped portion that protrudes from the front surface of the main body plate portion 1001 toward the front side of the rectangular weight portion 1041 having a rectangular shape in front view, and eccentricizes the rectangular weight portion 1041 (eccentric to the right side). It mainly includes a shaft rod portion 1042 that supports the shaft, and a plate-shaped extension plate portion 1043 that extends toward the right side in the front view so that the upper surface is in a surface position with the upper surface of the rectangular weight portion 1041.

The tilting member 1040 is tilted toward its own center of gravity position side (the side where the rectangular weight portion 1041 is located (left side when viewed from the front)) when the ball is not on the upper surface (initial state, see FIG. 9A). Become. In this initial state, the ball landing on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 flows down to the left and flows down toward the normal side flow path 1034.

On the other hand, as will be described later in FIG. 14, when a plurality of balls (three or more in the present embodiment) are anchored on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040, the position of the center of gravity (extended plate) in which the tilting member 1040 and the balls are combined. The extension plate portion 1043 is tilted (tilted state) according to the side where the portion 1043 is located (right side when viewed from the front). In this tilted state, the ball landing on the upper surface of the tilted member 1040 flows down to the right and flows down toward the probabilistic change side flow path 1032. In this way, the tilting member 1040 changes its state depending on the relationship with the sphere that has landed on the upper surface, and acts as a member that assists the branching of the sphere.

Next, the operation of the ball stop device 1010 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10 as appropriate. 11 (a) is a partial side view of the storage device 1000 in the direction of arrow XIa of FIG. 10 (a), and FIG. 11 (b) is a view of the storage device 1000 in the direction of arrow XIb of FIG. 10 (a). It is a partial side view.

As shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, the ball stopper 1010 includes a base plate portion 1011 extending in a plate shape from the body holding plate portion 1001 toward the back surface side, and the base plate portion thereof. An annular groove 1012 formed as a groove in 1011 and an L rotary gear 1013 rotatably supported by the base plate portion 1011 inside the ring of the annular groove 1012, and the L rotary gear are meshed with the base plate. A reversing gear 1014 that is rotatably supported by the portion 1011 and a flow prevention plate 1015 that is connected to the reversing gear 1014 and is formed so as to project to the front side of the main body plate portion 1001 based on the rotation of the reversing gear 1014. A transmission rod 1016, which is a small-diameter metal rod fixed to the opening / closing plate 650b of the second variable winning device 650 and whose tip is pressed against the annular groove 1012, is mainly provided.

The annular groove 1012 is a groove formed along an elliptical shape that is long in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 11A), and a step is formed between the bottom portions of the upper groove 1012a and the lower groove 1012b. It is a groove that limits the traveling direction of the transmission rod 1016 that moves in contact with the bottom portion in one direction.

That is, at the rear end of the annular groove 1012 (left end in FIG. 11A), the lower groove 1012b has a groove depth (length in the depth direction of the paper surface in FIG. 11A) as compared with the upper groove 1012a. The upper groove 1012a and the lower groove 1012b change in the opposite inclination directions at the intermediate position in the front-rear direction, and the upper groove at the front end portion (right end portion in FIG. 11A) of the annular groove 1012. The groove depth (the length in the depth direction of the paper surface in FIG. 11 (a)) is larger in the 1012a than in the lower groove 1012b. With this configuration, the movement path of the transmission rod 1016 can be limited to one direction (counterclockwise direction) in FIG. 11A. Therefore, the transmission rod 1016 can be operated in one direction based on the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 650b.

The L rotary gear 1013 has a mode in which a rotary shaft is inserted through the base plate portion 1011 and is rotatably supported by the base plate portion 1011 and is fixed to the rotary shaft of the gear 1013a to form a gear 1013a. It mainly includes a cross member 1013b that rotates at the same angle.

The cross member 1013b is arranged to face the side surface of the base plate portion 1011 on which the annular groove 1012 is formed, and the gear 1013a is arranged on the opposite side of the base plate portion 1011 from the cross member 1013b.

As shown in FIG. 11A, the cross member 1013b is extended to a position where it interferes with the annular groove 1012 at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 11A) of the annular groove 1012. Therefore, a portion where the transmission rod 1016 pushes the cross member 1013b and interferes with the annular groove 1012 based on the transmission rod 1016 moving the upper groove 1012a to the left and the lower groove 1012b to the right. (A portion whose longitudinal direction is directed up and down) rotates 90 degrees at a time in a posture in which the longitudinal direction is oriented in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 11A).

That is, when the transmission rod 1016 moves around the annular groove 1012 halfway, the cross member 1013b rotates 90 degrees, and when the transmission rod 1016 moves around the annular groove 1012, the cross member 1013b rotates 180 degrees.

The reversing gear 1014 includes a gear 1014a meshed with the gear 1013a of the L rotary gear 1013, a disc-shaped disc portion 1014b integrally formed on one side of the gear 1014a in the axial direction, and the disc portion 1014b. It mainly includes a projecting pin 1014c that is eccentrically projected from the center.

The gear 1014a is formed in such a manner that the gear ratio is doubled with respect to the gear 1013a. That is, the gear 1014a is designed as a gear that rotates at an angle twice the rotation angle of the gear 1013a. That is, when the gear 1013a (cross member 1013b) rotates 90 degrees, the gear 1014a rotates 180 degrees, and when the gear 1013a (cross member 1013b) rotates 180 degrees, the gear 1014a rotates 360 degrees. Therefore, every time the transmission rod 1016 moves half a circle around the annular groove 1012, the positions of the protrusion pins 1014c are switched back and forth.

The flow-down prevention plate 1015 is a plate member that reciprocates back and forth based on the rotation of the reversing gear 1014, and has a connecting elongated hole 1015a extending in the vertical direction through which the projecting pin 1014c is inserted, and hits the ball in a protruding state. It is provided with a contact side surface 1015b, which is a contact side surface. In addition, in FIG. 11A, the protruding state of the flow-down prevention plate 1015 is shown. Further, the contact side surface 1015b is formed so that the angle formed with the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 in the initial state is 90 degrees.

From the state shown in FIG. 11A, when the reversing gear 1014 rotates 180 degrees and the projecting pin 1014c is arranged on the rear side, the flow prevention plate 1015 is pulled backward and a buried state is formed (FIG. 11). 7 (b)). Therefore, every time the transmission rod 1016 moves half a circle around the annular groove 1012, the state of the flow prevention plate 1015 changes. As a result, the state change of the second variable winning device 650 and the state change of the flow prevention plate 1015 can be synchronized.

In the present embodiment, since the L rotary gear 1013 is formed so as to rotate only every 90 degrees, the reverse gear 1014 meshed with the L rotary gear 1013 rotates only every 180 degrees. The flow prevention plate 1015 is formed in such a manner that it can only take a protruding state or a buried state. Therefore, by stopping the reversing gear 1014 at a halfway angle, it is possible to prevent the flow prevention plate 1015 from stopping at a halfway position.

The flow direction of the flow prevention plate 1015 (front-back direction) and the direction of receiving a load from the sphere (left-right direction, see FIG. 13) intersect at right angles. Therefore, when a plurality of balls apply a load to the flow-down prevention plate 1015, it is possible to prevent the flow-down prevention plate 1015 from moving in the moving direction. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the load due to the weight of the ball to be applied to the reversing gear 1014 connected to the flow prevention plate 1015, and it is possible to improve the durability of the reversing gear 1014.

The transmission rod 1016 is arranged in such a manner that the extending tip thereof is constantly pressed against the bottom of the annular groove 1012 in the groove depth direction by an elastic force. Further, since the diameter is small, some elastic deformation in the radial direction or the like is possible. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 650b is opened / closed, even if the path through which the transmission rod 1016 is guided between the outward path and the return path is displaced between the upper groove 1012a and the lower groove 1012b, the deviation is caused. , Can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the transmission rod 1016 itself.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the operation of the ball that has flowed down the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 by right-handed strike and has reached the second specific winning opening 650a will be described. 12 (a) and 12 (b) are partial front views of the second variable winning device 650. Note that FIG. 12A shows a case where the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a in a state where the second specific winning opening 650a is closed, and FIG. 12B shows the case where the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a. The case where the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a in the state where the 650a is open is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 12A, when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a with the second specific winning opening 650a closed, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. Since it is not possible to do so, it flows down to the left of the second specific winning opening 650a (see FIG. 12A). Then, the ball that has flowed down to the left of the second specific winning opening 650a flows down the flow path to the left of the second specific winning opening 650a. Since the left flow path of the second specific winning opening 650a is inclined in the direction of the first specific winning opening 65a, the ball flows down in the direction of the first specific winning opening 65a.

On the other hand, when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a with the second specific winning opening 650a open, as shown in FIG. 12B, the ball is on the extension line of the flow path into which the ball has flowed down. 2 The opening portion of the specific winning opening 650a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. As shown in FIG. 12B, a passage port 1022 for discharging the ball to the storage device 1000 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650. By entering the passage port 1022, the winning of the ball is detected and the winning ball is paid out, and the ball entering the inside of the second variable winning device 650 from the second specific winning opening 650a is inserted. It can be discharged to the storage device 1000.

A mode in which the game ball flows into the storage device 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. 13 (a) to 13 (c) and 14 (a) to 14 (c) are partial front views of the storage device 1000. It should be noted that the balls entered in the second variable winning device 650 are shown with numbers added in the order of entry.

As shown in FIG. 13A, when the first ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, the ball inclines until it reaches the inclined surface portion 1023a arranged at the left end of the inclined flow path 1023. It flows down to the lower left of the flow path 1023.

As shown in FIG. 13B, when the ball collides with the inclined surface portion 1023a, the flow direction of the ball changes to the front side, the ball is discharged from the discharge port 1024 to the front side, and lands on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040. When there is one ball on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040, the tilting member 1040 maintains the initial state, so that the ball flows down to the left and the flow prevention plate 1015 is in the protruding state (in the present embodiment, the first ball). 2 As long as the specific winning opening 650a is open), it is maintained on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040.

In the state of FIG. 13B, when the flow prevention plate 1015 is in the buried state (in the present embodiment, when the second specific winning opening 650a is in the closed state), the ball on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 is released. It flows down from the tilting member 1040 to the left and enters the normal ball entry port 1033 (see FIG. 9). As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from accidentally entering the probability variation entry port 1031 (see FIG. 9) in the jackpot A (see FIGS. 16A and 17) described later.

That is, in the jackpot A, the second specific winning opening 650a opens in a short period (0.2 seconds) so that the ball cannot enter. However, if the ball accidentally enters the ball in this short period of time, it may occur even if the ball is being played without fraud. On the other hand, even if you mistakenly enter a ball, it is about one ball at most, and three balls do not enter.

Therefore, in the jackpot A, even if the ball accidentally enters the second specific winning opening 650a, the ball does not tilt the tilting member 1040, and after the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. Since the flow prevention plate 1015 is in the buried state, the ball is flowed to the left from the tilting member 1040. Therefore, in the jackpot A, it is possible to prevent the ball from accidentally entering the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031 (see FIG. 9).

As shown in FIGS. 13 (c) and 14 (a), when the second and third balls flow down the inclined flow path 1023, collide with the inclined surface portion 1023a and are discharged to the front side, the balls are discharged. Lands on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 at a position avoiding the first ball. That is, the second ball is arranged side by side to the right of the first ball (see FIG. 13C), and the third ball is the first ball and the second ball. (See FIG. 14 (a)). That is, when the sphere that comes later falls from above, it abuts on the sphere that is arranged earlier by its own weight and moves to the most stable arrangement.

In this way, even if the balls are discharged from the discharge port 1024 at different timings, a plurality of balls can be smoothly arranged side by side on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 by the action of the weight of each ball. .. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period until the position of the center of gravity of the tilting member 1040 is shifted in the left-right direction.

When three balls enter the second specific winning opening 650a at the same time, the second ball is while the first ball collides with the inclined surface portion 1023a and turns to the front side. When the third ball collides with the first ball, the ball turns to the front side, and the ball may be discharged from the discharge port 1024 to the front side at a position in the middle of the inclined flow path 1023. Even in this case, although the number added to the sphere is different from the state shown in FIG. 14 (a) (in FIG. 14 (a), the numbers "1, 3, 2" from the left are "1, 3, 2" from the left. It becomes 1, 2, 3 "), and the arrangement of three spheres side by side does not change. Therefore, the game can proceed without delay.

As shown in FIG. 14A, when three spheres are arranged side by side on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040, the position of the center of gravity when the tilting member 1040 and the sphere are integrated moves to the right side of the rotation axis, and the tilting member The 1040 is in a tilted state (see FIG. 14B).

As shown in FIG. 14B, in the tilted state, the ball on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 flows down to the right and flows down to the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031 (see FIG. 9). In the tilted state of the tilting member 1040, even if the fourth and subsequent balls flow down the tilted flow path 1023 and are discharged from the discharge port 1024 to the front side, if the ball is still on the tilting member 1040. The fourth and subsequent balls move with each other in a manner in which the balls that were previously on the tilting member 1040 are pushed to the right, and the tilting member 1040 can be maintained in the tilted state (FIG. 14 (b)). (See), if the balls have already disappeared from the tilting member 1040, there is no problem because some balls have already passed through the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031. Therefore, depending on how the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a (frequency), the tilting member 1040 malfunctions (the tilted state returns unexpectedly, the ball bites and the tilting member 1040 stops, etc.). It is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the probabilistic entry ball port 1031.

While a ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, a plurality of balls reach the upper surface of the tilting member 1040, and the tilting member 1040 may be in a tilted state or an initial state depending on the number of balls on the upper surface. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 14 (c), less than three balls (one in FIG. 14 (c)) may remain on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040.

As described above, the remaining ball flows down from the tilting member 1040 to the lower left due to the flow-down prevention plate 1015 being buried based on the second specific winning opening 650a being closed, and normally enters. It is discharged from the ball mouth 1033 to a ball discharge path (not shown).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of balls remaining on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 can be set to 0 after the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. As a result, a series of flows (operation effect) in which a plurality of balls are stored in the tilting member 1040 in order from 0, the tilting member 1040 is tilted, and the balls are flown toward the probability variation side flow path 1032 (see FIG. 9). Can be executed at each jackpot B (see FIG. 16B). As a result, the effect of the tilting member 1040 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the operation of the ball that has flowed down the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 by right-handed strike and has reached the first specific winning opening 65a will be described. In addition, in FIG. 15A, the case where the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a in a state where the first specific winning opening 65a is closed is illustrated, and in FIG. 15B, the first specific winning opening 65a is shown. The case where the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a in a state where the 65a is open is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 15A, when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a with the first specific winning opening 65a closed, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, it flows down the upper part of the first specific winning opening 65a and falls to the left side of the first variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 15A). Then, the ball that has fallen to the left side of the first specific winning opening 65a flows down to the out opening 66 (see FIG. 2) provided on the left side of the first specific winning opening 65a.

On the other hand, when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a with the first specific winning opening 65a open, as shown in FIG. 15B, the ball is on the extension line of the flow path into which the ball has flowed down. 1 The opening portion of the specific winning opening 65a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a. As shown in FIG. 15B, a ball discharge port 65d for discharging the ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided inside the first variable winning device 65. By entering the ball outlet 65d, the winning of the ball is detected and the winning ball is paid out, and the ball entering the inside of the first variable winning device 65 from the first specific winning opening 65a. Can be discharged. Since the bottom surface of the first variable winning device 65 is inclined in the direction of the ball ejection port 65d, all the balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 65a are entered into the ball ejection port 65d. Can be made to. Therefore, all the balls can be reliably discharged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 16A is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and FIG. 16B is a diagram showing the second specific winning in the 12th round of the jackpot B. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the mouth 650a.

First, FIG. 16A will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 16A shows the time-dependent change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a, and FIG. 16A shows. The lower graph shows the timed change (whether it is in the protruding state or the buried state) of the flow prevention plate 1015.

As shown in FIG. 16A, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time When (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. Then, the closed state is maintained until 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 12th round, and the 12th round ends based on the elapse of 7 seconds. In addition, this closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the flow prevention plate 1015 becomes a protruding state when the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, and becomes a buried state when the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. .. Here, since the time for opening the second specific winning opening 650a is extremely short, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a plurality of balls enter the storage device 1001, and in addition, the time for the flow prevention plate 1015 to be in a protruding state. Since it is extremely short, a plurality of balls are stored in the tilting member 1040, and it is possible to prevent the tilting member 1040 from tilting. As a result, in the jackpot A, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation entry ball opening 1031.

In this way, in the 12th round of jackpot A, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is so that the period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is open becomes extremely short. An opening pattern of 650a is set. Therefore, in most cases where the jackpot A is reached, the ball does not enter the probability variation entry ball opening 1031 during the special game state (during the jackpot), so that it is difficult to set the probability variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

The reason why the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the 12th round is to make it difficult to understand that it is a big hit A immediately after the start of the 12th round. Is. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 16B, but in the jackpot B where it is easy to enter the ball into the probability variation entry opening 1031, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) immediately after the start of the 12th round. ) 650a is opened. Therefore, by sharing the operation of the second specific winning opening (second big opening) 650a immediately after the start of the 12th round between the jackpot A and the jackpot B, it is expected that the jackpot this time will be the jackpot B. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16B, the time change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot B will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 16 (b) shows the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 16 (b). The lower graph shows the timed change (whether it is in the protruding state or the buried state) of the flow prevention plate 1015.

As shown in FIG. 16B, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is set to the open state. Then, the open state is maintained until 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 12th round, and the closed state is set based on the elapse of 5 seconds. Even if 10 balls enter the 2nd specified winning opening (2nd large opening) 650a before 5 seconds have elapsed, the 2nd specified winning opening (2nd large opening) 650a will still be used. It will be closed. This closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the flow prevention plate 1015 operates differently from the 12th round of the jackpot A. That is, the flow prevention plate 1015 is in a protruding state when the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, and is in a buried state when the second specific winning opening 650a is closed, which is the same as the jackpot A. However, in conjunction with the change of state of the second specific winning opening 650a, the protruding state is maintained from the start of the 12th round, and the state changes to the buried state based on the elapse of 5 seconds. Even if 10 balls enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a before the lapse of 5 seconds, the flow prevention plate 1015 changes to the buried state.

Therefore, for 5 seconds from the start of the 12th round of the jackpot B, the state in which the ball easily enters the second specified winning opening 650a is maintained, and the state in which the ball is easily stored in the tilting member 1040 is maintained. Will be done. As a result, the tilting member 1040 can be easily tilted by the weight of the ball, and at the jackpot B, the ball can easily pass through the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031. Therefore, the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state after the jackpot ends. It will be easier.

The opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to this, and the pattern is such that the ball can easily enter the probability changing ball opening 1031 and the probability changing ball opening 1031. If it is possible to set a pattern in which the ball is difficult to enter, it may be arbitrarily determined. For example, in the jackpot A, the second specific winning opening 650a operates in a manner of switching the state every 2 seconds, and in the jackpot B, the second specific winning opening 650a operates for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse). Alternatively, it may operate in a manner of maintaining the open state (until 10 balls are won).

Further, the number of rounds for opening the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is not limited to the 12th round, and may be set to any round. Further, the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened in a plurality of rounds. For example, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a may be opened in the first round and the fifteenth round. May be set to. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the probability-changing ball opening 1031, so that it is possible to more easily enter the probability-changing state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot B. Therefore, even though the jackpot B is won, the ball cannot be entered into the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a, which lowers the player's motivation for the game. It can be prevented (suppressed).

The contents of ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and FIG. 17B schematically shows a correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 17 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol.

As shown in FIG. 17A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a random number table 202a per first, a type selection table 202b per first, and a random number table 202c per second as part of the fixed value data described above. , And the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

The first hit random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter, which is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec), is stored. When the value of the first random number counter acquired based on the starting prize matches any of the determination values specified in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 17B) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type. , And the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry slot 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49". The jackpot A is associated with and defined in (see 202b1 in FIG. 17B). As described above, in the case of a jackpot A, the period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened is extremely short in the 12th round (FIG. 16A). reference). Therefore, it becomes difficult to store a plurality of balls in the tilting member 1040, and it becomes difficult to allow the balls to enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031. That is, when the jackpot A is reached, it becomes difficult to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

Further, the jackpot B is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99" (see 202b2 in FIG. 17B). As described above, in the case of a jackpot B, the period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened becomes longer in the 12th round, and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is opened. The flow-down prevention plate 1015 is configured to maintain a protruding state during the opening period of 650a (see FIG. 16B). Therefore, by allowing a plurality of balls to enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a while the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is open, the tilting member 1040 A plurality of spheres can be stored in the sphere, and the tilting member 1040 can be tilted by the weight of the spheres. Then, as described above, the probability variation entry ball opening 1031 is provided at the destination where the ball flows in the state where the tilting member 1040 is tilted. Therefore, when the jackpot B is reached, it becomes easy to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". The jackpot A is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 17B). Further, the jackpot B is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20 to 99" (see 202b4 in FIG. 17B). That is, the number of determination values that result in a jackpot B is larger when a jackpot is achieved by the special symbol 2 lottery than in the case where a jackpot is achieved by the special symbol 1 lottery. Therefore, when a big hit is made by the lottery of the special symbol 2, it is more likely to be a big hit B.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit is increased. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second entrance 640, and it becomes easy to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the probabilistic state of the special symbol that is likely to be a jackpot of the special symbol and is likely to be the jackpot B when the jackpot is reached, and the probabilistic change of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot Since the jackpot B, which tends to be in a state, is likely to be repeated, it becomes easy for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17C) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5-28" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 17 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5-204" is defined as a determination value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 17 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the ball through the normal entry port 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is used. It is judged whether or not it is a hit. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

As described above, according to the first embodiment, as a method of configuring the gaming machine, that the balls can easily flow down to the probabilistic side flow path 1032 by storing a predetermined number of balls in the tilting member 1040, the tilting member 1040 is used. By adopting a method of associating the ease of collecting balls with the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 650, the above-mentioned object can be achieved by one driving means (solenoid 650c).

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 21. In the first embodiment, the case where the flow prevention plate 1015 operates every time the second variable winning device 650 opens and closes has been described, but the storage device 2000 in the second embodiment opens and closes the second variable winning device 650. An opening / closing operation for operating the flow-down prevention plate 1015 and an opening / closing operation for not operating (maintaining) the flow-down prevention plate 1015 can be formed depending on the operation mode of. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the annular groove 2012 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 18 (a) is a front view of the annular groove 2012 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 18 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the annular groove 2012 in the line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. 18 (a). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the annular groove 2012 in the line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 18A.

As shown in FIG. 18A, the annular groove 2012 is a groove formed along a long elliptical shape in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 18A), and is formed on the upper side of the L rotary gear 1013. It mainly includes an upper groove 2012a and a lower groove 2110 formed and branched on the lower side of the L rotary gear 1013.

The upper groove 2012a has a smaller radius of curvature than the upper groove 1012a of the first embodiment, and is formed at a position that does not interfere with the cross member 1013b in FIG. 18A. Therefore, when the transmission rod 1016 passes through the upper groove 2012a, the cross member 1013b and the transmission rod 1016 do not come into contact with each other, and the L rotary gear 1013 maintains its posture.

The lower groove 2110 has a start groove 2111 connected to the rear end portion (left end portion in FIG. 18A) of the upper groove 2012a and a front end portion of the upper groove 2012a extending forward from the start groove 2111 (FIG. 18 (FIG. 18). a) The contact groove 2112 connected to the right end), the branch groove 2113 extending rearward from the connection position between the start groove 2111 and the contact groove 2112, and the rear end (rear end) of the branch groove 2113. It mainly includes a separation groove 2114 extending forward from the left end portion of FIG. 18A and connected to the front end portion (right end portion of FIG. 18A) of the upper groove 2012a.

As shown in FIGS. 18 (b) and 18 (c), the depth of the bottom of the annular groove 2012 is not constant and changes in an inclined direction in the extending direction of the groove. Thereby, the movement path of the transmission rod 1016 can be limited.

That is, as shown in FIG. 18B, at the connection position between the upper groove 2012a and the start groove 2111, the groove depth of the start groove 2111 is deeper than that of the upper groove 2012a, and the start groove 2111 and the contact groove 2112 At the connection position of, the groove depth of the contact groove 2112 is deeper than that of the start groove 2111, and at the connection position of the contact groove 2112 and the upper groove 2012a, the groove depth of the upper groove 2012a is deeper than that of the contact groove 2112. It is deepened.

Therefore, in the cross section shown in FIG. 18B, the transmission rod 1016 can move only in the moving direction of moving from the left end to the right. Therefore, the direction in which the transmission rod 1016 moves along the annular groove 2012 can be determined in one direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 18B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 18C, at the connection position between the upper groove 2012a and the start groove 2111, the groove depth of the start groove 2111 is deeper than that of the upper groove 2012a, and the start groove 2111 and the contact groove 2112 At the connection position of, the groove depth of the contact groove 2112 is deeper than that of the start groove 2111, and at the connection position of the contact groove 2112 and the separation groove 2114, the separation groove 2114 is larger than the contact groove 2112. The groove depth is deepened, and at the connection position between the separation groove 2114 and the upper groove 2012a, the groove depth of the upper groove 2012a is deeper than that of the separation groove 2114.

Therefore, in the cross section shown in FIG. 18C, the transmission rod 1016 can be moved only in the moving direction in which the transmission rod 1016 moves from the left end to the right. Therefore, the movement path of the transmission rod 1016 is determined when the solenoid 650c (see FIG. 9) is driven in such a manner that the contact groove 2112 is moved to the left again while the transmission rod 1016 is moving to the right. Can be done. That is, when the contact groove 2112 is moved to the left again while the transmission rod 1016 is moving to the right, the transmission rod 1016 moves along the path cross-sectionally viewed in FIG. 18 (c). In addition, the movement path of the transmission rod 1016 can be restricted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, the operation of the flow prevention plate 1015 caused by the transmission rod 1016 moving in the annular groove 2012 will be described. First, a case will be described in which the transmission rod 1016 does not turn back in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 19, the right side in FIG. 19 is the front side) while passing through the lower groove 2110. In this operation, specifically, as a driving mode of the solenoid 650c (see FIG. 9), the current is not applied again within a short period (for example, a period of less than 0.2 seconds) after the application of the current is stopped. Correspond to the case.

19 (a) to 19 (d) are side views schematically showing the ball stopper 2010. In addition, in FIG. 19A, the transmission rod 1016 is arranged at the front end of the annular groove 2012 (corresponding to the closed state of the second specific winning opening 650a), but in FIG. 19B, the transmission rod is The state in which the 1016 is arranged at the rear end of the annular groove 2012 (corresponding to the open state of the second specific winning opening 650a), but in FIG. 19C, the transmission rod 1016 is in contact with the cross member 1013b. However, in FIG. 19D, a state in which the transmission rod 1016 is separated from the cross member agent 1013b and arranged to the right is shown. The state shown in FIG. 19 (d) is restored to the state shown in FIG. 19 (a) when the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. In the series of operations returning from FIG. 19 (a) to FIG. 19 (d) and FIG. 19 (a), the second specific winning opening 650a changes from the closed state to the open state, and then returns to the closed state. Corresponds to the operation.

As shown in FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (b), as the second specific winning opening 650a changes from the closed state to the open state (the state changes in about 0.2 seconds by driving the solenoid 650c). ), The transmission rod 1016 moves rearward, and the tip of the transmission rod 1016 comes into contact with the start groove 2111 (see FIG. 19B).

As the second specific winning opening 650a is changed from the state shown in FIG. 19B to the closed state (the state is changed by the elastic spring due to the release of the drive of the solenoid 650c), the transmission rod 1016 moves forward. Based on the rotation of the L rotary gear 1013, the reversing gear 1014 rotates 180 degrees, and the flow prevention plate 1015 changes its state.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the second specific winning opening 650a performs the opening / closing operation once, the flow-down prevention plate 1015 changes to a different state. Therefore, in order to change the flow prevention plate 1015 from the buried state shown in FIG. 19D to the protruding state shown in FIG. 19A, the opening / closing operation of the second specific winning opening 650a may be performed once again.

20 (a) to 20 (d) are side views schematically showing the ball stopper 2010. In addition, in FIG. 20A, the transmission rod 1016 is arranged at the front end of the annular groove 2012 (corresponding to the closed state of the second specific winning opening 650a), but in FIG. 20B, the transmission rod is In FIG. 20 (c), the transmission rod 1016 is arranged at the back end of the separation groove 2114, and the state where the transmission rod 1016 is arranged at the back end of the contact groove 2112 is shown in FIG. 20 (d). The state in which the transmission rod 1016 has moved to the vicinity of the connection position between the separation groove 2114 and the upper groove 2012a is shown in the figure. The state shown in FIG. 20 (d) is restored to the state shown in FIG. 20 (a) when the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. In the series of operations returning from FIG. 20 (a) to FIG. 20 (d) and FIG. 20 (a), the second specific winning opening 650a changes from the closed state to the open state, and then returns to the closed state. Corresponds to the operation.

As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the second specific winning opening 650a changes from the closed state to the open state, and then the solenoid 650c is released to slightly move the closing plate 650b toward the front side. Along with the return, the transmission rod 1016 slightly moves from the rear end of the upper groove 2012a to the front side, and the tip of the transmission rod 1016 comes into contact with the confluence of the contact groove 2112 and the branch groove 2113 (FIG. 20 (b)).

By driving the solenoid 650c again from the state shown in FIG. 20B (for example, by driving the solenoid 650c again 0.1 seconds after the drive release of the solenoid 650c), the transmission rod 1016 is attached to the cross member 1013b. The transmission rod 1016 can be moved to the back side before abutting, in which case the transmission rod 1016 moves along the branch groove 2113 along the shape of the lower groove 2110 and reaches the separation groove 2113 ( (See FIG. 20 (c)).

After that, by releasing the drive of the solenoid 650c, the transmission rod 1016 moves to the front side along the separation groove 2114 as the second specific winning opening 650a is closed. Therefore, in the series of operations shown in FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (d), the transmission rod 1016 and the cross member 1013b do not come into contact with each other, so that the state of the flow prevention plate 1015 can be kept unchanged.

By combining the operation shown in FIG. 19 and the operation shown in FIG. 20, when the second specific winning opening 650a is maintained in the open state, the flow prevention plate 1015 is brought into the protruding state, and the balls are stored in the storage device 2000. It is possible to form both the case where the flow prevention plate 1015 is buried and the case where the ball cannot be stored in the storage device 2000. An example thereof will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 21 (a) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and FIG. 21 (b) is a diagram showing the second specific winning in the 12th round of the jackpot B. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the mouth 650a.

First, FIG. 21A will be described. The graph on the upper side of FIG. 21 (a) shows the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 21 (a). The lower graph shows the timed change (whether it is in the protruding state or the buried state) of the flow prevention plate 1015.

As shown in FIG. 21A, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time When (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is operated toward the closed state. After that, after a predetermined extremely short time (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed without waiting for the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a to be closed, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is again. Opening port) 650a is opened. This open state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls win), and after the predetermined time elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is closed. And the 12th round is over. In addition, this closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the flow prevention plate 1015 maintains the buried state independently of the state change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a. Therefore, it is possible to form a state in which it is difficult to maintain the ball in the storage device 2000 while maintaining the state in which the ball can enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. As a result, in the jackpot A, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation entry ball opening 1031. Therefore, in most cases where the jackpot A is reached, the ball does not enter the probability variation entry ball opening 1031 during the special game state (during the jackpot), so that it is difficult to set the probability variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21B, the time change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot B will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 21 (b) shows the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 21 (b). The lower graph shows the timed change (whether it is in the protruding state or the buried state) of the flow prevention plate 1015.

As shown in FIG. 21B, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time When (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. Then, the closed state is maintained at a predetermined waiting time (for example, 1 second), and when the predetermined waiting time elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened. This open state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls win), and after the predetermined time elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is closed. And the 12th round is over. In addition, this closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the flow prevention plate 1015 changes its state every time the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a changes from the open state to the closed state. That is, at the start of the 12th round, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened and then closed, so that the buried state is changed to the protruding state, and then the opening is opened for a predetermined time. It changes from a protruding state to a buried state based on being closed afterwards.

In this way, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the flow prevention plate 1015 is maintained in the protruding state during the period in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is maintained in the open state for a predetermined period, so that the identification is specified. The state in which the ball easily enters the winning opening 650a is maintained, and the state in which the ball is easily stored in the tilting member 1040 is maintained. As a result, the tilting member 1040 can be easily tilted by the weight of the ball, and at the jackpot B, the ball can easily pass through the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031. Therefore, the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state after the jackpot ends. It will be easier.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a maintains the open state, but the state of the flow prevention plate 1015 while maintaining the open state is maintained. Since it can be changed, regardless of the jackpot type, the jackpot type is given to the player with sufficient opportunity to obtain a prize ball by inserting the ball into the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a. The only difference caused by the difference is whether or not the special symbol is likely to change after the big hit. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of balls that can be obtained by the player who has won the jackpot A.

The reason why the opening period immediately after the start of the 12th round is made common to 0.2 seconds is to make it difficult to understand that the jackpot A is immediately after the start of the 12th round. In the jackpot B, which makes it easy for the ball to enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened immediately after the start of the 12th round. Therefore, by sharing the operation of the second specific winning opening (second big opening) 650a immediately after the start of the 12th round between the jackpot A and the jackpot B, it is expected that the jackpot this time will be the jackpot B. be able to.

On the other hand, since the closing time of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is different after that, by confirming this closing time, the player can make the jackpot type of this jackpot A. It is possible to easily determine whether it is a jackpot B or a jackpot B. As a result, the player's attention can be focused on the opening / closing operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a at the start of the twelfth round.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the vicinity of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a (the part that the player pays attention to) is lit brightly by the LED, while the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is lit up. Power consumption can be reduced by turning off the LED in the portion away from the 650a (the portion that the player hardly sees). In addition, the visibility of the ball in the portion of the game area away from the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a can be deteriorated.

Regarding the visibility of the ball in the game area, for example, by deteriorating the visibility of the ball flowing down the upstream side of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, the ball can be seen from an unexpected position. It is possible to form a state in which the ball flows down to the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

Further, for example, when the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is in an impossible state, it flows down to the left of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, and the outer edge member 73 (see FIG. 2). By impairing the visibility of the ball flowing downstream (toward the first out port 66), it is possible to prevent the player from concentrating on the ball flowing toward the first out port 66. .. As a result, the degree of attention in the vicinity of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a can be maintained.

As described above, according to the second embodiment, the operation of the flow prevention plate 1015 with respect to the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 650 can be made different depending on the driving mode of the solenoid 650c. As a result, the attention of the second variable winning device 650 can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 28. In the first embodiment, the case where the flow prevention plate 1015 is driven by the driving force of the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 650 has been described, but the storage device 3000 in the third embodiment has a drive motor 3012 that always operates. The second variable winning device 650 is configured to switch between transmission and interruption of the driving force from the driving motor 3012 to the flow prevention plate 1015 by the driving force of the opening / closing operation. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

22 (a) and 22 (b) are rear perspective views of the storage device 3000 according to the third embodiment. 23 (a) is a front view of the storage device 3000, FIG. 23 (b) is a top view of the storage device 3000, and FIG. 24 is a rear view of the storage device 3000. In addition, in FIGS. 22 to 24, the illustration of the base plate 60 is omitted above the second variable winning device 650, and in FIG. 22A, a perspective view of the storage device 3000 as viewed from above is shown in FIG. 22 (b). ), A perspective view of the storage device 3000 as viewed from below is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b), the storage device 3000 includes a main body plate portion 1001, a ball stopper 3010 disposed on the back surface side of the main body plate portion 1001, and the above-mentioned induction flow. It mainly includes a road 1020, a branch flow path 1030, and a tilting member 1040.

The ball stopper 3010 is a drive motor 3012 fixed to a plate-shaped base plate portion 3011 extending from the back surface of the main body plate portion 1001 to the rear and a flange extending in parallel with the base plate portion 3011. The fixed clutch 3013a, which is fixed to the rotating shaft of the drive motor 3012 and has a sharp uneven shape formed on one surface in the axial direction over the outer circumference, and the uneven shape that can be meshed with the fixed clutch 3013a. A moving clutch 3013b having a shape and idlingly supported by the rotating shaft of the drive motor 3012, a switching clutch 3013 formed from the moving clutch 30, a rotating disk 3014 that rotates in synchronization with the moving clutch 3013b, and a rotating disk thereof. It mainly includes a flow-down prevention plate 1015 that moves in the front-rear direction based on the rotation of 3014, and a switching member 3016 that moves the position of the moving clutch 3013b by driving the second variable winning device 650.

The foundation plate portion 3011 includes an elastic spring 3011a that urges the flow-down prevention plate 1015 in the direction of projecting to the front side, and a shaft rod that is projected toward the back side in a rod shape and rotatably supports the protrusion switching member 3016. 3011b and. By the action of the elastic spring 3011a, the flow-down prevention plate 1015 projects to the front side and maintains the protruding state.

The drive motor 3012 is a DC motor that constantly rotates and drives in one direction, and operates at a slow rotation speed. In this embodiment, the rotation operation is performed in the mode of one rotation in 3 seconds.

The rotating disk 3014 extends from the center position of the above-mentioned disk portion 1014b and the projecting pin 1014b and the disc portion 1014b through the base plate portion 3011 and is coaxial with the rotating shaft of the drive motor 3012. A through shaft 3014a to be formed is provided.

The moving clutch 3013b includes a through hole 3013b1 that is externally fitted to the through shaft 3014a at its center position, and a support edge portion 3013b2 that extends radially outward from the portion where the uneven shape is formed. .. The through hole 3013b1 and the through shaft 3014a are configured in such a manner that they can move relative to each other in the axial direction but cannot move relative to each other in the circumferential direction. For example, the outer shape of the through shaft 3014a is formed from a D shape, and the inner shape of the through hole 3013b1 is formed from a D shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the through shaft 3014a.

In the switching clutch 3013, when the moving clutch 3013b and the fixed clutch 3013a are separated from each other, only the fixed clutch 3013a rotates by the driving force of the drive motor 3012. On the other hand, when the moving clutch 3013b is arranged at a position where it meshes with the fixed clutch 3013a, the moving clutch 3013b rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the fixed clutch 3013a.

As a result, after the moving clutch 3013b begins to mesh with the fixed clutch 3013a, the drive motor 3012 rotates half a turn (after a delay period of 1.5 seconds in this embodiment), so that the flow prevention plate 1015 is changed to the buried state. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 22 to 24, in the present embodiment, the solenoid 650c of the second variable winning device 650 expands and contracts in the left-right direction. Based on this expansion / contraction operation in the left-right direction, the rigid rod B31 extending in the expansion / contraction direction of the solenoid 650c operates in the left-right direction. The tip of the rigid rod B31 is connected to a connecting groove C31 formed on the lower surface of the opening / closing plate 650b, and in the present embodiment, the connecting groove C31 inclines toward the back side as the distance from the solenoid 650c in the left-right direction increases. Formed in an embodiment. Therefore, when the solenoid 650c is driven (when the rigid rod B31 is operated in the pulling direction), the opening / closing plate 650b is pulled in, the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and when the driving of the solenoid 650c is released, the opening / closing plate 650b is released. Is projected to the front side, and the second variable winning device 650 is closed.

The switching member 3016 is formed of vertically long rod members, and has a shaft hole 3016a rotatably supported by the shaft rod 3011b at a position slightly upwardly displaced from the lower end, and a moving portion of the solenoid 650c at the upper end portion. A long hole-shaped support elongated hole 3016b supported by a support shaft projecting parallel to the projecting direction of the shaft rod 3011b, and a support edge portion 3013b2 of the moving clutch 3013b at the lower end portion on both sides of the moving clutch 3013b in the axial direction. Mainly includes a claw portion 3016c that slidably supports the clutch portion 3016c.

In the present embodiment, when the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state (when the solenoid 650c is driven and the rigid rod B31 is pulled to the right in the rear view), the switching member 3016 is tilted toward the solenoid 650c. When the switching clutch 3013 forms a release state (clutch irregularities are separated from each other) and the second variable winning device 650 is closed (solenoid 650c drive is released). When the rigid rod B31 is pushed to the left when viewed from the rear), the switching member 3016 is in a transmission posture in which the switching member 3016 is tilted to the opposite side of the solenoid 650c, the fixed clutch 3013a and the moving clutch 3013b are engaged, and the switching clutch 3013 is engaged. , Form a transmission state that transmits the driving force.

When the switching clutch 3013 is in the transmission state, the convex portions of the fixed clutch 3013a and the moving clutch 3013b may come into contact with each other in the axial direction, but the uneven portions have a sharp shape (have a plane perpendicular to the axis). Since it is formed from a shape that is inclined with respect to the shaft), the moving clutch 3013b rotates at the time of contact, so that the impact at the time of contact can be released. As a result, the durability of the switching clutch 3013 can be improved as compared with the case where the uneven portion is formed from the concave-convex shape having a surface perpendicular to the axis.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27, the process from the transmission of the driving force of the drive motor 3012 to the operation of the flow prevention plate 1015 will be described. 25 (a) is a rear view of the ball stop device 3010, and FIG. 25 (b) is a side view of the ball stop device 3010 in the direction of arrow XXVb of FIG. 25 (a). Is a rear view of the ball stop device 3010, FIG. 26 (b) is a side view of the ball stop device 3010 in the direction of arrow XXVIb of FIG. 26 (a), and FIG. 27 (a) is a ball stop device. It is a rear view of 3010, and FIG. 27 (b) is a side view of the ball stop device 3010 in the direction of arrow XXVIIb of FIG. 27 (a).

It should be noted that FIG. 25 shows a state in which the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state and the switching member 3016 is in the released posture, and in FIG. 26, the second variable winning device 650 is closed from the state shown in FIG. The state in which the switching member 3016 is in the transmission posture is shown, and in FIG. 27, the second variable winning device 650 is closed for a predetermined time (1.5 in the present embodiment) from the state shown in FIG. The state after the maintenance (for seconds) is shown.

The relationship between the operation of the second variable winning device 650 and the operation of the flow prevention plate 1015 will be described. Before the start of the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 650, the second variable winning device 650 maintains the closed state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26, the switching clutch 3013 maintains the transmission state, and the drive motor 3012 Since the driving force is constantly transmitted to the rotating disk 3014, the state of the flow-down prevention plate 1015 changes every predetermined time (1.5 seconds in the present embodiment) between the protruding state and the buried state. Since this state change is performed at a position visible to the player, it is possible to improve the attention to the vicinity where the flow prevention plate 1015 is arranged (near the storage device 3000).

When the jackpot game starts, the 12th round is started, and the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state, the switching clutch 3013 is released and the driving force from the drive motor 3012 is not transmitted to the flow prevention plate 1015. The flow-down prevention plate 1015 is pushed out to the front side by the elastic force of the elastic spring 3011a, and is in a protruding state. This protruding state is maintained at least while the second variable winning device 650 maintains the open state.

When a predetermined time elapses from the state shown in FIG. 25 and the second variable winning device 650 changes to the closed state, the switching clutch 3013 is in the transmission state and the driving force of the drive motor 3012 is increased as shown in FIG. 26 (a). It starts to be transmitted to the flow prevention plate 1015 via the rotating disk 3014.

Here, when the flow-down prevention plate 1015b is in a protruding state, the protrusion pin 1014c of the rotary disk 3014 is arranged inside the connecting elongated hole 1015a of the flow-down prevention plate 1015, so that the rotary disk 3014 is projected. The pin 1014c is arranged at the front end (the position where the rotating disk 3014 is translated from the rotation axis to the front side).

The flow prevention plate 1015 is in the buried state because the posture of the rotating disk 3014 is such that the protrusion pin 1014c is arranged at the rear end (the position where the rotating disk 3014 is translated from the rotation axis to the back side). Since it is in the posture, even if the switching clutch 3013 starts to be in the transmission state, the flow prevention plate 1015 is not immediately in the buried state, and as shown in FIG. 26A, the protruding state is maintained. ..

The rotation of the switching clutch 3013 is caused by the rotation of the drive motor 3012. In the present embodiment, since the drive motor 3012 rotates at a speed of one rotation in 3 seconds, when the second variable winning device 650 maintains the closed state for 1.5 seconds, as shown in FIG. 27, the projecting pin 1014c Is moved to a position where the rotation disk 3014 is translated in parallel from the rotation axis to the back surface side, and the flow prevention plate 1015 forms a buried state. As a result, after the second variable winning device 650 is closed, the balls remaining on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 can be discharged to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the normal ball entry port 1033.

That is, in the present embodiment, the flow prevention plate 1015 forms a buried state and discharges the remaining spheres after a predetermined time (1.5 seconds in the present embodiment) from the closing of the second variable winning device 650. It is formed. Further, when the second variable winning device 650 is opened, the flow-down prevention plate 1015 projects to the front side by the elastic force of the elastic spring 3011a, so that a protruding state is formed without a time delay. Therefore, the timing of the state change of the flow prevention plate 1015 with reference to the operation timing of the second variable winning device 650 can be changed depending on the direction of the state change.

As described above, by maintaining the closed state of the second variable winning device 650 for 1.5 seconds, the flow prevention plate 1015 can be changed to the buried state, but for example, before the elapse of 1.5 seconds. When the second variable winning device 650 is changed to the open state again (for example, before 1 second has elapsed), the switching clutch 3013 is released, and the flow prevention plate 1015 is projected by the elastic force of the elastic spring 3011a and flows down. The prevention plate 1015 forms a protruding state. That is, the operation mode of the flow prevention plate 1015 can be changed depending on whether the closed state is maintained for 1.5 seconds or more, or the state is maintained for 1.5 seconds or less (about 1 second) and then opened again. .. Hereinafter, this will be described with reference to FIG. 28.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a will be described. FIG. 28A is a diagram showing the time change of the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and FIG. 28B is a diagram showing the second specific winning in the 12th round of the jackpot B. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the mouth 650a.

First, FIG. 28A will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 28 (a) shows the timed change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 28 (a). The lower graph shows the timed change (whether it is in the protruding state or the buried state) of the flow prevention plate 1015.

As shown in FIG. 28A, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time When (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. Then, after maintaining the closed state for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and the predetermined time (for example, 1 second) is opened. After that, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. The closed state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) of 1.5 seconds or more. After that, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened again for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and when the predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is opened. Opening port) 650a is closed and the 12th round is completed. In addition, this closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the flow prevention plate 1015 changes to the buried state every time the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a keeps the closed state for 1.5 seconds or more. Therefore, while creating a state in which a ball can enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, the flow prevention plate 1015 is inserted each time the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. By changing to the buried state, it is possible to make it difficult to store the sphere on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040. That is, a ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a after opening for one second is flown toward the normal entry opening 1033 each time the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. As long as three balls do not enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a in one opening, the tilting member 1040 may not tilt.

As a result, in the jackpot A, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation entry ball opening 1031. Therefore, in most cases where the jackpot A is reached, the ball does not enter the probability variation entry ball opening 1031 during the special game state (during the jackpot), so that it is difficult to set the probability variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28B, the time change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot B will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 28 (b) shows the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 28 (b). The lower graph shows the timed change (whether it is in the protruding state or the buried state) of the flow prevention plate 1015.

As shown in FIG. 28B, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time When (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. Then, after maintaining the closed state for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) of 1.5 seconds or less, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and the predetermined time When the time (for example, 1 second) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. The closed state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) of 1.5 seconds or less. After that, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened again for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and when the predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is opened. The open opening) 650a is closed, and then the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened again for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed from the start of the 12th round, or in the 12th round, the ball is released. It will be opened (until 10 prizes are won), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a will be closed, and the 12th round will end. This closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the flow prevention plate 1015 operates differently from the 12th round of the jackpot A. That is, the flow prevention plate 1015 forms a buried state when the second specific winning opening 650a maintains the closed state for 1.5 seconds, but in the jackpot B, the period of being closed is longer than 1.5 seconds. Since it is a short 1 second, the flow prevention plate 1015 keeps protruding during the 12th round.

Therefore, from the start of the 12th round of the jackpot B to the end of the 12th round, the state in which the ball can easily enter the second specific winning opening 650a is maintained, and the ball is stored in the tilting member 1040. A state that is easy to do is maintained. As a result, the tilting member 1040 can be easily tilted by the weight of the ball, and at the jackpot B, the ball can easily pass through the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031. Therefore, the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state after the jackpot ends. It will be easier.

In this way, the operation mode of the second specific winning opening 650a after the start of the 12th round is a similar operation mode in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for 1 second, then closed, and then opened again for 1 second, while the jackpot A and the jackpot B Then, it is possible to form a case where it is easy to set the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends (see FIG. 28 (b)) and a case where it is difficult to set the probabilistic state of the special symbol (see FIG. 28 (a)). it can. As a result, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the jackpot is jackpot A or jackpot B for a while after the start of the 12th round, and the player's expectation can be maintained longer during the game. ..

The number of rounds for opening the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to the twelfth round, and may be set to any round. Further, the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened in a plurality of rounds. For example, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a may be opened in the first round and the fifteenth round. May be set to. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the probability-changing ball opening 1031, so that it is possible to more easily enter the probability-changing state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot B. Therefore, even though the jackpot B is won, the ball cannot be entered into the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a, which lowers the player's motivation for the game. It can be prevented (suppressed).

Further, in the jackpot B (FIG. 28 (b)), after the jackpot ends (after the second specific winning opening 650a is closed), the flow prevention plate 1015 is delayed by a predetermined period (1.5 seconds in the present embodiment). It changes to a buried state. Therefore, for example, when a hall clerk is requested to repair a ball due to a jam, and the repair takes until the end of the 12th round, the ball is launched in a hurry and a plurality of balls are launched just before the end of the 12th round. Even if it enters, there is room for tilting the tilting member 1040 for a predetermined period after the end of the 12th round. As a result, it becomes easier to set the special symbol to the probabilistic state after the jackpot ends.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the operation mode in which the flow prevention plate 1015 is buried after a predetermined time from the closing of the second variable winning device 650 is realized only by controlling the operation mode of the solenoid 650c. can do.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 36. In the third embodiment, the case where the flow prevention plate 1015 is driven based on the length of the closed state of the second variable winning device 650 has been described, but the storage device 4000 in the fourth embodiment has the second variable winning device. Based on the length of the open state of the device 650, it is configured to switch whether or not to drive the flow prevention plate 1015. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 29 is a rear perspective view of the storage device 4000 according to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 29, the state in which the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 2) is in the closed state is shown, and the drawing of the base plate 60 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 29, the storage device 4000 includes a main body plate portion 1001 fastened and fixed to the base plate 60, a ball stopper 4010 arranged on the back surface side of the main body plate portion 1001, and the above-described induction flow path. It mainly includes a 1020, a branch flow path 1030, and a tilting member 1040 (see FIG. 23).

The ball stopper 4010 includes a plurality of plate-shaped base plate portions 4011 extending rearward from the back surface of the main body plate portion 1001, a drive motor 4012 supported by a part of the base plate portion 4011, and the drive motor 4012 thereof. From the friction rotation member 4013 having a plurality of surfaces to which the driving force is transmitted from the drive motor 4012 and being configured to be slidable in the axial direction, and the friction rotation member 4013 arranged coaxially with the friction rotation member 4013. Rotating disk 4014 configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the above, a flow-down prevention plate 1015 connected to the rotating disk 4014, and a sliding rotating member 4013 connected to a moving portion of the solenoid 650c. Mainly includes a switching member 3016 to be operated.

In the present embodiment, contrary to the case of the third embodiment, when the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 24) is closed by the solenoid 650c, the switching member 3016 is on the solenoid 650c side (rear view). While tilting to the right side), when the second variable winning device 650 is opened by the solenoid 650c, the switching member 3016 tilts to the side away from the solenoid 650c. In this case, it is preferable to use a solenoid 650c of a type that extends by electric drive from the viewpoint of power saving.

For example, by reversing the inclination direction of the connecting groove C31 (see FIG. 22B) of the solenoid 650c to the left and right, the above-mentioned operating condition can be satisfied. The posture in the closed state (see FIG. 29) is referred to as the first transmission posture of the switching member 3016, and the posture in the open state is referred to as the second transmission posture of the switching member 3016.

The base plate portion 4011 includes a first support plate 4011a that supports the drive motor 4012, a second support plate 4011b that is juxtaposed with the first support plate 4011a and supports the tip of the drive shaft of the drive motor 4012. The third support plate 4011c, which is arranged above the first support plate 4011a and extends with the shaft rod portion 4011d for rotatably supporting the friction rotating member 4013, and the rotary disk 4014 are slidably sandwiched from both sides in the axial direction. It mainly includes a fourth support plate 4011e that supports and maintains the position coaxial with the friction rotating member 4013.

The fourth support plate 4011e rotates in such a manner that the plate projects from the outer periphery of the rotary disk 4014 to a position slightly inside, and the rotary disk 4014 is slidably sandwiched from the axial direction over a range of about 200 degrees. Supports disk 4014. Further, since the portion that receives the outer peripheral surface of the rotating disk 4014 is formed as a circular recess having a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rotating disk 4014, it is possible to prevent the rotating disk 4014 from being displaced in the radial direction. doing. The rotating disk 4014 is maintained in a coaxial state with the friction rotating member 4013 by a holding mechanism (not shown).

The drive motor 4012 includes a pair of drive disks 4012a and 4012b in which a bracket is fixed to the first support plate 4011a and the bracket is fixed to the rotating shaft on the opposite side of the bracket with the first support plate 4011a interposed therebetween.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the pair of drive disks 4012a and 4012b are arranged at positions where they can come into contact with the outer peripheral surfaces of the friction rotation member 4013, and the rubbing drive disks 4012a and 4012b are replaced by the arrangement of the friction rotation member 4013. In the state shown in FIG. 29, the friction rotating member 4013 is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the driving disk 4012a arranged on the side close to the rotating disk 4014. The drive motor 4012 continues to rotate at a constant speed at all times. In the present embodiment, the drive motor 4012 rotates at a speed of one rotation in 6 seconds.

Next, the friction rotating member 4013 and the rotating disk 4014 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. 30 and 31 are exploded rear perspective views of the ball stopper 4010. Note that FIG. 30 shows a state of the drive motor 4012 as viewed from the bracket side, and FIG. 31 shows a state of the drive motor 4012 as viewed from the shaft side. Further, in FIGS. 30 and 31, the illustration of the base plate portion 4011 and the switching member 3016 is omitted.

The friction rotating member 4013 is a donut-shaped disk member having a through hole formed in the center, and the boundary disk portion 4013a forming the maximum outer diameter and the bracket side of the drive motor 4012 from the boundary disk portion 4013a. A donut-shaped protrusion with the same outer diameter as the first friction disk 4013b on the opposite side of the first friction disk 4013b projecting in a hednut shape and the first friction disk 4013b sandwiching the boundary disk portion 4013a. The second friction disk 4013c to be formed, the projecting engaging portion 4013d projecting eccentrically from the axial surface of the second friction disk 4013c, and a part of the outer peripheral portion of the second friction disk 4013c. It mainly includes a release recess 4013e, which is a portion recessed inward in the radial direction.

The boundary disk portion 4013a engages with the claw portion 3016c of the switching member 3016 in the vicinity of the outer peripheral position (see FIG. 29). Therefore, when the switching member 3016 operates, the boundary disk portion 4013a is pushed by the claw portion 3016c, so that the friction rotating member 4013 moves along the extending direction of the shaft rod portion 4011d.

The first friction disk 4013b and the second friction disk 4013c are formed to have the same outer diameter as the drive disks 4012a and 4012b of the drive motor 4012. Therefore, the rotation speed of the drive motor 4012 and the rotation speed of the friction rotation member 4013 are the same in a situation assuming that there is no slip.

The release recess 4013e is formed in such a manner (size, radial depth) that the contact with the drive disk 4012a is released when the release recess 4013e is arranged to face the drive disk 4012a. That is, in a state where the second friction disk 4013c and the drive disk 4012a are in contact with each other and the second friction disk 4013c is rotating due to the friction with the drive disk 4012a, the release recess 4013e is on the drive disk 4012a side. When the posture is facing (the posture in which the release recess 4013e is arranged on a straight line connecting the shaft rod portion 4011d and the rotation shaft of the drive motor 4012), the driving force transmission to the second friction disk 4013c is released and the friction rotation occurs. The member 4013 maintains the same posture.

The rotating disk 4014 is projected in the opposite phase of the protrusion pin 1014c on the side opposite to the side where the above-mentioned disk portion 1014b, the protrusion pin 1014c, and the protrusion pin 1014c are projected. It is mainly provided with a protruding rib 4014a.

The projecting rib 4014a is formed from a long shape along the radial direction of the disk portion 1014b, and in a state where the friction rotating member 4013 is arranged on the shaft side of the drive motor 4012 (see FIG. 29), the projecting rib 4014a is in charge of projecting. A height that allows contact with the joint portion 4013d in the circumferential direction, and a height that cannot contact the protrusion engaging portion 4013d in the circumferential direction when the friction rotating member 4013 is arranged on the bracket side of the drive motor 4012. It is thrust at.

With reference to FIG. 32, switching of the driving force transmission mode of the driving motor 4012, the friction rotating member 4013, and the rotating disk 4014 will be described. 32 (a) and 32 (b) are rear views of the ball stopper 4010. Note that FIG. 32 (a) shows a state in which the second variable winning device 650 is in the closed state and the switching member 3016 is in the first transmission posture, and FIG. 32 (b) shows the second variable winning device. The state in which the device 650 is in the open state and the switching member 3016 is in the second transmission posture is shown.

In addition, in FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the rotating disk 4014 has the protrusion pin 1014c arranged on the front side (the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 32) (flow prevention). The friction rotating member 4013 is shown in a state in which the release recess 4013e is arranged on the back side (front side of the paper surface of FIG. 32).

As shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the second variable winning device 650 is in the closed state, the second friction disk 4013c and the driving disk 4012a are in contact with each other. Therefore, in this state, the friction rotating member 4013 rotates at the rotation speed of the driving disk 4012a (the speed of one rotation in 6 seconds).

Further, when the friction rotating member 4013 continuously rotates and the release recess 4013e is arranged at a position (lower side in FIG. 32A) facing the drive disk 4012a, the second friction with the drive disk 4012a. The disc 4013c is separated from the disk 4013c, and the transmission of the driving force is released. Therefore, even if the arrangement of the friction rotating member 4013 in the axial direction continues to maintain the arrangement shown in FIG. 32 (a), the friction rotating member 4013 is arranged at a position where the release recess 4013e is arranged so as to face the drive disk 4012a. The driving force transmission is released by the posture (with a rotation amount of less than one round).

As shown in FIG. 32B, when the second variable winning device 650 is in the open state, the first friction disk 4013b and the drive disk 4012b are in contact with each other. Therefore, in this state, the friction rotating member 4013 rotates at the rotation speed of the driving disk 4012b (the speed at which one rotation occurs in 6 seconds).

As described above, in the state shown in FIG. 32A (after maintaining this state for 6 seconds or more), the friction rotating member 4013 has a posture in which the release recess 4013e is arranged to face the drive disk 4012a. Since the posture is maintained at the same time, the posture of the friction rotating member 4013 at the moment when the second variable winning device 650 is opened can be unified every time. That is, the driving force transmission between the first friction disk 4013b and the driving disk 4012b can be started in a posture in which the release recess 4013e is arranged so as to face the driving disk 4012a. As a result, the posture of the friction rotating member 4013 after a lapse of a predetermined time after changing the second variable winning device 650 from the closed state to the open state can be grasped on the control side.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 32B, the second friction disk 4013c and the driving disk 4012b are always in contact with each other, so that the driving force is constantly transmitted. On the other hand, since the projecting rib 4014a and the projecting engaging portion 4013d do not abut in the circumferential direction, the state of the flow prevention plate 1015 does not change even if the state shown in FIG. 32B is maintained for a long time. Therefore, it is possible for the player to be less aware that the friction rotating member 4013 continues to change its posture. From these configurations, it is possible to switch whether the flow prevention plate 1015 is left in the protruding state or changed to the buried state depending on the length of the period for maintaining the open state. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

33 (a) to 33 (c) are schematic views of the drive motor 4012, the friction rotating member 4013, the rotating disk 4014, and the flow prevention plate 1015 in the direction of the arrow XXXIIIa of FIG. 32 (a). Note that FIG. 33 (a) shows the closed state of the second variable winning device 650, and FIG. 33 (b) shows the state in which the closed state is changed to the open state and 2 seconds have passed. ) Shows the state after switching from the open state to the closed state in the state of FIG. 33 (b) and 4 seconds after the state of FIG. 33 (b).

As shown in FIG. 33 (a), in FIG. 33 (a), the drive motor 4012 rotates in the clockwise direction CW. When the second variable winning device 650 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 33 (a), the friction rotating member 4013 is brought into contact with the first friction disk 4013b and the drive disk 4012b (see FIG. 32). In (a), it rotates in a counterclockwise CCW.

When the state is changed to the closed state after opening for 2 seconds, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the projecting rib 4014a is arranged in the traveling direction of the projecting engaging portion 4013d, so that the friction disk member 4013 The rotating disk 4014 rotates as the protruding rib 4014a is pushed by the protruding engaging portion 4013d while the rotating disk 4013d continues to rotate. As a result, the flow-down prevention plate 1015 changes its state from the protruding state to the buried state.

After that, the friction rotation member 4013 continues to rotate until the posture shown in FIG. 33 (c), and the transmission of the driving force from the drive motor 4012 is released. Since the flow prevention plate 1015 returns to the protruding state by the elastic spring 3011a, the rotating disk 4014 also rotates from the state shown in FIG. 33 (c) based on the movement, and returns to the state shown in FIG. 33 (a).

In this way, the flow-down prevention plate is maintained by maintaining the open state for a period slightly shorter than half of the time required for one rotation of the drive motor 4012 (2.5 seconds or less in this embodiment) and then maintaining the closed state. It is possible to form a state in which 1015 has changed to a buried state.

34 (a) to 34 (c) are schematic views of the drive motor 4012, the friction rotating member 4013, the rotating disk 4014, and the flow prevention plate 1015 in the direction of the arrow XXXIIIa of FIG. 32 (a). It should be noted that FIG. 34 (a) shows the closed state of the second variable winning device 650, and FIG. 34 (b) shows the state in which the closed state is changed to the open state and 4 seconds have passed. ) Shows the state after switching from the open state to the closed state in the state of FIG. 34 (b) and 2 seconds after the state of FIG. 34 (b).

When the second variable winning device 650 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 34 (a), the friction rotating member 4013 is brought into contact with the first friction disk 4013b and the drive disk 4012b (see FIG. 32). In (a), it rotates in a counterclockwise CCW.

When the state is changed to the closed state after opening for 4 seconds, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the protrusion rib 4014a is not arranged in the traveling direction of the protrusion engagement portion 4013d, so that the friction disk member 4013 becomes The projecting rib 4014a is placed in place while the rotation continues. Therefore, the rotating disk 4014 is not rotated, and the flow prevention plate 1015 is maintained in a protruding state.

After that, the friction rotating member 4013 continues to rotate until the posture shown in FIG. 34 (c), and the driving force transmission from the driving motor 4012 is released. In this way, the flow-down prevention plate is maintained by maintaining the open state for a period slightly longer than half of the time required for one rotation of the drive motor 4012 (3.5 seconds or more in this embodiment) and then maintaining the closed state. The 1015 can be maintained in a protruding state.

During the period of maintaining the open state from 2.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds for 1 second, the projecting engaging portion 4013d and the projecting rib 4014a may come into contact with each other in the axial direction, which may cause a failure. Therefore, in this period, the control program is constructed so as not to change from the open state to the closed state. As described above, the operation of the flow prevention plate 1015 can be changed only by changing the period for maintaining the open state by a few seconds. This will be described with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a will be described. FIG. 35 (a) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and FIG. 35 (b) is a diagram showing the second specific winning in the 12th round of the jackpot B. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the mouth 650a.

First, FIG. 35 (a) will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 35 (a) shows the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 35 (a). The lower graph shows the timed change (whether it is in the protruding state or the buried state) of the flow prevention plate 1015.

As shown in FIG. 35 (a), when the 12th round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) shorter than 2.5 seconds. Then, when the predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is closed. After that, after maintaining the closed state for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) for 6 seconds or more from the start of the 12th round, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). Then, when the predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is closed. That is, it is opened for 2 seconds and then closed for 4 seconds, and repeated a plurality of times, and a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed from the start of the 12th round, or until 10 balls are won in the 12th round) has elapsed. By doing so, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed, and the twelfth round ends. In addition, this closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the flow prevention plate 1015 changes to the buried state every time the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is maintained in the closed state for 4 seconds. Therefore, while creating a state in which a ball can enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, the flow prevention plate 1015 is inserted each time the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. By changing to the buried state, it is possible to make it difficult to store the sphere on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040. That is, a ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a after opening for 2 seconds is flown toward the normal entry opening 1033 each time the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. As long as three balls do not enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a in one opening (2 seconds), the tilting member 1040 may not tilt. Further, in the present embodiment, the upstream side of the second variable winning device 650 is formed so that the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a at a pace of about one ball per second. Therefore, during the one-time opening of the second specific winning opening 650a, 10 or more balls do not enter the second specific winning opening 650a.

As a result, in the jackpot A, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation entry ball opening 1031 while maintaining a state in which the prize ball at the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a can be sufficiently secured. Therefore, in most cases where the jackpot A is reached, the ball does not enter the probability variation entry ball opening 1031 during the special game state (during the jackpot), so that it is difficult to set the probability variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35 (b), the time change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot B will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 35 (b) shows the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 35 (b). The lower graph shows the timed change (whether it is in the protruding state or the buried state) of the flow prevention plate 1015.

As shown in FIG. 35 (b), when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time of 3 seconds or more (for example, 4 seconds), and the second specified winning opening (second large opening) is opened. After a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. Then, after maintaining the closed state for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds), and the predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) is opened. After that, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. The closed state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). And it is released again.

That is, it is opened for 4 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds, and the predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed from the start of the 12th round or until 10 balls are won in the 12th round) has elapsed. By doing so, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed, and the twelfth round ends. Then, in the interval period, the second second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and when the predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses, the second specific is specified. The winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. In addition, this closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the flow prevention plate 1015 operates differently from the 12th round of the jackpot A. That is, the flow prevention plate 1015 forms a buried state when the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in 2.5 seconds or less and then maintained in the closed state for about 3 seconds. In the jackpot B, the second specific winning opening is formed. Since the open state of the 650a is maintained for 4 seconds and then the closed state is maintained for 2 seconds, the above-mentioned opening / closing conditions are not met, and the flow prevention plate 1015 maintains the protruding state throughout the 12th round. ..

Therefore, from the start of the 12th round of the jackpot B to the end of the 12th round, the state in which the ball can easily enter the second specific winning opening 650a is maintained, and the ball is stored in the tilting member 1040. A state that is easy to do is maintained. As a result, the tilting member 1040 can be easily tilted by the weight of the ball, and at the jackpot B, the ball can easily pass through the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031. Therefore, the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state after the jackpot ends. It will be easier.

In the jackpot B, in the open state for several seconds during the interval, the flow prevention plate 1015 is forcibly buried, and the ball remaining on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 is normally flowed toward the ball entry port 1033. Because.

In this way, the operation mode of the second specific winning opening 650a after the start of the 12th round is a similar operation mode in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a few seconds, then closed, and then opened again for a few seconds, while the jackpot A and the jackpot B Therefore, it is possible to form a case where it is easy to set the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends (see FIG. 35 (b)) and a case where it is difficult to set the probabilistic state of the special symbol (see FIG. 35 (a)). it can. As a result, it is difficult for the player to know whether the jackpot is the jackpot A or the jackpot B for a while after the start of the 12th round, and the player's expectation can be maintained longer during the game.

The number of rounds for opening the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to the twelfth round, and may be set to any round. Further, the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened in a plurality of rounds. For example, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a may be opened in the first round and the fifteenth round. May be set to. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the probability-changing ball opening 1031, so that it is possible to more easily enter the probability-changing state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot B. Therefore, even though the jackpot B is won, the ball cannot be entered into the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a, which lowers the player's motivation for the game. It can be prevented (suppressed).

As described above, the flow prevention plate 1015 is buried in the jackpot for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) of 2.5 seconds or less from the start of the 12th round to the second specific winning opening 650a. This is when the condition of maintaining the closed state for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) after maintaining the open state is satisfied. That is, the opening / closing pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a in which the flow prevention plate 1015 maintains the protruding state is not limited to the pattern shown in FIG. 35 (b). An example thereof will be described with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the time change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot B (No. 2) will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 36 shows the time change (whether it is open or closed) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and the lower graph of FIG. 7 shows the time change (whether it is open or closed). , Shows the timekeeping change (whether it is in a protruding state or a buried state) of the flow prevention plate 1015.

As shown in FIG. 36, when the twelfth round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), and the predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) is opened. ) Elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. Then, after maintaining the closed state for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), and the predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) is opened. ) Elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. The closed state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds). When the predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) elapses, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened.

Then, after maintaining the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is closed. The closed state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds). And it is released again.

That is, only at the start of the 12th round, the closing time after opening for 2 seconds is set to 2 seconds, then opening for 2 seconds, and then repeating closing for 4 seconds, for a predetermined time (for example, from the start of the 12th round). After 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls have won in the 12th round), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed, and the 12th round is completed. Then, in the interval period, the second second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and when the predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses, the second specific is specified. The winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. In addition, this closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

By opening and closing the second specific winning opening 650a in this way, the state at the start of the 12th round (that is, the state in which the friction rotating member 4013 is in a posture in which the release recess 4013e is directed toward the drive motor 4012, in other words. In FIG. 36, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) of 2.5 seconds or less from 6n (n is an integer) second after the start of the 12th round, and then closed. It is possible to eliminate the operation pattern of maintaining the closed state for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds). Therefore, the flow prevention plate 1015 can be maintained in a protruding state.

Therefore, from the start of the 12th round of the jackpot B (No. 2) to the end of the 12th round, the state in which the ball can easily enter the second specific winning opening 650a is maintained, and the tilting member 1040 is maintained. The state in which balls can be easily stored is maintained. As a result, the tilting member 1040 can be easily tilted by the weight of the ball, and in the jackpot B (No. 2), the ball can be easily passed through the probability variation entry ball opening 1031. Therefore, the probability variation of the special symbol after the jackpot ends. It becomes easier to set the state.

On the other hand, the operation pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a shown in FIG. 36 is the operation pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a at the time of the jackpot A shown in FIG. 35 (a) after 4 seconds have passed from the start. Is the same as. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the type of jackpot from the operation pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a. As a result, it is possible to direct the player to visually confirm whether or not the ball can be stored in the tilting member 1040, and it is possible to improve the attention power in the vicinity of the tilting member 1040.

In the jackpot B (No. 2), in the open state for several seconds during the interval, the flow prevention plate 1015 is forcibly buried, and the ball remaining on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 is usually the ball entry port 1033. This is to let it flow toward.

In this way, the operation mode of the second specific winning opening 650a after the start of the 12th round is a similar operation mode in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a few seconds, then closed, and then opened again for a few seconds, while the jackpot A and the jackpot B In (2), a case where it is easy to set the special symbol probabilistic state after the jackpot ends (see FIG. 36) and a case where it is difficult to set the special symbol probabilistic state (see FIG. 35 (a)) are formed. Can be done. This makes it difficult for the player to know whether the jackpot is jackpot A or jackpot B (part 2) for a while after the start of the 12th round, and keeps the player's expectation longer during the game. be able to.

As described above, according to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to change whether or not the flow-down prevention plate 1015 is in the buried state after closing, depending on the length of the opening time of the second variable winning device 650. In addition, the length of the opening time is not limited to the elapsed time from each opening, but there is a period in which the elapsed time from the first opening operation can be adopted, and from the middle of this period, the opening time from the first opening Then, the second variable winning device 650 is opened and then closed in the opening time that does not change the state of the flow prevention plate 1015, so that the flow prevention plate 1015 can be changed to the buried state. As a result, the operation of the second variable winning device 650 for each jackpot type can form a period in which the operation modes are the same, so that it is difficult for the player to notice the difference in the jackpot type from the operation of the second variable winning device 650. can do.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41. In the first embodiment, the case where the flow prevention plate 1015 is driven based on the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 650 has been described, but the storage device 5000 in the fifth embodiment is the two variable winning device 650. It is configured to switch whether or not to drive the flow prevention plate 1015 based on the number of times of opening and closing. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is set so as not to open and close (so-called small hit) except during the big hit period. Therefore, the number of times of opening and closing of the second variable winning device 650, which will be described later, is entirely due to the operation during the jackpot game.

FIG. 37 (a) is a front view of the storage device 5000 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 37 (b) is a top view of the storage device 5000 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a). In FIG. 37 (a), the main body plate portion 1001 is not shown, and in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b), the guide flow path 1020, the branch flow path 1030, and the tilting member 1040 are drawn by imaginary lines. Illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b), the storage device 5000 includes a main body plate portion 1001, a ball stopper 5100 disposed on the back surface of the main body plate portion 1001, and the above-described induction flow path. It mainly includes a 1020, a branch flow path 1030, and a tilting member 1040.

A second specific winning device 650 is arranged on the back side of the main body plate portion 1001. In the second embodiment, as in the third embodiment, in the second specific winning device 650, the rigid rod B31 transmits the driving force to the opening / closing plate 650b via the connecting groove C31 by operating the solenoid 650c in the left-right direction. Consists of aspects.

The rigid rod B31 includes a claw portion B51 formed from an elastic member in a leaf spring shape. The claw portion B51 is arranged so as to face the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member 5120, which will be described later, and is viewed in the axial direction of the rotating member 5120 with respect to a straight line L51 that is ejected from the center of the rotating member 5120 and intersects the rigid rod B31 perpendicularly. It is extended so as to be inclined toward the side close to the solenoid 650c.

Therefore, when the rigid rod B31 moves toward the solenoid 650c while the rotating member 5120 and the claw portion B51 are in contact with each other, the tip portion of the claw portion B51 pierces the rotating member 5120 (the driving force is transmitted by point contact). Since it acts on the rotating member 5120 in this manner, the rotating member 5120 can be easily rotated. On the other hand, when the rigid rod B31 moves in the direction away from the solenoid 650c, the abdomen portion of the claw portion B51 acts on the rotating member 5120 in a manner of rubbing against the outer circumference of the rotating member 5120, which makes it difficult to rotate the rotating member 5120. Can be done. As a result, by driving and releasing the solenoid 650c once (by moving the rigid rod B31 back and forth once to the left and right), the second variable winning device 650 opens and closes only once, and the rotating member 5120 Can be rotated in a predetermined direction (in the present embodiment, FIG. 37 (a) counterclockwise direction).

The ball stopper 5100 includes a shaft rod portion 5110 projecting from the back surface of the main body plate portion 1001 in a rod shape, a rotating member 5120 pivotally supported by the shaft rod portion 5110, and a main body plate portion of the rotating member 5120. It mainly includes an urging portion 5130 that applies a load to a surface that faces the 1001 and a switching device 5140 that operates the flow-down prevention plate 5015 according to the posture of the rotating member 5120.

The rotating member 5120 is a member whose outer peripheral surface is always in contact with the claw portion B51 and rotates by the action of the claw portion B51. The rotating member 5120 will be described with reference to FIG. 38.

38 (a) is a front view of the rotating member 5120, FIG. 38 (b) is a top view of the rotating member 5120 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIIb of FIG. 38 (a), and FIG. 38 (c) is a top view of the rotating member 5120. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the rotating member 5120 in the line XXXVIIIc-XXXVIIIc of FIG. 38 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (c), the rotating member 5120 is mounted on the main body disk 5121 pivotally supported by the shaft rod portion 5110 (see FIG. 37) and the outer peripheral surface of the main body disk 5121. A plurality of outer peripheral engaging portions 5122, which are serrated portions to be formed and are juxtaposed with a uniform angle (22.5 degrees each, divided into 16 equal parts in the present embodiment) from the shaft rod portion 5110, and a main body circle. A concave portion extending along a straight line extending radially from the shaft rod portion 5110 at a position equal to the shaft rod portion 5110 on the surface of the plate 5121 facing the main body plate portion 1001, and is an outer peripheral engaging portion 5122. A plurality of positioning recesses 5123 are arranged so as to be offset by an angle similar to the angle at which they are arranged (22.5 degrees), and one side in the axial direction on the outer peripheral side from the position where the positioning recesses 5123 are formed (FIG. 38 (FIG. 38). a) A plurality of switching projecting portions 5124 projecting from the front side of the paper surface) and a detection pin 5125 projecting eccentrically to the other side in the axial direction are mainly provided.

When the outer peripheral engaging portion 5122 is arranged on the upper side of the main body disk 5121, the outer peripheral engaging portion 5122 is formed in an unevenly inclined manner on the left and right sides, with a sharp rise on the right side in the front view and a gentle descent on the left side in the front view. As a result, the driving force is satisfactorily transmitted when the claw portion B51 (see FIG. 37 (a)) moves to the left, and when the claw portion B51 moves to the right, the outer circumference is engaged from the claw portion B51. It is possible to make it difficult for a load in the rotational direction to be generated on the portion 5122.

The positioning recess 5123 is arranged at a position where it overlaps the urging portion 5130 (see FIG. 37 (a)) in a front view, and the tip of the urging portion 5130 is formed from a shape that allows internal fitting. In the present embodiment, the tip of the urging portion 5130 is spherical, and the width of the positioning recess 5123 in the circumferential direction is equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere at the tip of the urging portion 5130. Therefore, the tip of the urging portion 5130 is the positioning recess. By fitting into the 5123, the posture of the rotating member 5120 can be maintained with little misalignment.

The switching protrusion 5124 is a protrusion having an inclined surface portion 5124a that gently inclines toward both sides in the circumferential direction. The inclined surface portion 5124a can reduce the resistance generated when the rotating member 5120 rotates and comes into contact with the short arm portion 5142b of the switching device 5140, and can reduce the load applied to the solenoid 650c.

In the present embodiment, it is composed of a pair of protrusions formed from the same shape, and they are arranged at positions offset by 45 degrees with respect to the shaft rod portion 5110. The detection pin 5125 is a protrusion that is detected by the position sensor 5144 described later and is used for grasping the posture of the rotating member 5120.

It will be described back to FIG. 37. The urging portion 5130 includes a support cylinder 5131 extending in a tubular shape from the back surface of the main body plate portion 1001 to the rear, a spherical fitting piece 5132 arranged inside the support cylinder 5131, and fitting thereof. It mainly includes an elastic spring 5133 between the piece 5132 and the main body plate portion 1001 and arranged inside the support cylinder 5131.

As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the tip of the support cylinder 5131 is extended to a position where the gap between the support cylinder 5131 and the rotating member 5120 is smaller than the diameter of the fitting piece 5132. As a result, the fitting piece 5132 is always maintained inside the support cylinder 5131, and the fitting piece 5132 is pressed against the rotating member 5120 by the elastic force of the elastic spring 5133.

The switching device 5140 is rotatably supported by a base plate portion 5141 extending rearward from the back surface of the main body plate portion 1001 and a shaft inserted vertically through the base plate portion 5141, and one arm portion is rotatably supported. A rotating arm portion 5142 connected to the flow prevention plate 5015, a contraction spring 5143 connecting the vicinity of the tip of the long arm portion 5142a of the rotating arm portion 5142 and the main body plate portion 1001 to give a load in the pulling direction, and a base plate portion. It mainly includes a position sensor 5144 which is arranged in 5141 and a detection groove is arranged at a position where the detection pin 5125 can pass.

The rotating arm portion 5142 includes a long arm portion 5142a connected to the flow-down prevention plate 5015 and a short arm portion 5142b extending on the opposite side of the long arm portion 5142a with the rotation axis interposed therebetween, and the short arm portion 5142b. Is pressed against the front side surface of the rotating member 5120.

Next, the operation of the rotating member 5120 and the switching device 5140 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. In the description of FIG. 39, FIG. 37 will be referred to as appropriate. 39 (a) is a front view of the storage device 5000, and FIG. 39 (b) is a top view of the storage device 5000 in the direction of arrow XXXIXb of FIG. 39 (a). In FIG. 39 (a), the main body plate portion 1001 is not shown, and in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), the guide flow path 1020, the branch flow path 1030, and the tilting member 1040 are drawn by imaginary lines. Illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), switching is performed by rotating the rotating member 5120 to a position where the switching protruding portion 5124 of the rotating member 5120 comes into contact with the short arm portion 5142b of the switching device 5140. The short arm portion 5142b is pushed by the projecting portion 5124, and the rotating arm portion 5142 rotates (see FIG. 39 (b)). In this state, the flow prevention plate 5015 forms a buried state.

As described above, as for the rotating arm portion 5142, the arm extending toward the rotating member 5120 side (short arm portion 5142b) with respect to the rotation axis is the arm extending toward the flow prevention plate 5015 side (the arm extending toward the flow prevention plate 5015 side). It is shorter than the long arm part 5142a). Therefore, the long arm portion 5142a can be displaced by a displacement larger than the displacement of the tip of the short arm portion 5142b, so that the amount of displacement of the short arm portion 5142b required to make the flow prevention plate 5015 buried is small. can do. Thereby, the rotating member 5120 can be formed compactly.

In the present embodiment, when the second variable winning device 650 changes from the closed state to the open state, the claw portion B51 pushes the outer peripheral engaging portion 5122 of the rotating member 5120 and is positioned to be fitted with the urging portion 5130. The recess 5123 is rotated so as to be displaced next to each other. In other words, when the second variable winning device 650 changes from the closed state to the open state once, the rotating member 5120 rotates by 1/16 lap (22.5 degrees) (changes to the open state 16 times). By doing so, the rotating member 5120 makes one rotation). As described above, when the second variable winning device 650 changes from the open state to the closed state, a load in the circumferential direction is unlikely to occur from the claw portion B51 to the rotating member 5120, and the rotating member 5120 maintains its posture. By repeating the opening and closing operation of the second variable winning device 650, the posture of the rotating member 5120 is changed in order.

In the present embodiment, the rotating member 5120 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front by opening and closing the second variable winning device 650. That is, by performing the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 650 four times, the state shown in FIG. 39 can be changed to the state shown in FIG. 37.

In the present embodiment, the initial posture of the rotating member 5120 is the posture shown in FIG. 37 (a) (the posture in which the detection pin 5125 is arranged inside the position sensor 5144), and the second variable winning device 650 is 12 from the initial posture. The flow-down prevention plate 5015 is in the buried state only in the release posture (see FIG. 39 (a)) formed after the opening / closing operation. Therefore, by changing the operation mode of the second variable winning device 650, it is possible to change whether or not the balls are likely to be accumulated inside the storage device 5000. This will be described with reference to FIG. 40.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a will be described. FIG. 40 (a) is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot A, and FIG. 40 (b) is a diagram showing the second specific winning in the 12th round of the jackpot B. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the mouth 650a.

First, FIG. 40A will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 40 (a) shows the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 40 (a). The lower graph shows the timed change (whether it is in the protruding state or the buried state) of the flow prevention plate 5015.

As shown in FIG. 40A, when the twelfth round is started, the opening / closing operation for 0.5 seconds (a short time during which the ball cannot enter the ball) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 11 times). After that, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened (12th opening), and the ball is released for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed from the start of the 12th round, or in the 12th round. (Until 10 prizes are won) The second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed, and then, during the interval, the number of opening and closing from the start of the 12th round becomes 16 times. The opening and closing operation is performed for 0.5 seconds (a short time that makes it impossible for the ball to enter) each time (for example, 4 times), and after the opening and closing operation, the closed state is maintained, and the 12th round is performed. finish. In addition, this closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

It should be noted that it is set so that 10 or more balls do not enter the second variable winning device 650 within a predetermined number of opening / closing operations (for example, 11 times). In the present embodiment, the upstream path of the second variable winning device 650 is formed so that the ball reaches the second variable winning device 650 once per second, so that the opening and closing operation is performed 11 times (about). This is ensured by configuring the second variable winning device 650 so that 10 or more balls do not reach the second variable winning device 650 (during operation for 5.5 seconds).

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the flow prevention plate 5015 maintains the protruding state until just before the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a performs the 12th opening operation, and the 12th opening. When the operation is performed, the state changes to the buried state, and when the 13th opening operation is performed, the protruding state is obtained again. Further, when the 14th opening operation is performed, it becomes a buried state, and when the 15th opening operation is performed, it becomes a protruding state. Here, in a state where the second variable winning device 650 is opened for a long time and a large number of balls can be entered, the flow prevention plate 5015 is in a buried state, so that it is difficult to store the balls in the storage device 5000. Further, after the twelfth opening operation of the second variable winning device 650, the flow prevention plate 5015 is put into the buried state again, so that all the balls can flow to the tip of the flow prevention plate 5015. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the special gaming state (big hit state) from ending while the ball that has entered the second variable winning device 650 immediately before the end of the twelfth opening remains on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040.

In this way, while creating a state in which a ball can enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, the flow prevention plate 5015 is maintained in a buried state, so that the ball is difficult to accumulate in the storage device 5000. Can be formed.

As a result, in the jackpot A, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variation entry ball opening 1031 while maintaining a state in which the prize ball at the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a can be sufficiently secured. Therefore, in most cases where the jackpot A is reached, the ball does not enter the probability variation entry ball opening 1031 during the special game state (during the jackpot), so that it is difficult to set the probability variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40 (b), the time change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot B will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 40 (b) shows the time change (whether it is in the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening (second large open opening) 650a, and is shown in FIG. 40 (b). The lower graph shows the timed change (whether it is in the protruding state or the buried state) of the flow prevention plate 5015.

As shown in FIG. 40 (b), when the 12th round is started, the opening / closing operation for 0.5 seconds (a short time during which the ball cannot enter the ball) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). After that, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened (11th opening), and the ball is released for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed from the start of the 12th round, or in the 12th round. (Until 10 prizes are won) The second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed, and then, during the interval, the number of opening and closing from the start of the 12th round becomes 16 times. The opening and closing operation is performed for 0.5 seconds (a short time that makes it impossible for the ball to enter) each time (for example, 5 times), and after the opening and closing operation, the closed state is maintained, and the 12th round is performed. finish. In addition, this closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached.

It should be noted that the opening and closing operation of a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) is set so that 10 or more balls do not enter the second variable winning device 650. In the present embodiment, the upstream path of the second variable winning device 650 is formed so that the ball reaches the second variable winning device 650 once per second, so that the opening and closing operation is performed 10 times (about). This is ensured by configuring so that 10 or more balls do not reach the second variable winning device 650 (during operation for 5.0 seconds).

Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the flow prevention plate 5015 maintains the protruding state until just before the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a performs the 12th opening operation, and the 12th opening. When the operation is performed, the state changes to the buried state, and when the 13th opening operation is performed, the protruding state is obtained again. Further, when the 14th opening operation is performed, it becomes a buried state, and when the 15th opening operation is performed, it becomes a protruding state. Here, in the state where the second variable winning device 650 is opened for a long time and a large number of balls can be entered (the 11th open state), the flow prevention plate 5015 is in a protruding state, so that the balls are put into the storage device 5000. It will be easy to store.

Further, the 11th open state of the second variable winning device 650 is closed after a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed from the start of the 12th round, or until 10 balls have been won in the 12th round). Even so, since the flow prevention plate 5015 maintains the protruding state until the second variable winning device 650 performs the twelfth opening operation, it is necessary to control the period from the eleventh closing operation to the twelfth opening operation. Therefore, it is possible to secure the time until the ball that has entered just before the lapse of the predetermined time reaches the tilting member 1040.

In the 12th round of the jackpot B, the flow prevention plate 5015 operates differently from the 12th round of the jackpot A. That is, the flow prevention plate 5015 is maintained in a protruding state while the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a long time in a manner in which the ball can enter.

Therefore, from the start of the 12th round of the jackpot B to the end of the 12th round, the state in which the ball can easily enter the second specific winning opening 650a is maintained, and the ball is stored in the tilting member 1040. A state that is easy to do is maintained. As a result, the tilting member 1040 can be easily tilted by the weight of the ball, and at the jackpot B, the ball can easily pass through the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031. Therefore, the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state after the jackpot ends. It will be easier.

In the jackpot B, by repeating the opening and closing operation several times during the interval, the flow prevention plate 1015 is changed to the buried state, and the ball remaining on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 is flowed toward the normal entry port 1033. Is controlled by.

In this way, the operation mode of the second specific winning opening 650a after the start of the 12th round is similar to the operation mode of maintaining the open state with a length that allows the ball to enter after performing the opening and closing operations a plurality of times. In the case where the jackpot A and the jackpot B are likely to be set to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 40B), and when it is difficult to set the probabilistic state of the special symbol (FIG. 40). (See (a)) and can be formed. As a result, it is difficult for the player to know whether the jackpot is the jackpot A or the jackpot B for a while after the start of the 12th round, and the player's expectation can be maintained longer during the game.

Further, it is difficult to correctly count the number of opening / closing operations due to the quickness of the operation, and it is difficult to judge the type of jackpot by looking only at the opening / closing plate 650b of the second variable winning device 650. is there. Therefore, it is certain that the type of jackpot is determined by whether the flow prevention plate 5015 is in the protruding state or the buried state.

However, since the operation direction of the flow prevention plate 5015 is the front-rear direction and the position in the front view does not change, the protruding state and the buried state are similarly visually recognized in the front view. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish the difference from the front view. Further, even if an attempt is made to look into from above, the line of sight is blocked by the outer edge member 73 (see FIG. 2) and the upper wall surface of the branch flow path 1030, making it difficult to look into.

Therefore, depending on how the sphere actually flows down the branch flow path 1030, it can be directed to confirm the type of jackpot. As a result, the attention force of the branch flow path 1030 and the tilting member 1040 arranged inside the branch flow path 1030 can be improved, and the movement of the sphere flowing down inside the branch flow path 1030 can be noticed.

The number of rounds for opening the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to the twelfth round, and may be set to any round. Further, the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened in a plurality of rounds. For example, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a may be opened in the first round and the fifteenth round. May be set to. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the probability-changing ball opening 1031, so that it is possible to more easily enter the probability-changing state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot B. Therefore, even though the jackpot B is won, the ball cannot be entered into the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a, which lowers the player's motivation for the game. It can be prevented (suppressed).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the state of the flow-down prevention plate 5015 is switched depending on the number of times the second specific winning device 650 is opened and closed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to control not to return to the initial position. The control mode will be described with reference to FIG. 41.

FIG. 41 (a) is a diagram showing the time change (whether the open state or the closed state) of the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot A (No. 2). (B) and FIG. 41 (c) are diagrams showing the time-dependent changes (whether the flow-down prevention plate 5015 is in a protruding state or a buried state). In addition, FIG. 41 (b) shows the timekeeping change of the flow prevention plate 5015 at the time of the first big hit when the big hit A (No. 2) occurs continuously, and FIG. 41 (c) shows the big hit A. The timekeeping change of the flow prevention plate 5015 at the time of the second big hit when (No. 2) occurs continuously is shown. That is, in the jackpot A (No. 2) of the same type, the time change of the flow prevention plate 5015 is different.

As shown in FIG. 41 (a), when the twelfth round is started, the opening / closing operation for 0.5 seconds (a short time during which the ball cannot enter the ball) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 11 times). After that, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened (12th opening), and the ball is released for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed from the start of the 12th round, or in the 12th round. The second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed after 10 winnings (until 10 winnings are won), and then, during the interval, the number of opening and closing from the start of the 12th round becomes 20 times. The opening and closing operation is performed for 0.5 seconds (a short time that makes it impossible for the ball to enter) each time (for example, 8 times), and after the opening and closing operation, the closed state is maintained, and the 12th round is performed. finish. In addition, this closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next 12 rounds of big hits are reached. That is, in this operation mode, it is permissible that the rotating member 5120 does not enter the initial posture (see FIG. 37) at the end of the special gaming state (big hit state).

It should be noted that it is set so that 10 or more balls do not enter the second variable winning device 650 within a predetermined number of opening / closing operations (for example, 11 times). In the present embodiment, the upstream path of the second variable winning device 650 is formed so that the ball reaches the second variable winning device 650 once per second, so that the opening and closing operation is performed 11 times (about). This is ensured by configuring the second variable winning device 650 so that 10 or more balls do not reach the second variable winning device 650 (during operation for 5.5 seconds).

Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), in the 12th round of the first jackpot A (No. 2), the flow prevention plate 5015 has the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 650a for the 12th round. The protruding state is maintained until immediately before the opening operation, and the 12th opening operation changes to the buried state, and the 13th opening operation causes the protruding state again. Further, when the 14th opening operation is performed, it becomes a buried state, and when the 15th opening operation is performed, it becomes a protruding state. Here, in a state where the second variable winning device 650 is opened for a long time and a large number of balls can be entered, the flow prevention plate 5015 is in a buried state, so that it is difficult to store the balls in the storage device 5000. Further, after the twelfth opening operation of the second variable winning device 650, the flow prevention plate 5015 is put into the buried state again, so that all the balls can flow to the tip of the flow prevention plate 5015. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the special gaming state (big hit state) from ending while the ball that has entered the second variable winning device 650 immediately before the end of the twelfth opening remains on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040.

In this way, while creating a state in which a ball can enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, the flow prevention plate 5015 is maintained in a buried state, so that the ball is difficult to accumulate in the storage device 5000. Can be formed.

As a result, in the first jackpot A (No. 2), the ball passes through the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031 while maintaining a state in which the prize ball at the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a can be sufficiently secured. It can be difficult to do. Therefore, in most cases of the first jackpot A (No. 2), the ball does not enter the probability change entry ball opening 1031 during the special game state (during the jackpot), so the probability change of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. It becomes difficult to set the state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), at the time of the second jackpot A (No. 2), the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device (second large opening) 650 is the same as that in FIG. 41 (a). Since the posture of the rotating member 5120 is different from the case of the first jackpot A (No. 2), the flow prevention plate 5015 is in a protruding state while the second variable winning device 650 is opened in a time when the ball can be entered. It is said that.

Therefore, in the 12th round of the second jackpot A (No. 2), the flow prevention plate 5015 operates differently from the 12th round of the first jackpot A (No. 2). That is, the flow prevention plate 5015 is maintained in a protruding state while the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a long time in a manner in which the ball can enter.

Therefore, from the start of the 12th round of the second jackpot A (No. 2) to the end of the 12th round, the state in which the ball can easily enter the second specific winning opening 650a is maintained. A state in which the ball is easily stored in the tilting member 1040 is maintained. As a result, the tilting member 1040 can be easily tilted by the weight of the ball, and at the jackpot B, the ball can easily pass through the probabilistic entry ball opening 1031. Therefore, the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state after the jackpot ends. It will be easier.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in a single shot, the operation mode of the flow prevention plate 5015 is a continuous operation mode in which it is difficult to set the probability change state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, and the same jackpot of the same jackpot type. It is possible to form a case in which the operation mode of the flow-down prevention plate 5015 is likely to be set to a probabilistic state of a special symbol after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation even when the jackpot, which is an operation mode that is difficult to be set in the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot in a single shot, is continuously acquired.

Further, since the main body plate portion 1001 is made of a translucent material, the player can grasp the posture of the rotating member 5120, so that the rotation can be used as a selection criterion when selecting the gaming machine to be played. The posture of the member 5120 can be provided to the player as information directly linked to the interest of the player.

That is, when the posture of the rotating member 5120 is viewed and the posture of the rotating member 5120 is changed by an angle of 12 times (12 times of opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 650), the switching protrusion portion 5124 is arranged at which position. Since it is possible to confirm in advance whether or not it is easy to shift to the probability change state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot state when the jackpot A is acquired next time, and if the jackpot A is acquired many times in a row, the jackpot state It is possible to obtain in advance information as to whether or not it will be easy to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the end. As a result, for example, a platform that can easily shift to a probabilistic state of a special symbol by acquiring a jackpot A at the next jackpot, or a jackpot A that is continuously obtained by two or three jackpots, if not the next time. In that case, it is possible to confirm the platform that can easily shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol. As a result, the player confirms the expected value of the subsequent game (for example, the state of the flow prevention plate 5015 is likely to change with a small number of big hits (short period), etc.), and makes a selection when selecting a game machine. Can be used as a reference.

When the number of opening / closing operations of the second variable winning device 650 reaches the least common multiple of 16, the rotating member 5120 takes the initial posture (see FIG. 37) after the jackpot ends. Therefore, according to the operation mode shown in FIG. 41, when the jackpot A (No. 2) is acquired five times in a row, when the jackpot A (No. 2) is acquired the next sixth time, the first jackpot A (No. 2) is acquired. The flow-down prevention plate 5015 operates in the same operation mode as in the case of 2).

If the jackpot is jackpot B, the rotating member 5120 is returned to the initial posture in which the detection pin 5125 is detected by the position sensor 5144 (the ball enters the second variable winning device 650). It is controlled to start the opening / closing operation of the jackpot B after the opening / closing operation for a short time that is impossible is performed a plurality of times. As a result, once the jackpot B is reached, the gameability of resetting the number of jackpots A up to that point can be created. That is, when the jackpot A (No. 2) is drawn multiple times, there is a relief for the player (a relief that makes it easier to set the special symbol to the probabilistic state after the jackpot ends) because the jackpot A (No. 2) is continuously drawn. It is possible to form a playability that is limited to the case of pulling.

Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 46. In the third embodiment, the case where the flow prevention plate 1015 changes to the buried state after a predetermined delay time elapses from the closing of the second variable winning device 650 has been described, but the storage device 6000 in the sixth embodiment has been described. At least while the ball is arranged in the induction flow path 1020, the delay time count is not started, and the flow prevention plate 1015 is configured to maintain the protruding state. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

42 (a) is a front view of the storage device 6000 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 42 (b) is a side view of the storage device 6000 in the direction of arrow XLIIb of FIG. 42 (a). Is a rear view of the storage device 6000, and FIG. 44 is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device 6000 in the XLIV-XLIV line of FIG. 42 (a). In FIGS. 42 and 43, the main body plate portion 1001, the drive motor 3012, the switching clutch 3013, the rotary disk 3014, and the switching member 3016 are illustrated by imaginary lines. Further, in FIG. 42B, the branch flow path 1030 is partially cross-sectionally viewed so that the inside can be visually recognized, and the flow-down prevention plate 1015 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 42 (a), 42 (b), and 43, the storage device 6000 includes a main body plate portion 1001, the above-mentioned ball stop device 3010, an induction flow path 1020, and a branch flow path 1030. The tilting member 1040 is provided in the same manner as in the third embodiment, and in addition, the rotating floor device 6100 which projects inside the induction flow path 1020 and is supported so as to be swingable in the vertical direction, and the inside of the branch flow path 1030. It mainly includes a rotating wall device 6200 that is swingably supported before and after overhanging.

The rotating floor device 6100 is a shaft rod portion 6110 projecting in a columnar shape toward the back surface side of the main body plate portion 1001, and a plate-shaped member rotatably supported by the shaft rod portion 6110, and is an induction flow path 1020. The rotating plate portion 6120 and the shaft rod portion 6110 that operate by the weight of the ball overhanging the inside of the induction flow path 1020 through the operating hole H61, which is a through hole formed by omitting the formation of the lower bottom portion, are sandwiched. An elastic spring 6130 that pulls the rotary plate 6120 downward on the opposite side of the rotary plate 6120, and an engaging arm 6140 that extends upward from the rotary plate 6120 and is configured to be engaged with the switching member 3016. And a support plate 6150 that supports the rotating plate portion 6120 at the time of tilting are mainly provided.

As shown in FIG. 44, the operation hole H61 is formed in such a manner that the bottom portion of the ball receiving recess 1021 is partially scraped. The rotating plate portion 6120 is provided with an extended bottom portion 6121 which is extended to the front side in a form of compensating for the scraped portion of the ball receiving recess 1021 and is formed by raising the ball receiving recess 1021 upward. As a result, the weight of the ball can be continuously applied to the rotating plate portion 6120 (the rotating plate portion 6210 is continuously tilted) from the time when the ball enters the ball receiving recess 1021 until the ball passes through the induction flow path 1020. it can.

The support plate 6150 is a plate portion extending rearward from the back surface of the main body plate portion 1001, and when the rotating floor device 6100 is in an inclined state (see FIG. 45A), the rotating plate portion 6120 is moved. It is a member that supports from below and prevents further tilting. Due to the action of the support plate 6150, the rotating floor device 6100 is as long as the balls are on it, regardless of the number of balls on the rotating plate 6120 (the tilt angle does not increase due to the large number of balls). Can be tilted.

In the rotating floor device 6100, in the initial state in which the ball is not on the upper surface of the rotating plate portion 6120, the extended tip of the engaging arm portion 6140 abuts on the transmission posture switching member 3016 from the right side in the front view (engagement). The switching member 3016 starts operating from the start of operation of the arm 6140).

The rotating wall device 6200 has a contact plate portion 6210 capable of swinging in the front-rear direction through an operation hole H62 bored in the branch flow path 1030 in the front-rear direction, and a back side wall of the contact plate portion 6210. The engaging arm 6220, which extends to the right from the rear view and is inclined rearward and upward from the extending tip, and the engaging arm 6220 in the initial state shown in FIG. 42 are contacted from below. It mainly includes a detent portion 6230 extending from the main body plate portion 1001 in a contacting manner.

The operation hole H62 is arranged at a position where the ball and the operation hole H62 overlap each other only after the third ball is stored in the tilt member 1040 in the front view (only two balls are stored in the tilt member 1040). If not, the sphere, the sphere, and the operation hole H62 are arranged at positions where they do not overlap).

The operation hole H62 is provided with a recessed portion extending from both sides in the left-right direction at the upper end portion thereof and recessed from the back surface side, and the recessed portion is extended in a columnar shape in the left-right direction from the upper end portion of the contact plate portion 6210. The abutting plate portion 6210 is swingably supported by the branch flow path 1030 by fitting the shaft rod portion 6211 from the back surface side.

The contact plate portion 6210 includes a receiving surface portion 6212 formed on the left side portion of the front side wall surface in a front view so as to be inclined toward the rear side toward the left side. The receiving surface portion 6212 reduces the resistance between the contact plate portion 6210 and the sphere when the sphere moved from the left side to the right in the front view of the contact plate portion 6210 comes into contact with the contact plate portion 6210. be able to.

Further, since the receiving surface portion 6212 has the above-mentioned shape, the ball dropped from directly above is passed to the left. As a result, when the ball is discharged from the right side of the discharge port 1024 to the front side, the ball comes into contact with the receiving surface portion 6212, so that the ball can be given momentum toward the left side in the front view. As a result, even though the tilting member 1040 is not in the tilted state, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing to the right of the tilting member 1040 and flowing down to the probabilistic change side flow path 1032.

As shown in FIG. 42B, the extension tip of the engaging arm portion 6220 is arranged behind the switching member 3016. Therefore, by tilting the abutting plate portion 6210 downward (operating in the clockwise direction in FIG. 42B), the engaging arm portion 6220 can be brought closer to the switching member 3016.

Next, a case where the ball is placed on the upper surface of the rotating plate portion 6120 of the rotating floor device 6100 will be described with reference to FIG. 45. 45 (a) is a front view of the storage device 6000, and FIG. 45 (b) is a side view of the storage device 6000 in the direction of arrow XLVb of FIG. 45 (a). In FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b), the main body plate portion 1001, the drive motor 3012, the switching clutch 3013, and the switching member 3016 are illustrated by imaginary lines. Further, in FIG. 45B, the branch flow path 1030 is partially cross-sectionally viewed so that the inside can be visually recognized, and the flow-down prevention plate 1015 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 45 (a), when a sphere flows down the induction flow path 1020, the rotating plate portion 6120 rotates due to the weight of the sphere, and the rotating floor device 6100 changes to a tilted state (FIG. 45 (a). )reference). This tilted state is maintained until the ball is discharged from the induction flow path 1020 (from the discharge port 1024), and when the ball is discharged from the guidance flow path 1020, the load applied to the rotating floor device 6100 is released. , The urging force of the elastic spring 6130 returns to the initial state (see FIG. 42).

As shown in FIG. 45A, when the rotating floor device 6100 is tilted, the tip of the engaging arm 6140 pushes the tip of the switching member 3016 to the left in the front view, so that the switching member 3016 is released. It rotates to the posture side (the side where the upper end portion tilts to the left), and the engagement of the switching clutch 3013 is released. Specifically, the posture of the switching member 3016 is not rotated to the releasing posture, but at least it is rotated to the posture of releasing the teeth of the switching clutch 3013 (intermediate posture, see FIG. 45A), and the switching clutch 3013 is rotated. Release the teeth. In this state, the switching member 3016 is not rotated to the release posture. Therefore, in this state, the opening / closing plate 650b of the second variable winning device 650 is not opened, and the ball is opened to the extent that the ball cannot enter. It is said that it has been done.

Therefore, if the ball remains in the induction flow path 1020 after the second variable winning device 650 is closed, the switching clutch 3013 is prevented from being in the transmission state, and at least the ball is transmitted from the induction flow path 1020. It is prevented that the flow prevention plate 1015 is buried until it is discharged. On the other hand, even if the ball remains in the induction flow path 1020, the second variable winning device 650 maintains the state in which the ball cannot enter after the second variable winning device 650 is closed. It is possible to prevent a ball from accidentally entering the second variable winning device 650 after the second variable winning device 650 is closed (after being controlled so as to be closed).

Here, the rotating floor device 6100 releases the meshing of the switching clutch 3013 while the ball is arranged in the induction flow path 1020 to prevent the flow prevention plate 1015 from being buried. After the ball is ejected from the 1020 toward the tilting member 1040, the disengagement of the switching clutch 3013 cannot be maintained. In this case, the ball may flow into the normal side flow path 1034 before the tilting member 1040 tilts, and as a countermeasure, a rotating wall device 6200 is provided. Next, the operation of the rotating wall device 6200 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 46 (a) is a front view of the storage device 6000, and FIG. 46 (b) is a side view of the storage device 6000 in the direction of the arrow XLVIb of FIG. 46 (a). In FIGS. 46A and 46B, the main body plate portion 1001, the drive motor 3012, the switching clutch 3013, and the switching member 3016 are illustrated by imaginary lines. Further, in FIG. 46B, the branch flow path 1030 is partially cross-sectionally viewed so that the inside can be visually recognized, and the flow-down prevention plate 1015 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), a sphere lands on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 from the induction flow path 1020, and the sphere is arranged on the front side of the abutting plate portion 6210. When the 6210 is pushed by the ball, the rotating wall device 6200 changes from the initial state (see FIG. 42) to the upward state (see FIG. 46). In this upward movement, the engaging arm 6220 pushes up the upper end of the switching member 3016 from the lower side, and the switching member 3016 rotates to the release posture side. In this state, the driving force of the switching clutch 3013 is transmitted. Is released. The release of the driving force transmission is maintained as long as the ball is arranged on the front side of the contact plate portion 6210, and the ball moves from the front side of the contact plate portion 6210 to hang from the ball on the contact plate portion 6210. The applied load is eliminated, and the rotating wall device 6200 returns to the initial state under the weight of the engaging arm portion 6220.

As a result, even after the spheres are discharged from the induction flow path 1020, the spheres are arranged in front of the contact plate portion 6210 based on the fact that three spheres are arranged side by side on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040, thereby switching. The driving force transmission of the clutch 3013 can be released. Therefore, the delay time until the flow prevention plate 1015 is buried can be made longer.

Since the contact plate portion 6210 is provided at a position where the balls are arranged on the front side for the first time when three balls are placed on the tilting member 1040, the action of the rotating wall device 6200 is applied to the tilting member 1040 by three balls. It can be exerted only in the state where the individual is stored (the state in which the ball may enter the probabilistic entry ball hole 1031). Therefore, even if a ball enters immediately before the closing of the second variable winning device 650 and the ball is discharged from the induction flow path 1020, for example, one ball also stays on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040. If not (when the first ball is ejected from the induction flow path 1020), the rotating wall device 6200 maintains the initial state, and transmission of the switching clutch 3013 is started.

As a result, there is no possibility that the tilting member 1040 will eventually tilt, and it is possible to prevent the rotating wall device 6200 from delaying the state change of the flow-down prevention plate 1015 even when the ball does not face the probabilistic entry ball port 1031. Therefore, the ball can be quickly discharged to the normal side flow path 1034 so that the player can quickly concentrate on a portion other than the branch flow path 1030 (for example, the third symbol display device 81 or the like).

On the other hand, after three balls are lined up on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040, the switching clutch is used until the balls are removed from the front of the contact plate portion 6210 (until the tilting member 1040 tilts and the balls move). Since the driving force transmission of 3013 remains released, even if the rotation speed of the tilting member 1040 is slightly slowed down, as long as the tilting member 1040 is rotatably formed, the ball is surely changed sideflow. It can be sent to road 1032. As a result, it is possible to prevent a malfunction in which the flow-down prevention plate 1015 is buried before the tilting member 1040 tilts and the ball flows down to the normal side flow path 1034.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49. In the first embodiment, the case where the flow prevention plate 1015 changes to the buried state based on the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 650 has been described, but the storage device 7000 in the seventh embodiment is caused by the action of the flowing ball. The flow prevention plate 1015 is configured to change to a buried state. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 47 (a) is a front view of the storage device 7000 according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 47 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device 7000 in the XLVIIb-XLVIIb line of FIG. 47 (a). In FIG. 47 (a), the main body plate portion 1001 is illustrated by an imaginary line, the rotating floor device 6100 and the rotating wall device 6200 are partially illustrated by hidden lines, and in FIG. 47 (b), the rotating floor is illustrated. The illustration of the device 6100 and the rotating wall device 6200 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the storage device 7000 is tilted with the main body plate portion 1001, the above-mentioned rotating floor device 6100, the rotating wall device 6200, the induction flow path 1020, and the branch flow path 1030. A member 1040 is provided, and in addition, a release flow path 7100 that accommodates a ball that does not enter the second variable winning device 650 and flows down to the left of the opening / closing plate 650b, and can operate inside the release flow path 7100. Mainly includes a swing member 7200 having a fan-shaped cross section formed in the above, and a plate-shaped distribution member 7300 formed operably inside the release flow path 7100.

The release flow path 7100 is a flow path having a cross-sectional area such that one sphere passes through, and branches from the first flow path 7110 and the first flow path 7110 in which the swing member 7200 projects into the flow path. It mainly includes a second flow path 7120, which is a flow path and in which the sphere does not come into contact with the swing member 7200. The ball that has passed through the first flow path 7110 is configured to flow down to the first variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2).

The swing member 7200 is swingably supported by the back side wall portion of the main body plate portion 1001 so as to project inward of the first flow path 7110, and is a plate member extending to the left in the front view from the flow prevention plate 7015. It is urged to the front side by the urging force of the elastic spring 3011a (see FIG. 22B) which is brought into contact with the 7015c and applied to the flow prevention plate 7015, and is in the initial state (see FIG. 47B).

48 (a) is a front view of the storage device 7000, and FIG. 48 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device 7000 in the XLVIIIb-XLVIIIb line of FIG. 48 (a). In FIG. 48 (a), the main body plate portion 1001 is illustrated by an imaginary line, the rotating floor device 6100 and the rotating wall device 6200 are partially illustrated by hidden lines, and in FIG. 48 (b), the rotating floor is illustrated. The illustration of the device 6100 and the rotating wall device 6200 is omitted. Further, a state in which the sphere flows down the first flow path 7110 and the swing member 7200 is changed from the initial state to the extruded state is shown.

As shown in FIG. 48B, when the ball flows down the front side of the swing member 7200 and is in the extruded state, the plate member 7015c of the flow-down prevention plate 7015 is pushed backward, and the flow-down prevention plate 7015 is buried. Form. Further, if the sphere passes below the oscillating member 7200, the load applied to the oscillating member 7200 by the sphere is eliminated, so that the urging force of the elastic spring 3011a causes the flow prevention plate 7015 to return to the protruding state.

By passing the sphere through the first flow path 7110 in this way, the flow prevention plate 7015 can be temporarily buried, so that when the sphere remains in the branch flow path 1030, the sphere is placed on the normal side. It can flow toward the flow path 1034. Therefore, as compared with the case where the state of the flow prevention plate 7015 is changed by the solenoid 650c or another driving device, the arrangement space of the device for transmitting the driving force can be omitted, and the other device (for example, large) can be omitted. It is possible to earn an opening space and a space for arranging the liquid crystal effect device).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, during the special game (big hit game), a ball that happens to fail to enter the second variable winning opening 650 (bounces and jumps out, etc.) passes through the first flow path 7110. If this happens, the flow-down prevention plate 7015 will unexpectedly form a buried state, which may be disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the ball has entered the storage device 7000, the ball that has entered the release flow path 7100 is not the first flow path 7110 but the second flow path 7120. By letting the ball enter the ball, the flow prevention plate 7015 is prevented from being buried. This will be described with reference to FIG.

49 (a) is a front view of the storage device 7000, and FIG. 49 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device 7000 in the XLIXb-XLIXb line of FIG. 49 (a). In FIG. 49 (a), the main body plate portion 1001 is illustrated by an imaginary line, the rotating floor device 6100 and the rotating wall device 6200 are partially illustrated by hidden lines, and in FIG. 49 (b), the rotating floor is illustrated. The illustration of the device 6100 and the rotating wall device 6200 is omitted. Further, the sphere rides on the upper surface of the rotating plate portion 6120, and the distribution state of the distribution member 7300 is shown.

The distribution member 7300 is rotatably supported on the back side of the main body plate portion 1001, and operates based on the operation of the rotating floor device 6100 or the rotating wall device 6200, and the driven arm portion 7310 and the driven arm thereof. It is mainly provided with a movable floor portion 7320 which is integrally formed with the portion 7310 and penetrates from the back surface to the front side of the release flow path 7100 and forms the floor wall of the first flow path 7110.

As shown in FIG. 49 (a), when the ball rides on the upper surface of the rotating plate portion 6120, the engaging arm portion 6140 pushes the driven arm portion 7310 to the left in the front view, whereby the movable floor portion 7320 Is lifted upwards to form a distribution state. When the engaging arm portion 6140 is retracted to the right, the distribution member 7300 returns to the original initial state (see FIG. 47 (a)) due to the weight of the distribution member 7300.

In the distribution state of the distribution member 7300 shown in FIG. 49 (a), the entrance to the first flow path 7110 is narrowed, and a state in which the sphere easily faces the second flow path 7120 can be formed. Further, even if the sphere does not go to the second flow path 7120, the sphere is not allowed to enter the first flow path 7110 as long as the distribution member 7300 maintains the distribution state by the action of the sphere (first flow path 7110). Since the ball is stopped at the entrance of the ball), it is possible to prevent the ball from coming into contact with the swing member 7200, and it is possible to maintain the protruding state of the flow prevention plate 7015.

The effects produced by the rotating floor device 6100 and the rotating wall device 6200 (effects described in the sixth embodiment) depending on the mode of storing the balls in the storage device 7000 are similarly produced in the present embodiment. ..

If the game is played so that the ball does not pass through the first flow path 7110, the flow prevention plate 7015 may not be buried, and the state in which the ball remains in the branch flow path 1030 may be maintained after the big hit game. .. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the time reduction is set after the end of the big hit, the ball spilled from the second entrance 640 (see FIG. 2) enters the release flow path due to the time reduction game after the end of the big hit. It can be made to ball. As a result, the balls remaining in the branch flow path 1030 can be easily flowed to the normal side flow path 1034 by the game after the jackpot game is completed.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. In the sixth embodiment, if a ball remains in the guide flow path 1020, the case where the period until the flow prevention plate 1015 operates is delayed has been described, but the storage device 8000 in the eighth embodiment has the guide flow path 1020. If a ball remains on the surface, the prevention claw portion 8230, which is different from the flow prevention plate 1015, projects. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

50 (a) is a front view of the storage device 8000 according to the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 50 (b) is a partial side view of the storage device 8000 in the direction of arrow Lb of FIG. 50 (a). In FIG. 50, the main body plate portion 1001 is illustrated by an imaginary line. Further, in FIG. 50 (a), the branch flow path 1030 is partially broken so that the rear can be visually recognized, and in FIG. 50 (b), the illustration of the left side wall of the branch flow path 1030 in front view is omitted, and the branch flow The road 1030 is partially broken so that the inside can be seen.

Although not shown, the operation of the flow prevention plate 1015 in the present embodiment is executed by transmitting the driving force by the switching clutch 3013 (see FIG. 42 (a)) as in the sixth embodiment. To.

As shown in FIG. 50 (a), the storage device 8000 tilts the main body plate portion 1001, the above-mentioned rotating floor device 6100, the rotating wall device 6200, the guide flow path 1020, and the branch flow path 1030. A fan member 8100 that includes a member 1040, and is rotatably supported on the back surface of the main body plate portion 1001 and rotates by the operation of the rotating floor device 6100 or the rotating wall device 6200, and the fan member 8100. It mainly includes an overhanging device 8200 that operates in conjunction with the operation and projects inside the branch flow path 1030.

The extension device 8200 includes a pair of gears 8210 rotatably supported on the back surface of the main body plate portion 1001, and an extension arm portion extending in the radial direction from the gear 8210 on the left side of the gears 8210. Prevention of 8220 and a portion extending from the extension tip of the extension arm portion 8220, which is configured to be able to project inward of the branch flow path 1030 through a through hole formed in the side wall of the branch flow path 1030. It mainly includes a claw portion 8230.

The fan member 8100 is pivotally supported by the main body plate portion 1001, and a portion extending upward from the shaft fulcrum is extended to a position where it can come into contact with the engaging arm portion 6140 and the engaging arm portion 6220. On the opposite side, a fan-shaped tip with gear teeth 8110 is formed.

The gear teeth 8110 and the gear 8210 are meshed with each other, and the gear ratio thereof is 1:10 (the gear 8210 is rotated 10 degrees by rotating the fan member 8100 once). ). Therefore, even when the operation of the rotating floor device 6100 or the rotating wall device 6200 is small, the operation of the prevention claw portion 8230 can be increased.

51 (a) is a front view of the storage device 8000, and FIG. 51 (b) is a partial side view of the storage device 8000 in the direction of the arrow LIb of FIG. 51 (a). In FIG. 51 (a), the main body plate portion 1001 is illustrated by an imaginary line. Further, in FIG. 51 (a), the branch flow path 1030 is partially broken so that the rear can be visually recognized, and in FIG. 51 (b), the illustration of the left side wall of the branch flow path 1030 in front view is omitted, and the branch flow The road 1030 is partially broken so that the inside can be seen.

FIG. 51 shows a state in which the ball rides on the rotating plate portion 6120, the engaging arm portion 6140 moves to the left, and the fan member 8100 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the fan member 8100 operates in this way, the gear 8210 on the right side, which is meshed with the fan member 8100, rotates clockwise in the front view, and the gear 8210 on the left side rotates counterclockwise in the front view. As a result, the extended arm portion 8220 extending from the gear 8210 on the left side of the front view rotates counterclockwise in the front view, and the prevention claw portion 8230 projects inward of the branch flow path 1030. As a result, even after the flow-down prevention plate 1015 is in the buried state, the prevention claw portion 8230 can prevent the ball from flowing down to the normal side flow path 1034.

The effects produced by the rotating floor device 6100 and the rotating wall device 6200 (effects described in the sixth embodiment) depending on the mode of storing the balls in the storage device 8000 are similarly produced in the present embodiment. ..

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. In the first embodiment, the case where the ball discharged from the discharge port 1024 is likely to fall on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 on the left side of the rotation axis of the tilting member 1040 in the front view has been described, but the storage device in the ninth embodiment has been described. The 9000 is configured to fall on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 on the right side of the rotation axis of the tilting member 1040 when viewed from the front. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. A mode in which the game ball flows into the storage device 9000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53.

52 (a) is a partial front view of the storage device 9000 according to the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 52 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device 9000 in the LIIb-LIIB line of FIG. 52 (a). 52 (c) is a partial front view of the storage device 9000, and FIG. 52 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device 9000 along the LIId-LIId line of FIG. 52 (c). For ease of understanding, the enclosure support portion 9130 is illustrated by a hidden line only in FIG. 52A, and the enclosure support portion 9130 is omitted in other drawings.

Further, FIG. 53 (a) is a partial front view of the storage device 9000, and FIG. 53 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device 9000 in line LIIIb-LIIIb of FIG. 53 (a). c) is a partial front view of the storage device 9000, and FIG. 53 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the storage device 9000 along the LIIId-LIIId line of FIG. 53 (c). In addition, in FIG. 52 and FIG. 53, the balls that have entered the second variable winning device 650 are shown with numbers that are added in the order of entry. It should be noted that in FIGS. 52 and 53, the configuration in which the flow-down prevention plate 1015 is operated and the configuration in which the flow-down prevention plate 1015 is arranged on the back surface side of the branch flow path 1030 is not shown for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in the storage device 9000 of the present embodiment, the inclined surface portion 1023a of the first embodiment is formed to have substantially the same shape as the inclined surface portion 1023a, and constitutes the downstream end wall surface of the inclined flow path 1023. The 9023a is arranged at a position where the left-right width of the discharge port 1024 is slightly larger than that of one ball, and the storage device 9000 comes into contact with the ball inside the branch flow path 1030 to form a flow of the ball. The locking device 9100 and the discharge prevention protrusion 9200 are provided.

The locking device 9100 is configured to change the state by arranging the ball entering the branch flow path 1030 on the front side, and is in a non-contact state (FIGS. 52A and 52) in which the ball does not come into contact with the ball. (See (b)), the L-shaped moving member 9110 having a substantially L-shape in front view and the L-shaped moving member 9110 protruding inward of the branch flow path 1030 and the elasticity of urging the L-shaped moving member 9110 toward the non-contacting position. The spring 9120 and the side wall on the back side of the branch flow path 1030 are extended rearward in an L-shape in a front view, and each side of the L-shape is made into two sides at the extended end, and the L-shaped moving member 9110 It mainly includes an enclosure support portion 9130 on which a rectangular plate-shaped support side surface 9131 that intersects the slide operation direction perpendicularly is formed.

The L-shaped moving member 9110 is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction (vertical direction on the paper surface in FIG. 52 (a)), and has a ball contact portion 9111 extending parallel to the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 in the initial state and a ball contact portion 9111 thereof. A tilt prevention portion 9112 extending from a downstream end portion (see FIG. 52A) of the portion 9111 toward the tilt member 1040 is mainly provided.

In the ball contact portion 9111, a ball receiving inclined surface 9111a is formed so that the surface that comes into contact with the ball flowing down the tilting member 1040 is inclined toward the back side toward the upstream side (right side in the front view). When the ball abuts on the ball receiving inclined surface 9111a, a load directed to the back side is applied to the ball abutting portion 9111 via the ball receiving inclined surface 9111a, and the L-shaped moving member 9111 moves (pushes in) to the back side. ).

The tilt prevention portion 9112 overlaps the tilt member 1040 in a top view in a non-contact state of the L-shaped moving member 9110, and a surface on the side facing the tilt member 1040 is formed parallel to the tilt member (the tilt member 1040 is formed). The locking surface portion 9112a (which does not generate a load toward the back side by tilting) and the inclined surface portion connected to the front side of the locking surface portion 9112a, and ascending toward the front side (tilting member 1040). Mainly provided with a rubbing inclined surface 9112b (toward a direction away from the above).

Since the tilt preventing portion 9112 has the above-described configuration, the locking surface portion 9112a comes into contact with the L-shaped moving member 9110 even if the tilting member 1040 is about to tilt in the non-contact state of the L-shaped moving member 9110. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the tilting member 1040 from being tilted.

Further, in the contact state where the sphere is arranged on the front side of the L-shaped moving member 9110 and the L-shaped moving member 9110 is moved to the back side (see FIG. 52 (d)), the locking surface portion 9112a is in contact with the tilting member 1040. It is retracted to a position where it cannot be touched, and depending on the positioning of the ball in the front-rear direction, the rubbing inclined surface 9112b can come into contact with the upper surface of the tilting member 1040.

Here, since the rubbing inclined surface 9112b is configured to be inclined upward toward the front side, it is pushed out toward the back side by contact with the tilting member 1040, and the tilting operation of the tilting member 1040 is performed. It can be prevented from interfering. Therefore, it is possible to change whether or not the tilting member 1040 can tilt and operate depending on whether the L-shaped moving member 9110 is in the non-contact state or the contact state.

The elastic spring 9120 is arranged between the support side surface 9131 of the enclosure support portion 9130 and the L-shaped moving member 9110. As a result, the expansion / contraction direction of the elastic spring 9120 and the operation direction of the L-shaped moving member 9110 can be aligned with each other, and the transmission efficiency of the elastic force can be improved.

The discharge prevention protrusion 9200 is a plate portion that protrudes from the back side wall of the branch flow path 1030 to the front side above the extension tip of the extension plate portion 1043 of the tilt member 1040 in the initial state of the tilt member 1040. The side surface of the plate portion is configured to be perpendicular to the upper surface of the tilting member 1040. Further, the discharge prevention protrusion 9200 is configured such that when the tilting member 1040 forms the initial state, the sphere flowing on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 can come into contact with the tilting member 1040, and the tilting member 1040 is in the tilted state. If this happens, the ball flowing on the upper surface can pass between the tilting member 1040 and the discharge prevention protrusion 9200 (no contact) (a gap larger than the diameter of the sphere is between the tilting member 1040 and the discharge prevention protrusion). (Arrangement formed between 9200).

Due to the discharge prevention protrusion 9200, for example, before the tilting member 1040 is tilted, the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 is blown to the right in the front view by the collision between the balls. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the road 1032. As a result, it is possible to ensure the playability that the balls enter the probabilistic change side flow path 1032 only when a predetermined number of balls (three in the present embodiment) are stored on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040.

In the present embodiment having the above-described configuration, the flow until the tilting member 1040 tilts and operates will be described. First, in a big hit game, when a ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a while the second variable winning device 650 is open, the ball reaches the discharge port 1024 via the inclined flow path 1023 (FIG. 52 (a). ) And FIG. 52 (b)).

From here, when the ball is discharged to the front side of the discharge port 1024, the ball lands on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 on the right side of the shaft rod portion 1042 when viewed from the front. At this time, since the sphere is not arranged on the front side of the L-shaped moving member 9110, the L-shaped moving member 9110 tilts the tilting member 1040 even when the vigorous sphere is discharged from the discharge port 1024. Acts in a manner that prevents. Therefore, when only one ball lands on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040, it is possible to prevent the tilting member 1040 from being tilted.

On the other hand, when the sphere is arranged on the front side of the L-shaped moving member 9110, the tilting member 1040 and the L-shaped moving member 9110 do not overlap in the top view, while the sphere is the left end of the front surface of the tilting member 1040. By riding on (see FIGS. 52 (c) and 52 (d)), the position of the center of gravity of the tilting member 1040 moves to the left. Therefore, when the second ball is discharged from the discharge port 1024 and lands on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040, it is possible to prevent the tilting member 1040 from tilting due to an impact.

Further, when the tilting member 1040 is on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 up to the second ball, the tilting member 1040 maintains the initial state, but depending on the mode of collision between the first ball and the second ball, the second ball May be ejected to the right. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the discharge prevention protrusion 9200 is arranged in the direction in which the ball is ejected (see FIG. 53 (a)), the ejected ball is dammed by the discharge prevention protrusion 9200. , Bounced to the left in front view. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the probability variation side flow path 1032 even though the tilting member 1040 is not tilted.

When the third ball lands on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040, the position of the center of gravity of the tilting member 1040 is moved to the right of the shaft rod portion 1042, and the tilting member 1040 changes to the tilted state. In this tilted state, a sufficient gap is formed between the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 and the discharge prevention protrusion 9200 (see FIG. 53 (c)), so that the ball is placed on the probabilistic side. It can flow down toward the flow path 1032.

Further, in the tilted state of the tilting member 1040, the side surface on the back surface side of the tilting member 1040 is in contact with the front end portion of the L-shaped moving member 9110 (see FIGS. 53 (c) and 53 (d)). When the tilting member 1040 returns from the tilted state to the initial state, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the tilting member 1040 and the L-shaped moving member 9110 come into contact with each other in the moving direction.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the ball is landed on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 on the right side of the shaft rod portion 1042 in the front view, and the ball is flown by utilizing the inclination of the tilting member 1040 to prevent the ball from flowing down. Since it is configured to be stored on the right side of the plate 1015, it is possible to form a state in which the balls stored in the tilting member 1040 are lined up in the left-right direction regardless of the setting of the tilting angle of the tilting member 1040.

Further, since the locking device 9100 can prevent the tilting member 1040 from tilting due to the momentum of the ball, it tilts only when a predetermined number of balls are stored in the tilting member 1040 without depending on the momentum of the ball. The member 1040 can be tilted. Further, the discharge prevention protrusion 9200 can prevent the ball from flowing down toward the probabilistic change side flow path 1032 regardless of how the ball bounces when the tilting member 1040 is in the initial state.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the inclined flow path 1023 is gently inclined downward toward the front side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclined flow path 1023 may be horizontal in the front-rear direction, or may be gently ascended toward the front side toward the back side. In this case, it is possible to easily prevent the sphere from being discharged from the discharge port 1024 to the front side in the middle of the inclined flow path 1023, and when the sphere flows down toward the inclined member 1040, the left end of the inclined member 1040. It can be made easier to flow down toward the part. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent one ball from falling to the right end portion of the tilting member 1040 and tilting the tilting member 1040 due to the load at the time of landing of the ball, and erroneously to the probabilistic side flow path 1032. Can be prevented from flowing in.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 is formed only from the planar shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the interference member is extended upward along the back side surface near the end of the rectangular weight portion 1041 and the tilting member 1040 is in the initial state, the interference member does not overlap with the discharge port 1024 in the front view. On the other hand, when the tilting member 1040 is in a tilted state, the interfering member may overlap with the discharge port 1024 in the front view. In this case, the interference member can prevent the next ball from being discharged from the discharge port 1024 after the tilted member 1040 is tilted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the tilting member 1040 from returning to the initial state again when the next ball rides on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 and the position of the center of gravity changes again.

In each of the above embodiments, the ball that deviates from the second entry port 640 and flows downstream collides with the arc member 70 and the outer edge member 73, bounces, and travels through the outer edge member 73 to the second variable winning device 650. The case of reaching is explained, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a flow path having a cross-sectional area such that one ball passes through the path from the second entry port 640 to the outer edge member 73 is formed so that the ball reaches the outer edge member 73 through the flow path. Is also good. In this case, since the interval at which the balls reach the outer edge member 73 can be controlled, the number of balls entering the second variable winning device 650 within a predetermined time can be controlled. The internal shape of the flow path is not particularly limited, and for example, ribs extending in a direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the sphere are alternately formed on the opposing inner surfaces to decelerate the sphere. good.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the flow-down prevention plate 1015 changes its state in association with the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 650 provided with the storage device 1000 downstream is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state of the flow prevention plate 1015 may be changed by opening and closing the first variable winning device 65.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the tilting member 1040 is supported by the shaft extending in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be supported by a shaft extending to the left and right and tilted so as to tilt toward the front side (bow toward the player). In this case, when one ball rides on the tilting member 1040, the ball is arranged on the back side of the front view, making it difficult to see. On the other hand, when three or more balls ride on the tilting member 1040, the ball is on the front side of the front view. It is possible to form an easy-to-understand game property that the ball on the tilting member 1040 becomes more visible to the player (the more it protrudes toward the front), which is advantageous to the player.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the state of the flow prevention plate 1015 is changed and the ball is stopped on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 based on the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 650 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, in two types of pachinko gaming machines, the state of the flow prevention plate 1015 is configured to be changed and opened in response to the movement of the wing member that opens and closes when the ball enters a predetermined entry port. The tilting member 1040 may be arranged in the path through which the ball flows down after entering the wing member. In this embodiment, when the tilting member 1040 is in the initial state, the ball is sent to the normal flow path, and the tilting member 1040 In the tilted state, the ball may be sent to a special flow path that makes it easier for the ball to enter the V winning opening (the winning opening for winning a jackpot) than the normal flow path.

For example, when the ball stopper 5100 described above in the fifth embodiment is used to change the state of the flow prevention plate 1015, for example, the flow prevention plate 5015 is buried every time the wing member is opened four times. By setting, if a plurality of balls (for example, 3) can be put in the path behind the wing member while the wing member is opened three times, the sphere can be sent to the special flow path and a big hit can be obtained. It is possible to form a playability that is easy to acquire.

In each of the above embodiments, the tilting member 1040 for switching the flow direction of the sphere is formed in the storage device 1000 in a rotational manner, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the distribution member that switches the flow direction of the sphere may be configured to slide with the weight of the sphere. That is, when one ball is stored in the storage device 1000, the sorting member does not slide and move, but when a plurality of balls (for example, five) are stored, the weight of the balls causes them to separate from the flow prevention plate 1015 (front view). The distribution member may be pushed to the right) to slide and move, and the sliding movement may open the entrance to the probability-changing side flow path 1032 so that the ball can enter the probability-changing side flow path 1032. .. In this case, the distribution member gradually slides and moves according to the accumulation condition of the balls (for example, when three balls are accumulated and when four balls are accumulated, the movement width of the distribution member is larger when four balls are accumulated. Although it is large, the entrance to the probabilistic side flow path 1032 can still be configured so as not to be opened to the extent that the spheres pass through), and the distribution member can be operated each time the number of spheres stored in the storage device 1000 increases. .. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of improving the interest of the player by the operation of the sorting member.

In the third embodiment, based on the operation of the second variable winning device 650, a state is formed in which the operation of the constantly driven drive motor 3012 and the operation of the flow prevention plate 1015 are synchronized, and in that state, the flow prevention plate 1015 is formed. The case where the state of is changed has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow-down prevention plate 1015 may be configured to constantly change its state by the constantly driven drive motor 3012. In this case, a predetermined number of balls may or may not be stored on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 due to differences in the opening / closing pattern of the second variable winning device 650 due to the timing at which the jackpot game is started or the difference in the jackpot type. And can be formed. For example, by forming the drive motor 3012 to make one rotation in 360 seconds (long period), the flow prevention plate 1015 is always in the branch flow path 1030 during the maximum opening period (30 seconds) of the 12th round of the jackpot. Both the situation where it remains buried on the back side and the situation where the flow prevention plate 1015 always remains protruding inward of the branch flow path 1030 during the maximum opening period (30 seconds) of the 12th round of the jackpot. Can be formed.

In the fourth embodiment, in order to prevent the projecting rib 4014a of the rotating disk 4014 and the projecting engaging portion 4013d of the friction rotating member 4013 from colliding in the axial direction, the period for maintaining the open state is set. The case where the second variable winning device 650 is controlled so as not to change from the open state to the closed state has been described for 1 second from 2.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an inclined surface that inclines the protruding rib 4014a toward both ends in the circumferential direction in a manner closer to the disk portion 1014b is formed from the central portion in the circumferential direction (that is, the central portion in the circumferential direction of the protruding rib 4014a). Is composed of ridges instead of surfaces), and the projecting engaging portion 4013d is formed from a conical shape in which the height direction is along a straight line parallel to the rotation axis of the friction rotating member 4013. You may. In this case, even if the projecting rib 4014a and the projecting engaging portion 4013d collide with each other in the axial direction, the collision can be passed on the inclined surfaces of each other, and a failure can be prevented.

Further, the sharp tip of the protrusion rib 4014a (the tip on the side facing the friction rotating member 4013) and the sharp tip of the protrusion engagement portion 4013d (the tip on the side facing the rotating disk 4014) Regarding the positional relationship in the circumferential direction (whether the protrusion rib 4014a is arranged in the traveling direction of the protrusion engagement portion 4013d or the protrusion engagement portion 4013d passes through the protrusion rib 4014a), the center position of the tip thereof is the circumference. It is switched at the timing of overlapping in the direction (for example, 3 seconds after the opening of the second variable winning device 650). As described above, the collision between the protrusion rib 4014a and the protrusion engagement portion 4013d is performed even when the second variable winning device 650 is opened at any timing except for the timing when the center positions of the sharp tips overlap in the circumferential direction. Does not cause any trouble. Therefore, for example, in the jackpot A, the second variable winning device 650 is controlled to be opened for 2.9 seconds and then closed, and in the jackpot B, the second variable winning device 650 is opened for 3.1 seconds. It may be controlled so that it is in a closed state after being in a state. In this case, the difference in the time when the second variable winning device 650 is open between the jackpot A and the jackpot B may be set as a period (for example, 0.2 seconds) in which it is difficult for the player to determine the difference. it can. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the acquired jackpot is jackpot A or jackpot B from the operation mode of the second variable winning device 650, and attract the player's attention to the tilting member 1040. Can be done.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the switching protrusions 5124 are arranged at two locations on the rotating member 5120 of the ball stopper 5100 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be one place or a plurality of places of three or more places. Further, when the switching protrusions 5124 are arranged at a plurality of locations of three or more, the intervals between the arrangements can be arbitrarily determined (different). As a result, for example, the second variable winning device 650 is from the time when the first switching protrusion 5124 comes into contact with the switching device 5140 until the adjacent second switching protrusion 5124 comes into contact with the switching device 5140. The number of times the switch is opened and closed, and after the second switching protrusion 5124 comes into contact with the switching device 5140, the third switching protrusion 5124 adjacent to the first switching protrusion 5124 is adjacent to the switching protrusion 5124. The number of times the second variable winning device 650 is opened and closed before the 5124 comes into contact with the switching device 5140 can be made different. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to associate the number of opening / closing operations of the second variable winning device 650 with the change in the state of the flow prevention plate 5015, and it is difficult for the player to predict the change in the state of the flow prevention plate 5015. It is possible to form a playability that the player can always play with a sense of expectation without knowing when the flow prevention plate 5015 operates.

In the fifth embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is in a state where the switching protrusion 5124 arranged on the rotating member 5120 of the ball stopper 5100 is in contact with the rotating arm portion 5142 of the switching device 5140. Although the case where the contact between the rotating arm portion 5142 and the switching protrusion portion 5124 is always released by the rotation opening / closing operation has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by extending the circumferential length of one of the switching protrusions 5124, the rotating arm portion 5142 and the switching protrusion 5124 come into contact with each other while the second variable winning device 650 opens and closes a plurality of times. It may be maintained. In this case, regardless of whether the flow prevention plate 5015 is in the buried state or the protruding state when the second variable winning device 650 is in the closed state immediately before the opening operation of the ball with a length capable of entering the ball, the following It is difficult to predict which state the flow prevention plate 5015 will be in when the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and it is possible to easily maintain the expectation of the player.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the ball entering the first flow path 7110 is limited to the ball flowing down from the second variable winning device 650 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a flow path may be formed (connected) so that a ball that has entered the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 enters the first flow path 7110. As a result, even if the ball remains on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 after the special game state (big hit game state) is completed, the act of aiming for the next big hit (first entry port 64 or second entry ball). By (the act of inserting the ball into the mouth 640), the flow prevention plate 7015 can be changed to the buried state, and the ball remaining on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040 can be discharged.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where one ball is arranged at the position where it comes into contact with the flow prevention plate 1015 causes the L-shaped moving member 9110 to retract from the operation locus of the tilting member 1040 has been described. It is not limited. For example, the second L-shaped moving member (No. 2) is arranged at a position corresponding to the second ball (a position shifted diagonally upward to the right of the L-shaped moving member 9110 in the front view), and the second L-shaped moving member (No. 2) is arranged. The L-shaped moving member (No. 2) may be configured such that the second ball is retracted from the operation locus of the tilting member 1040 by stopping on the upper surface of the tilting member 1040. In this case, when the second ball lands on the tilting member 1040, the L-shaped moving member (No. 2) is arranged in the moving locus of the tilting member 1040, so that the second ball is the tilting member 1040. It is possible to easily prevent the tilting member 1040 from tilting due to the impact when landing on the ground.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the tilting operation of the tilting member 1040 is prevented by the action of the locking device 9100 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position of the center of gravity of the tilting member 1040 may be set to a position excessively to the left, and the tilting operation may not be performed when one ball rides on the extending plate portion 1043. In this case, the locking device 9100 can be omitted.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the discharge prevention protrusion 9200 is projected from the side wall on the back side of the branch flow path 1030 toward the front side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate member may be extended from the extension tip of the extension plate portion 1043 of the tilting member 1040 (the tip on the opposite side of the shaft rod portion 1042). As a result, in the tilted state of the tilting member 1040, the plate member is also integrated with the tilting member 1040 and displaced downward, so that a wide path for the sphere discharged from the discharge port 1024 to flow into the probabilistic side flow path 1032 is secured. be able to.

Here, as the shape of the plate member, for example, in the tilted state of the tilting member 1040, the plate member is horizontally extended from the extending tip of the extending plate portion 1043 (extending in a direction of gently ascending and tilting from the extending direction). The shape (to be provided) is illustrated. In this case, when the ball is flown in the tilted state, the surface of the plate member that comes into contact with the ball becomes horizontal, so that it is possible to prevent the ball from hindering the flow of the ball, but in the initial state, the plate member that comes into contact with the ball. By making the surface of the ball ascending and sloping, it is possible to decelerate the ball that is about to jump out to the right and produce the effect of preventing the ball from jumping out.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Point where the seesaw stopper moves by the operation of the V attacker (also used as a drive)>
A winning opening arranged in the game area where the game ball flows down, a first switching means for switching between a possible state in which the game ball can win a prize and an impossible state in which the game ball cannot win, and the first switching means thereof. In a game machine provided with a first driving means for driving a player and a profit acquisition means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by flowing down the game ball winning the winning opening, the game ball winning the winning opening is A stopping means configured to be able to stop and allowing the stopped game ball to flow down to the profit acquisition means, a stopping state in which the game ball reaching the stopping means can be stopped at the stopping means, and a stopped state. A second switching means for switching between a non-stop state in which the game ball reaching the stopping means is not stopped at the stopping means is provided, and the driving force of the first driving means is transmitted to the second switching means. Based on this, the gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the state changes between the stationary state and the non-stationary state.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the second profit state determination unit (corresponding to the stopping means) at which the game ball winning the second major winning opening (corresponding to the winning opening) arrives, and the distribution unit (second). There is a gaming machine that distributes a gaming ball to two flow paths having different benefits for a player by operating the switching means (corresponding to the switching means) in the left-right direction (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the large winning opening opening / closing accessory that changes the state of the second winning opening and the distribution unit are driven by separate driving means, the arrangement of the two driving means is arranged. It is necessary to decide the arrangement of the second prize opening and the distribution part while securing the space, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom of arrangement is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the state of the second switching means changes based on the transmission of the driving force of the first driving means, so that only one driving means is required and the arrangement space can be secured. Since it becomes easy, the degree of freedom in arranging the first switching means, the second switching means, and the stopping means can be increased.

Further, since the second switching means changes the state between the stationary state and the non-stationary state by driving the first driving means that drives the first switching means that changes the state of the winning opening, the operation pattern of the second switching means The degree of freedom can be improved, and the situation in which the player gets bored can be less likely to occur.

It should be noted that the predetermined profits include a profit that makes the game state a probable change state (V sure prize), a profit that can obtain a big hit (two types of V prizes), and a profit that enables a flow path that is likely to be a big hit. To.

In the game machine A1, the second switching means is characterized in that the driving force of the first driving means is transmitted via the first switching means.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the driving force of the first driving means is transmitted to the second switching means via the first switching means, so that the operating width of the first switching means is used. Therefore, the operating width of the second switching means can be secured. Further, by using both the means for securing the operating width of the first switching means and the means for securing the operating width of the second switching means, a means for securing the operating width of the first driving means is provided for each switching means. The arrangement space can be suppressed as compared with the case of arranging. As a result, the degree of freedom in arranging the first switching means, the second switching means, and the stopping means can be increased.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the stopping means is characterized in that, when a predetermined number or more of the game balls are stored, the game balls are brought down toward the profit acquisition means by the operation. Machine A3.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1 or A2, when a predetermined number or more of the game balls are stored in the stop means, the stop means operates and the game balls are directed toward the profit acquisition means. Since it is in a state of flowing down, the movement of the stopping means and the movement of the game ball can be linked and shown to the player as compared with the case where the flow path of the game ball changes only by the state change of the second switching means. It is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, when one game ball is stopped at the stopping means, the game ball is not in a posture in which it can flow down toward the profit acquisition means, so that the first switching means becomes possible in a short period of time (for a short period of time). Even if one game ball wins in the case of (Paca), it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down toward the profit acquisition means. Therefore, as has been conventionally performed, control is performed so that the game ball does not accidentally flow down to the profit acquisition means by changing the state of the distribution unit several seconds after the timing of switching the first switching means to the possible state. Along with the control, the control of opening the first switching means for a short period of time at the start of opening can be eliminated, and the control of the first driving means can be simplified.

The operation mode of the stopping means is not particularly limited, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the game ball may be stored on the upper surface, the position of the load applied to the stopping means with respect to the rotation axis may change depending on the number of stored game balls, and the seesaw may be tilted or slid with the weight of the ball. It may be in the mode of

Further, when the stopping means tilts, the landing point of the ball on the stopping means is not particularly limited. That is, with reference to the rotation axis, the side may be lowered or the side may be raised.

A4 of the game machine A3 is characterized in that the movement of the stopping means makes it difficult for the ball to flow down to a flow path that causes the ball to flow down to the opposite side of the profit acquisition means.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, the operation of the stopping means makes it difficult for the ball to flow down to the flow path that causes the ball to flow down to the opposite side of the profit acquisition means. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to flow from the stopping means to the opposite side of the profit acquisition means before the operation is started and the stopped state is reached.

The game machine A1 includes a first special means for transmitting the driving force of the first driving means to the second switching means, and the first driving means is driven and controlled by a plurality of driving patterns, and the first special means. When the first driving means operates based on the driving pattern of 1, the state of the second switching means is changed, and when the first driving means operates based on another driving pattern, the said A game machine A5 characterized in that the state of the second switching means is not changed.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, whether or not the state of the second switching means changes depending on the drive pattern of the first driving means changes, so the operation pattern of the first switching means is confirmed. This makes it possible to determine whether or not the state of the second switching means is changed. Therefore, for the player who wants the state of the second switching means to be switched to a state advantageous to the player, the attention of the first switching means operated by the driving force of the first driving means can be improved. The line of sight of the person can be gathered near the first switching means.

In this state, the LED in the vicinity of the first switching means is lit, while the LED in the portion away from the first switching means is turned off, so that the brightness of the portion of interest of the player is maintained and the other portions are displayed. It can be darkened. As a result, the power consumption can be reduced, and the visibility of the game ball in the portion away from the first switching means in the game area can be deteriorated.

Regarding the visibility of the game ball in the game area, for example, by impairing the visibility of the game ball flowing down on the upstream side of the first switching means, a state in which the game ball flows down to the winning opening from an unexpected position is formed. It can be done, and the player can be less likely to get bored.

Further, for example, when the first switching means is in an incapable state, the first switching means flows down and the visibility of the game ball flowing down to the downstream side is deteriorated, so that the player concentrates on the game ball flowing toward the out port. It can be prevented from doing so. As a result, the degree of attention in the vicinity of the first switching means can be maintained.

In the game machine A5, the first special means has a movement locus on a predetermined plane, and while the stopping means forms the stopping state by the second switching means, the second switching means from the ball. The gaming machine A6, characterized in that the direction of the load applied to is directed in a direction perpendicular to the predetermined plane.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of the game machine A5, the direction of the load applied from the ball to the second switching means is directed in the direction perpendicular to the plane on which the movement locus of the first special means is formed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first special means from operating due to the load via the second switching means, and each time the game ball comes into contact with the second switching means, the load is applied in the moving direction of the first special means. It can be prevented from being given. Thereby, the durability of the second switching means can be improved.

In the game machine A1, when the interval at which the first switching means is switched between the possible state and the impossible state is shorter than a predetermined interval depending on the mode of changing the state of the first switching means. The gaming machine A7 is provided with a second special means for preventing switching between a stationary state and a non-stationary state.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, it is possible to form a state in which the state change of the first switching means and the state change of the second switching means are not linked by the second special means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the operation mode of the first switching means.

That is, it is possible to maintain the state of the second switching means (for example, maintain the state of being stopped) while changing the state of the first switching means with a short interval, so that the game ball can be stopped.

The second special means in the game machine A7 is characterized in that the second special means is switched to the non-stationary state by maintaining the impossible state of the first switching means for a predetermined period of time. Game machine A8 to play.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7, the second switching means is in the stationary state at the moment when the first switching means is switched to the disabled state, and the first switching means maintains the disabled state for a predetermined period. As a result, the second switching means is switched to the non-stationary state, so that the game ball that has won the winning opening just before the first switching means becomes incapable waits for the game ball to reach the stopping means, and then the second switching means. The state of can be switched to the non-stationary state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being stopped at the stopping means, and it is possible to completely flush the game ball.

<Point to set a period from the operation of the V attacker to the release of the stopper>
A winning opening arranged in the game area where the game ball flows down, a first switching means for switching between a possible state in which the game ball can win a prize and an impossible state in which the game ball cannot win, and the first switching means thereof. In a game machine including a first driving means for driving a player and a profit acquisition means for giving a predetermined profit to a player by flowing down a game ball that has won a prize in the winning opening. A stop means that is configured to be able to stop and allows the stopped game ball to flow down to the profit acquisition means, and a stop state in which the game ball that has reached the stop means can be stopped at the stop means. The second driving means, which is different from the first driving means, is provided with a second switching means for switching between a non-stop state in which the game ball reaching the stopping means is not stopped at the stopping means. The driving force of the second driving means can be transmitted to the second switching means based on the fact that the switching means is switched to the impossible state, and the driving force of the second driving means causes the second switching means to be transmitted to the second switching means. A delay driving means for changing a state between a stationary state and a non-stationary state, wherein a predetermined period elapses before the second switching means switches from the stationary state to the non-stationary state. Characteristic game machine B1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a distribution unit (corresponding to the second switching means) is assigned to the second profit state determination unit (corresponding to the stopping means) to which the game ball winning the second major winning opening arrives. There is a gaming machine that distributes a gaming ball to two flow paths having different benefits for a player by operating in the left-right direction (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the operation timings of the large winning opening opening / closing accessory that changes the state of the second large winning opening and the distribution unit are different, but in this case, they operate at different timings. There is a problem that the control becomes complicated because it is necessary to control the operation.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, the delay driving means has the second driving means, and the driving force of the second driving means moves to the second switching means side based on the switching of the state of the first switching means. Since it is possible to transmit and the second switching means is set to the non-stationary state after a predetermined period from the state change of the first switching means, the operation timings of the first switching means and the second switching means are different. This can be done only by controlling the first switching means. This can simplify the control.

The game machine B1 is characterized in that the delay driving means starts transmitting the driving force of the second driving means to the second switching means based on the fact that the first switching means becomes impossible. Game machine B2.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the predetermined period secured until the second switching means is switched to the non-stationary state is the period after the first switching means is disabled. Therefore, after the first driving means starts the control to switch the first switching means to the impossible state for some reason, such as a game ball being caught between the first switching means and the board surface, the first switching means is actually used. Even if a period of time elapses before the state becomes impossible, it is possible to secure a period from the state of the first switching means to the state of the second switching means changing. As a result, it is possible to prevent a malfunction in which the second switching means changes its state before the game ball that has won the winning opening reaches the stopping means immediately before the first switching means becomes incapable.

In the game machine B2, the delay driving means is a transmission state in which the power of the second driving means is transmitted by driving the second driving means operating in a certain mode and the driving of the first driving means, and non-transmission. A displacement means that switches between the non-transmission state and displaces in the transmission state, and a return means that gives the displacement means a load for returning the displacement means to the initial position before displacement in the non-transmission state. The second switching means is in a stationary state when the displacement means is arranged at the initial position, and is displaced toward the arrangement in the non-stationary state based on the displacement of the displacement means. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the displacement means is displaced for a predetermined delay period to be in a non-stationary state.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the displacement means that changes the state of the second switching means after the lapse of the delay period has a certain aspect by driving the first drive means and entering a transmission state. The driving force of the second driving means that operates in the above is transmitted and displaced, and when the first driving means is driven and put into a non-transmission state, the returning means returns to the initial position. The period from when the 1 driving means is driven to the transmission state until the second switching means changes the state can be kept constant.

Further, since the first driving means is not used as a driving source of the second switching means but is used for switching transmission with a separate second driving means, the second switching means may malfunction due to insufficient driving force. It can be prevented from occurring.

Further, if the driving state of the first driving means changes during the delay period and the state of the first switching means changes again, the state of the second switching means also returns to the arrangement in the stationary state, so that the delay period or less By changing the driving state of the first driving means at intervals, the state of the second switching means can be maintained in the stationary state while changing the state of the first switching means.

In the game machine B3, when the first switching means is brought into the possible state by driving the first driving means, the displacement means is put into the non-transmission state, and the displacement means by the return means. B4, characterized in that the displacement of is performed in a period shorter than the delay period.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, the displacement of the displacement means by the return means is performed in a period shorter than the delay period, so that the first switching means changes to a possible state and the winning opening is won. The second switching means can be returned to the stopped state before the game ball reaches the stopped means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the winning game ball from flowing down without being stopped by the stopping means immediately after the first switching means becomes possible, so that the game ball can be easily stopped by the stopping means. ..

In the game machine B2, the delay driving means is a transmission state in which the power of the second driving means is transmitted by driving the second driving means operating in a certain mode and the driving of the first driving means, and non-transmission. A transmission clutch that switches between the non-transmission state and displaces in the transmission state, and an engagement cam that is configured to be displaceable by engaging with the transmission clutch and that holds the second switching means in the stationary state at the initial position. And, in the non-transmission state, the second switching means includes a return means for giving a load for returning the engagement cam to the initial position before displacement to the engagement cam, and the second switching means displaces the engagement cam. The engagement cam is displaced for a predetermined delay period to be in a non-stationary state, and the transmission clutch is in a state in which the first switching means is possible. In the case of, the gaming machine B5 is characterized in that it is not engaged with the engaging cam.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B2, when the first switching means becomes possible, the second switching means operates by the action of the returning means and becomes a stationary state, so that the game ball is placed in the winning opening. It is possible to stop the game ball at each timing when it starts to be able to win a prize, and it is possible to improve the expectation that the game ball will be passed through the profit acquisition means.

In the game machine B5, when the first switching means is in an incapable state, the transmission clutch is in the first posture, which is a predetermined posture, so that the non-transmission state is formed, and the transmission clutch is in the first posture. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that when the posture is maintained and the first switching means changes to a possible state, the driving force of the second driving means is started to be transmitted from the first posture.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, when the first switching means maintains the disabled state for a long period of time, the transmission clutch of the transmission clutch is operated even when the second driving means (DC motor or the like) is constantly rotated. Since the phase can be fixed and the transmission between the transmission clutch and the second drive means can be started from the time when the first switching means changes to the possible state, the transmission from the time when the first switching means becomes possible can be started. The posture of the transmission clutch after a predetermined period can be determined in advance.

As a result, for example, when the first switching means is a special electric accessory that opens and closes the winning opening in the special game, the transmission clutch and the engaging cam are engaged with each other several seconds after the start of the jackpot round. It is possible to specify whether or not the second switching means starts to move by the operation of the engaging cam, and it is possible to easily obtain consistency with the liquid crystal effect.

Further, even if the second driving means continues to operate while maintaining the disabled state, it is possible to prevent the second switching means from continuing to move. Therefore, the second switching means is always operating. It is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player.

In the game machine B6, when the transmission clutch and the second driving means start transmission from the state where the transmission clutch is in the first posture, the first switching means has a predetermined pattern after a lapse of a predetermined period. The gaming machine B7 is characterized in that the second switching means does not change from a stationary state to a non-stationary state if no operation is performed.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of the game machine B6, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the state in which the transmission clutch is in the first posture and the transmission clutch and the second driving means start transmission, the first Since it is determined whether or not the state of the second switching means changes depending on whether or not the switching means operates in a predetermined pattern, for example, the operation mode of the first switching means until the predetermined period elapses is the second switching. By preparing a large number of operation modes that do not affect the change of the state of the means, it is possible to camouflage the operation for a period that affects the change of the state of the second switching means. This makes it difficult for the player to know whether or not this round is a round in which the game ball can be stopped.

In addition, after the lapse of a predetermined period, it is possible to maintain the stationary state by sandwiching an operation different from the operation of the predetermined pattern, and even after the lapse of the predetermined period, the attention of the first switching means is kept improved. Can be done.

In addition, by preparing a plurality of types of round opening / closing patterns for each hit symbol (by making the pattern of the state change of the first switching means different for each hit symbol), which of the state changes of the second switching means can be obtained. It is possible to arbitrarily specify whether to perform at the timing. As a result, unlike the case where the second switching means is operated by performing a constant operation based on the operation of the first driving means by another solenoid, the chance of flowing down to the profit acquisition means is given to any round. Can be provided.

<Point where the state of the stopper changes based on the number of times the V attacker opens and closes>
A winning opening arranged in the game area where the game ball flows down, a first switching means for switching between a possible state in which the game ball can win a prize and an impossible state in which the game ball cannot win, and the first switching means thereof. In a game machine including a first driving means for driving a player and a profit acquisition means for giving a predetermined profit to a player by flowing down a game ball that has won a prize in the winning opening. A stop means that is configured to be able to stop and allows the stopped game ball to flow down to the profit acquisition means, and a stop state in which the game ball that has reached the stop means can be stopped at the stop means. The second switching means is provided with a second switching means for switching between a non-stop state in which the game ball reaching the stopping means is not stopped at the stopping means, and the second switching means is provided by the first switching means only a predetermined reference number of times. The gaming machine C1 is provided with a number transmission means for changing the state of the second switching means between the stopped state and the non-stationed state at least once each time the state changes between the possible state and the impossible state.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a distribution unit (corresponding to the second switching means) is assigned to the second profit state determination unit (corresponding to the stopping means) to which the game ball winning the second major winning opening arrives. There is a gaming machine that distributes a gaming ball to two flow paths having different benefits for a player by operating in the left-right direction (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the first switching means is controlled to perform a specific operation before the state change of the second switching means occurs, for example, it is not necessary to confirm the suggestion in the liquid crystal effect. , The player can grasp whether or not the game ball can be flowed down to the profit acquisition means. Therefore, there is a problem that the player's attention tends to be particularly concentrated around the large winning opening, and the attention to other parts, for example, the liquid crystal screen as the production range is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the state change between the stationary state and the non-stationary state of the second switching means occurs at least once when the first switching means changes the state by a predetermined reference number of times. Since it is configured, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the state of the second switching means by confirming the operation mode of the first switching means.

That is, for example, if the state of the second switching means becomes a stationary state advantageous to the player after the first switching means performs a predetermined operation, the player can perform the operation mode of the first switching means. It is easy to grasp the state of the second switching means because it is sufficient to confirm whether or not the predetermined operation has been performed. However, when the state of the second switching means is changed by the number of state changes of the first switching means, the first Even if the mode of state change (operation mode) of the switching means is exactly the same, the influence on the second switching means is completely different depending on the number of state changes within the reference number of times.

Therefore, it is possible to realize the playability that the second switching means is in a stationary state advantageous to the player without warning. As a result, it is not possible to know when the player will be in an advantageous state, so that the player's attention can be focused on the vicinity of the second switching device, and the player's attention can be focused on the vicinity of the large winning opening (first switching). It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is particularly easy to concentrate on (around the device).

The mode of the number-of-times transmitting means includes a device that operates in response to a change in the state of the first switching means, acts on the second switching means at a predetermined number of times, and changes the state of the second switching means. Examples thereof include a case where the sensor detects the number of state changes of the first switching means and a drive device is provided which acts on the second switching means at a predetermined number of times.

In the game machine C1, the state of the first switching means is continuously changed by the trigger of 1, and the state changes are a short-term state change performed at a length that the game ball cannot win and a game ball. The gaming machine C2 is composed of a combination with a long-term state change performed with a winning length, and is performed at the same number of times as an integral multiple of the predetermined reference number of times.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the first switching means is in a short-term state when the state of the second switching means is in the stationary state while returning the number transmission means to the initial posture for each continuous operation. Either a case of change or a case of long-term state change can be formed by a mode of continuous operation.

Therefore, as a mode of continuous operation of the first switching means, it is possible to prepare a mode in which the profit acquisition means can flow down the game ball and a mode in which the profit acquisition means cannot flow down the game ball. it can.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the first switching means continuously changes its state by the trigger of 1, and the number transmission means is formed from a device that circulates in a manner of returning to the initial position every reference number of times. The gaming machine C3 is provided with a returning means for returning the number-of-times transmitting means to an initial position regardless of the posture of the number-of-times transmitting means.

Here, when the number transmission means returns to the initial position only when the state change of the first switching means is performed by the same number as a multiple of the reference number, the number transmission means is arranged at the initial position after the special game. In order to do so, it is necessary to limit the number of state changes of the first switching means in the special game to an integral multiple of the reference number of times, so that the pattern of state changes of the first switching means is limited. That is, if the number of times of opening per round is set to a plurality of times, the number of state changes of the first switching means until a predetermined number of game balls are won changes, so that the first switching means is possible throughout one round. Only the pattern of state change is allowed.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, the return means can return the number of times transmission means to the initial position after the continuous operation of the first switching means, so that the number of times after the special game It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the mode of continuous operation of the first switching means while maintaining the function of returning the transmitting means to the initial position.

For example, in a mode in which the first switching means changes its state a plurality of times during one round, the first switching means can be controlled to continuously change its state. In this case, by inserting a predetermined number of game balls (predetermined count) in one round, it is possible to proceed to the next round. That is, by checking the state of the circulation operation means, thinking about how much the state of the circulation operation means will be changed in each round, and changing the pace of putting the ball into the grand prize opening based on that idea, the circulation operation by itself. You can play while changing the state of the means. As a result, the special game can be advanced so as to adjust the state of the number transmission means so that the second switching means is in the stationary state according to the round in which the long-term state changes, and even during the round digestion, the game ball is simply played. You can play while thinking about the pace at which you should win the game ball, as well as winning the prize.

Further, the posture of the number-of-times transmitting means at the end of the special game may differ from the initial position, but since the posture of the number-of-times transmitting means can be returned to the initial posture by the returning means, the number-of-times transmitting means after the special game ends. It is possible to prevent a malfunction in which a normal game starts with different postures.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, the first driving means generates a load that can be increased by an applied current in one direction, and the number transmission means is such that the first driving means operates in the one direction. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that it comes into contact with the first driving means, the driving force is transmitted, and the displacement is caused by a predetermined amount.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C5, the first driving means operates in one direction in which the displacement of the number transmission means is a direction in which the driving force can be increased by the applied current. At that time, since it is generated by the contact between the first driving means and the number-of-times transmitting means and the driving force is transmitted, the load from the game ball to the second switching means resists the operation of the second switching means. Even if it occurs in the direction, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the second switching means does not move due to insufficient driving force.

In the game machine C4, the second switching means includes a prevention stopper for preventing the number-of-times transmission means from being displaced in the other direction.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, the load given to the second switching means when the second switching means is pressed by the contact between the game ball and the second switching means. However, since it is possible to prevent the number-of-times transmitting means from operating in the other direction by being transmitted to the number-of-times transmitting means, the number of state changes of the first switching means and the state of the second switching means are synchronized. Can be prevented from slipping.

In the game machine C1, the player allows the number-of-times transmitting means not to return to the state before the operation after the operation of the first driving means caused by the trigger of 1, and the player perceives the state of the number-of-times transmitting means. A game machine C6 characterized in being capable of being configured.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, the state of the number transmission means is cumulatively changed during the game, which the player can perceive, so that it is one of the cases when selecting the game machine to be played. As a selection criterion, the state of the number transmission means associated with the special game can be provided.

That is, the number-of-times transmitting means changes the state of the second switching means each time the first switching means changes its state by a predetermined reference number of times, but from the state of the number-of-times transmitting means, what is the first switching means? It is possible to change for each game machine whether or not the reference number of times is reached if the state changes only once, and the player can change the state of the number transmission means to the expected value at which the state of the second switching means changes (for example, in a short period of time). It can be used as a selection criterion when selecting a game machine in anticipation of a change in the state of the second switching means, etc.).

In the game machine C6, the first switching means is a continuously movable means capable of continuous operation by one trigger, and the number of continuous operations of the first switching means changes depending on the type of the operation trigger. , From the initial state of the second switching means, while the second switching means forms the non-stationary state after the continuous operation by the operation trigger of 1, from that state, the continuous operation by one or another operation trigger is further performed. The gaming machine C7, which later forms the stationary state.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, the first switching means performs a predetermined number of continuous operations, the state of the second switching means does not change to the stationary state, and a predetermined profit cannot be obtained. Even in this case, the state of the second switching means changes to the stationary state after the first switching means continuously operates, and the expectation of obtaining a predetermined profit can be increased.

<The state of the stopper does not change while the ball is passing through the passage of the V attacker (unfiled)>
A winning opening arranged in the game area where the game ball flows down, a first switching means for switching between a possible state in which the game ball can win a prize in the winning opening and an impossible state in which the game ball cannot win, and the first switching means thereof. In a game machine provided with a first driving means for generating the driving force of the above and a profit acquisition means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by flowing down the game ball winning the winning opening, the winning opening is won. The stopped game ball is configured to be able to be stopped, and the stopped game ball is configured to be able to flow down to the profit acquisition means, and the game ball that has reached the stopping means can be stopped at the stopping means. A second switching means for switching between a stopped state and a non-stop state in which the game ball is not flown to the profit acquisition means is provided, and the second switching means is a game ball in the elapsed section from the winning opening to the stopping means. D1 is a gaming machine D1 comprising: a change prevention means which acts so as to maintain the staying state when the staying means is arranged.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a distribution unit (corresponding to the second switching means) is assigned to the second profit state determination unit (corresponding to the stopping means) to which the game ball winning the second major winning opening arrives. There is a gaming machine that distributes a gaming ball to two flow paths having different benefits for a player by operating in the left-right direction (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the large winning opening opening / closing accessory that changes the state of the second large winning opening and the distribution unit are controlled to operate at a predetermined operation timing. If the game ball wins a prize just before the closing of the opening / closing accessory, and then the game ball flows down the profit acquisition means, the player is given a profit, but the flow of the game ball is delayed due to an unexpected situation. Before reaching the distribution unit, the distribution unit may change to a non-storage state that is disadvantageous to the player, which may cause dissatisfaction of the player.

On the other hand, if the period until the state change of the second switching means is unnecessarily lengthened, the state change from the stationary state is delayed, so that the discharge of the game ball is delayed, which causes the player to feel distrust. .. Further, while the game ball remains in the stopping means, there is a problem that the player's attention is easily attracted to the stopping means, and the attention of the production of other parts (for example, the liquid crystal screen) is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, only when the game ball is arranged in the elapsed section from the winning opening to the stopping means, the stopping means maintains the stopped state by the change prevention means, so that the game ball is maintained in the elapsed section. Even if the flow of the liquid crystal is stagnant, it is possible to prevent the stopping means from being in a non-stopping state before the game ball reaches the stopping means, and it is possible to eliminate the dissatisfaction of the player and unnecessary. Since the change of state of the stopping means is not delayed until time, it is possible to secure the attention of the effect of the part other than the stopping means (for example, the liquid crystal screen).

In the game machine D1, the stopping means is configured to perform a predetermined operation by storing a predetermined number of game balls, and the game balls can be sent to the profit acquisition means by the predetermined operation. When the game balls arranged in the elapsed section reach the stop means and a predetermined number of game balls are stored in the stop means, until the predetermined operation of the stop means is completed. A game machine D2 characterized in that the stopping means is maintained in a stopped state.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the stopping means is maintained in the stopped state until the predetermined operation of the stopping means is completed, so that the game ball is discharged from the elapsed section to the stopping means. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball is discharged without flowing down to the profit acquisition means due to a non-stop state after the operation of the stopping means is completed.

In addition, when the game balls arranged in the elapsed section reach the stop means, if the number of game balls is less than the predetermined number, the player is immediately put into a non-stop state to attract the player's attention from the vicinity of the stop means. By deflecting it, the attention of other parts of the game board (for example, the liquid crystal display part) can be improved.

In the game machine D2, the second switching means can switch the state by a game ball flowing down the first flow path, and the change prevention means can determine whether or not the game ball can enter the first flow path. A game machine D3 characterized in that it is configured in a mode of switching between.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the state of the second switching means is switched by the game ball flowing down the first flow path, so that the state of the second switching means is changed. The device that causes the above can be replaced by a flow path, and the arrangement space can be reduced. In addition, by switching whether or not the game ball can enter the first flow path by the change prevention means, the game ball flowing down the game area by a random route invades the first flow path at an inappropriate period, which is erroneous. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the second switching means from being changed.

In the game machine D3, the first flow path is connected to a variable winning opening capable of generating a special symbol variation by winning a prize in the game machine D4.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D3, the game ball winning the variable winning opening flows down the first flow path, so that the special game state ends and the next special game state starts. In the meantime, the game ball remaining in the stopping means can be discharged downstream of the stopping means.

That is, when the special game state ends with less than a predetermined number of game balls staying in the stopping means, it is necessary to win the game balls in the variable winning opening in order to shift the game state to the next special game state. Yes, the winning game ball flows down the first flow path and switches the state of the second switching means. Therefore, the game ball remaining in the stop means can be discharged downstream of the stop means by the game for shifting the game state to the next special game state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special game state from starting with the game ball remaining in the stopping means.

In the game machine D2, the second switching means operates based on the operation of the first driving means, and the change preventing means is displaced by the action of the game ball, and the first driving means is said to be the same. A game machine D5 characterized by releasing power transmission to the second switching means.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the driving force of the first driving means is transmitted to the second switching means after the game ball has passed through the elapsed section, and the control mode of the first driving means is changed. Since the state of the second switching means changes based on this, it is possible to easily control the state change of the second switching means after the game ball has passed the elapsed section.

In the game machine D2, the second switching means operates based on the operation of the first driving means, and the change preventing means is displaced by the action of the game ball and is on the opposite side of the profit acquisition means. The game machine D6 is provided with an overhanging plate portion for preventing the game ball flowing down to the vehicle from falling off from the stopping means.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, when the game ball is arranged in the elapsed section by the overhanging plate portion, the game ball flowing down to the opposite side of the profit acquisition means is from the stopping means. It is possible to prevent it from falling off. As a result, even after the state of the second switching means is changed, the game ball can be maintained on the stopping means by the overhanging plate portion.

A game machine Z1 in any one of the game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B7, C1 to C7, and D1 to D6, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B7, C1 to C7, and D1 to D6, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B7, C1 to C7, and D1 to D6, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, in the second profit state determination part where the game ball that has won the big winning opening arrives, by operating the distribution part in the left-right direction, the player can obtain two different streams of profit. There is a gaming machine that distributes gaming balls on the road (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538).
However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the operation relationship between the large winning opening and the distribution unit.
The technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a good operation relationship between a large winning opening and a distribution unit.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the game machine of the technical idea 1 has a winning opening placed in the game area where the game ball flows down, a state in which the game ball can be won in the winning opening, and a state in which the game ball cannot be won. A profit acquisition means that gives a predetermined profit to a player by flowing down a first switching means that switches between, a first driving means that drives the first switching means, and a game ball that has won a prize in the winning opening. In the game machine provided with the above, the game ball that has won the winning opening is configured to be able to be stopped, and the stopped game ball is configured to be able to flow down to the profit acquisition means, and the stop means has been reached. A second switching means for switching between a stopped state in which the game ball can be stopped at the stopping means and a non-stopping state in which the game ball reaching the stopping means is not stopped at the stopping means is provided. The 2 switching means changes the state of the second switching means between the stationary state and the non-stationary state at least once each time the first switching means changes its state between the possible state and the impossible state by a predetermined reference number of times. A means for transmitting the number of times to be made is provided.
The game machine of the technical idea 2 is the game machine described in the technical idea 1, in which the state of the first switching means changes continuously due to the trigger of 1, and the game ball cannot win a prize in the state change. It is composed of a combination of a short-term state change performed with a long length and a long-term state change performed with a length that allows the game ball to win a prize, and is performed the same number of times as an integral multiple of the predetermined reference number of times.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, in which the first switching means continuously changes its state by the trigger of 1, and the number of times transmitting means is the reference. It is formed from a device that circulates in a mode of returning to the initial position every number of times, and includes a returning means for returning the number of times transmitting means to the initial position regardless of the posture of the number of times transmitting means.
<Effect>
According to the game machine described in Technical Thought 1, the operation relationship between the large winning opening and the distribution unit can be improved.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 1, the length of the state change of the large winning opening is extremely different, so that the large winning opening and the distribution section are used. The operation relationship with can be improved.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the degree of freedom in the number of continuous operations due to the trigger of 1 can be improved.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board 65 1st variable winning device 67 Through gate 640a Electric accessory 640 2nd ball opening 650 2nd variable winning device (1st switching means, continuously movable means)
650a Second specified winning opening (winning opening, part of continuously movable means)
650b Open / close plate (part of the first switching means, part of the continuously movable means)
650c solenoid (first drive means, part of return means, part of continuously movable means)
1010 Ball stop device (1st special means, 2nd special means)
1013 L rotary gear (part of the first special means, part of the second special means)
1014 Reversing gear (part of the first special means, part of the second special means)
1015 Flow prevention plate (second switching means)
1016 Transmission rod (part of the first special means, part of the second special means)
1031 Probability change entrance (profit acquisition means)
1040 Tilt member (stopping means)
2010 ball stop device (first special means, second special means)
2012 annular groove (part of the first special means, part of the second special means)
3010 Ball stop device (second special means, delay drive means)
3011a Elastic spring (part of delay drive means, return means)
3012 Drive motor (part of second special means, part of delay drive means)
3013 Switching clutch (part of the second special means, part of the delay drive means)
3014 Rotating disk (part of second special means, part of delay drive means, displacement means)
3016 Switching member (part of the second special means, part of the delay drive means)
4010 Ball stop device (second special means, delay drive means)
4012 Drive motor (part of second special means, part of delay drive means, second drive means)
4013 Friction rotation member (part of second special means, part of delay drive means, transmission clutch)
4014 Rotating disk (part of second special means, part of delay drive means, displacement means, engagement cam)
5100 Ball stop device (number transmission means)
5120 Rotating member (part of number transmission means)
5125 Detection pin (part of return means)
5130 Biasing part (part of the number transmission means, prevention stopper)
5140 Switching device (part of the number transmission means)
5144 Position sensor (part of return means)

Claims (3)

A first switching means for switching between a winning opening arranged in a game area where a game ball flows down, a state in which a game ball can win a prize in the winning opening, and a state in which a game ball cannot win a prize, and the first switching means thereof. In a game machine including a first driving means for driving a player and a profit acquisition means for giving a predetermined profit to a player by flowing down a game ball winning a prize in the winning opening.
A stopping means configured to allow the game ball winning in the winning opening to be stopped and allowing the stopped game ball to flow down to the profit acquisition means.
A second switching means for switching between a stopped state in which the game ball reaching the stopping means can be stopped at the stopping means and a non-stop state in which the game ball reaching the stopping means is not stopped at the stopping means. With,
The second switching means changes the state of the second switching means into the stationary state and the non-stationary state at least once each time the first switching means changes its state between the possible state and the impossible state by a predetermined reference number of times. A game machine characterized by being provided with a means for transmitting the number of times to be changed by. The first switching means continuously changes its state by the trigger of 1.
The state change is composed of a combination of a short-term state change performed at a length that the game ball cannot win and a long-term state change performed at a length that the game ball can win.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the game is performed at the same number of times as an integral multiple of the predetermined reference number of times. The first switching means continuously changes its state by the trigger of 1.
The number-of-times transmitting means is formed of a device that circulates in a manner of returning to the initial position for each reference number of times, and is characterized by including a returning means for returning the number-of-times transmitting means to the initial position regardless of the posture of the number-of-times transmitting means. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.

Images